A163/A251/A252 B047/B048 SERVICE MANUAL

RICOH GROUP COMPANIES

001317MIU

A163/A251/A252/B047/B048
SERVICE MANUAL

RICOH GROUP COMPANIES

A163 FIELD SERVICE MANUAL

001317MIU

It is the reader's responsibility when discussing the information contained within this document to maintain a level of confidentiality that is in the best interest of Ricoh Corporation and its member companies. NO PART OF THIS DOCUMENT MAY BE REPRODUCED IN ANY FASHION AND DISTRIBUTED WITHOUT THE PRIOR PERMISSION OF RICOH CORPORATION. All product names, domain names or product illustrations, including desktop images, used in this document are trademarks, registered trademarks or the property of their respective companies. They are used throughout this book in an informational or editorial fashion only and for the benefit of such companies. No such use, or the use of any trade name, or web site is intended to convey endorsement or other affiliation with Ricoh products.

2000 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved.

WARNING
The Service Manual contains information regarding service techniques, procedures, processes and spare parts of office equipment distributed by Ricoh Corporation. Users of this manual should be either service trained or certified by successfully completing a Ricoh Technical Training Program. Untrained and uncertified users utilizing information contained in this service manual to repair or modify Ricoh equipment risk personal injury, damage to property. or loss of warranty protection.
Ricoh Corporation

LEGEND
PRODUCT CODE A163 A251 A252 B047 B048 GESTETNER N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A COMPANY RICOH FW740 FW750 FW760 FW770 FW780 SAVIN N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

DOCUMENTATION HISTORY
REV. NO. * 1 2 3 4 DATE 5/95 5/96 6/98 8/2001 COMMENTS Original Printing Revised Pages Reprint A251/A252 Addition B047/B048 Addition

IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICES

PREVENTION OF PHYSICAL INJURY
1. Before disassembling or assembling parts of the copier and peripherals, make sure that the copier power cord is unplugged. 2. The wall outlet should be near the copier and easily accessible. 3. Note that some components of the copier and the peripherals are supplied with electrical voltage even if the main switch is turned off. 4. If any adjustment or operation check has to be made with exterior covers off or open while the main switch is turned on, keep hands away from electrified or mechanically driven components. 5. The inside and the metal parts of the fusing unit become extremely hot while the copier is operating. Be careful to avoid touching those components with your bare hands. 6. The copier is not attached to the table. Pushing the copier too hard may cause it to drop onto the floor. While moving the copier, push the table. 7. When the main switch is turned on, the machine will suddenly start turnig to perform the developer initialization. Keep hands away from any mechanical and electrical components during this period.

HEALTH SAFETY CONDITIONS

1. Never operate the copier without the ozone filters installed. 2. Always replace the ozone filters with the specified ones at the specified intervals. 3. Toner and developer are non-toxic, but if you get either of them in your eyes by accident, it may cause temporary eye discomfort. Try to remove with eye drops or flush with water as first aid. If unsuccessful, get medical attention.

OBSERVANCE OF ELECTRICAL SAFETY STANDARDS

1. The copier and its peripherals must be installed and maintained by a customer service representative who has completed the training course on those models. 2. Caution: The RAM pack on the main control board has a lithium battery which can explode if replaced incorrectly. Replace the RAM pack only with an identical one. The manufacturer recommends replacing the entire RAM pack. Do not recharge or burn this battery. Used RAM packs must be handled in accordance with local regulations.

SAFETY AND ECOLOGICAL NOTES FOR DISPOSAL

1. Do not incinerate the toner cartridge or the used toner. Toner dust may ignite suddenly when exposed to open flame. 2. Dispose of used toner, developer, and organic photoconductors according to local regulations. (These are non-toxic supplies.) 3. Dispose of replaced parts in accordance with local regulations. 4. When keeping used RAM packs in order to dispose of them later, do not put more than 100 RAM packs per sealed box. Storing larger numbers or not sealing them apart may lead to chemical reactions and heat build-up.

Table of Contents
OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION
1. SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

COMPONENT LAYOUT AND DESCRIPTIONS

1. PAPER PATH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 2. DRUM PROCESSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 3. MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 4. DRIVE LAYOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 5. ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

INSTALLATION
1. ENVIRONMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
1.1 MINIMUM SPACE REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 1.2 MACHINE LEVEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 1.3 POWER SOURCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 1.4 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 1.5 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12 1.6 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14

SERVICE TABLES
1. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
1.1 PM TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 1.2 REGULAR PM PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

2. SERVICE TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7

2.1 TEST POINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7 2.2 VARIABLE RESISTORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7

3. SERVICE TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8

3.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 3.1.1 Service Program Mode Access Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 3.1.2 Service Program Mode Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 3.2 INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27 FSM i A163

Rev. 9/27/96 3.2.1 INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK MODE ACCESS PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . 4-27 3.2.2 INPUT CHECK MODE TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28 3.2.3 OUTPUT CHECK MODE TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29 3.3 POWER ON INITIAL SETTING MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30

4. JAM CODE LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31

4.1 ACCESS PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31 4.2 JAM CODE TABLE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31

5. SPECIAL TOOLS AND LUBRICANTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33 6. SERVICE REMARKS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34

6.1 DRUM UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34 6.1.1 Drum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34 6.2 CHARGE CORONA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35 6.3 OPTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36 6.4 DEVELOPMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36 6.5 TRANSFER AND SEPARATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37 6.6 CLEANING UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37 6.7 FUSING UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38 6.7A PRESSURE ROLLER EVALUATION PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38 6.8 ORIGINAL FEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39 6.9 PAPER FEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39 6.10 ROLL FEEDER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39 6.11 OTHERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39

REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

1. EXTERIOR COVERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
1.1 LEFT SIDE COVER REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 1.1.1 Left Upper Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 1.1.2 Left Lower Cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 1.2 RIGHT SIDE COVER REMOVAL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 1.2.1 Right Upper Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 1.2.2 Right Lower Front, Right Lower Middle, and Right Lower Rear Covers . . 5-1 1.3 REAR COVER REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 1.3.1 Rear Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

2. OPTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
2.1 ORIGINAL FEED UNIT REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 A163 ii FSM

2.2 EXPOSURE GLASS REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 2.3 EXPOSURE LAMP REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 2.4 FIBER OPTICS ARRAY REMOVAL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 2.5 LIGHT SENSOR REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

3. DEVELOPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
3.1 DEVELOPMENT UNIT REMOVAL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 3.2 DEVELOPER REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 3.3 TONER DENSITY SENSOR REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 3.4 PTL REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 3.5 DEVELOPMENT BIAS VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 3.5.1 Bias Voltage for Image Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 3.5.2 Bias Voltage for Non-image Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12

4. DRUM UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13

4.1 DRUM UNIT REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 4.2 DRUM REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14 4.3 CLEANING BLADE REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15

4.4 CHARGE CORONA UNIT REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16 4.5 CHARGE CORONA WIRE REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17 4.6 PICK-OFF PAWL UNIT REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18 4.7 GRID VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19 4.8 DRUM CURRENT ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20 4.8.1 Charge Current Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22 4.8.2 Transfer Current Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23 4.8.3 Separation Current Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24

5. FUSING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
5.1 FUSING UNIT REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26 5.2 HOT ROLLER REPLACEMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28 5.3 PRESSURE ROLLER REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29 5.4 PRESSURE ROLLER THERMISTOR REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30 5.5 PRESSURE ROLLER STRIPPER UNIT REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30 5.6 HOT ROLLER STRIPPER UNIT REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30 5.7 HOT ROLLER THERMISTOR REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31 5.8 FUSING THERMOFUSE REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31 5.9 FUSING TEMPERATURE ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32

6. T & S CORONA UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33

FSM iii A163

6.1 T & S CORONA UNIT REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33 6.2 TRANSFER AND SEPARATION CORONA WIRE REPLACEMENT . . . . . . 5-34 6.2.1 Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34 6.2.2 Separation Corona Wire Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35 6.2.3 Transfer Corona Wire Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35

7. OTHERS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
7.1 OZONE FILTER REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36 7.2 ANTICONDENSATION HEATER INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37

8. COPY QUALITY ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38

8.1 LIGHT SENSOR ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39 8.2 IMAGE BIAS ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40 8.3 TONER DENSITY ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41 8.4 REGISTRATION ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41

TROUBLESHOOTING
1. COPY QUALITY TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
1.1 LOW IMAGE DENSITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 1.2 UNEVEN COPY IMAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 1.3 DIRTY BACKGROUND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 1.4 BLACK LINE OR BAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 1.5 ENTIRELY BLANK COPY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 1.6 PAPER CREASING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

2. SERVICE CALL CONDITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

2.1 SC Code E-1: Exposure Lamp Abnormal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 2.2 SC Code E-2: Fusing Thermofuse Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 2.3 SC Code E-3: Hot Roller Thermistor Open. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8 2.4 SC Code E-4: Hot Roller Thermistor Short . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8 2.5 SC Code E-5: Pressure Roller Thermistor Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8 2.6 SC Code E-6: Pressure Roller Thermistor Short . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9 2.7 SC Code E-7: Fusing Overheat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9 2.8 SC Code E-8: Fusing Warm-up Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10 2.9 SC Code E-9: Toner Density Sensor Abnormal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10 2.10 SC Code E-10: Main Motor Abnormal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11 2.11 SC Code E-11: Toner Density Sensor adjustment Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11

A163

iv

FSM

3. BLOWN FUSE TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12

3.1 POWER SUPPLY UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12

ROLL FEEDER
1. SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 2. MECHANICAL COMPONENT AND DRIVE LAYOUT . . . . . . . . . 7-2 3. ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 4. MECHANICAL OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
4.1 BASIC OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 4.2 CUTTER UNIT OPENING AND CLOSING MECHANISM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6 4.3 CUTTER OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7

5. SERVICE TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8

5.1 TEST POINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8 5.2 BLOWN FUSE CONDITION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8

6. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9 7. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16

7.1 EXTERIOR COVER REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16 7.1.1 Front Cover Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16 7.1.2 Left and Right Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16 7.2 CUTTER UNIT REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17 7.3 PAPER FEED ROLLER REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18 7.4 PAPER FEED MOTOR TIMING BELT TENSION ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . 7-19 7.5 CUT LENGTH ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20 7.5.1 Preset Cut : Adjustment standards: 3 mm (for length shorter than 420 mm) 5 mm (for 420 to 1189 mm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20 7.6 ROLL FEED PAPER SKEW ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21

FSM

A163

OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION

Rev. 11/2000

1. SPECIFICATIONS
Copy Process: Electrostatic transfer system Sheet feed 2 mm/400mm Maximum: 914 x 2,000 (36" x 80")mm Minimum: A4 (81/2" x 11") lengthwise Same as "Original Size" 3 cpm (A1/D sideways) 24 seconds (A1/D sideways) Within 5 minutes (Room temperature 23oC) 1 to 1 only 2 minutes after copying is finished (can be set to 1, 3, 4, or 5 minutes or to no auto reset) Organic photoconductor drum Single-wire with grid plate (Negative Charge) 1 : 1 (0.5%) Slit exposure via fiber optic array Fluorescent lamp (26 W) Dual-component dry toner system (Type 410, 2 bags) Cartridge system (750g toner/cartridge) 1,860 A1 or D copies per cartridge (6% original) Negative Direct toner density detection by induction sensor Development bias control + exposure control Dual wire ac corona and pick-off pawls Cleaning blade
Overall Machine Information
A163

Configuration:

Table top

Original Skew
Tolerance: Original Size: Copy Size:

Original Feed:

Copying Speed: First Copy: Warm-up Time: Multi-Copy: Automatic Reset: Photoconductor: Drum Charge: Reproduction Ratio: Exposure System: Exposure Lamp: Development: Toner Replenishment: Toner Consumption: Development Bias: Toner Density Control: Image Density Adjustment: Paper Separation: Cleaning:

FSM

1-1

Paper Feeding: Image Fusing: Fusing Lamp: Self-diagnostic Codes: Power Source:

Manual feed (roll feeder optional) Heat and pressure type, teflon (upper) and silicone rubber (lower) rollers Nichrome wire lamp (115 V: 1,100 W, 230 V: 1,100 W) 11 codes, displayed in copy counter 115 V/60 Hz....15 A 220 V/50 Hz....7 A 230 V/50Hz.....7 A 240 V/50 Hz....7 A Maximum: Warm-up: Ready: Copy cycle: 1.4 kW 1.2 kW 0.04 to 1.2 kW 1.3 kW

Power Consumption:

Dimensions (W x D x H): Weight:

1,080 x 570 x 490 mm 42.1" x 22.2" x 19.1" 76 kg, 167.4 lb

Optional Equipment and Machine Configuration Main frame A163 copier Configuration Optional equipment Roll feeder (A571) Roll cutting rail (A570) Side guides (A569) Additional equipment Table (A714) ---

Other Optional Equipment

Paper Spool Drum anti-condensation heater

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

A163

1-2

FSM

COMPONENT LAYOUT AND DESCRIPTION

1. PAPER PATH

D E A

A: Original Path B: Paper from the manual feed C: Paper from the roller feed D: Paper exit E: Original Path from Rear Feeder

A163

2-1

FSM

Rev. 5/95

2. DRUM PROCESSES
2

1 8

1. Charge In the dark the charge corona unit applies a negative charge to the drum. The grid wire ensures the charge is applied uniformly. The charge remains on the surface of the drum because the photoconductive drum has a high electrical resistance in the dark. 2. Exposure High intensity light from a fluorescent lamp is reflected from the moving original through the fiber optic array. The charge on the drum surface is dissipated in direct proportion to the intensity of the reflected light, thus producing an electric latent image on the drum surface.

FSM

2-2

A163

3. Development The magnetic developer brush on the development roller comes in contact with the latent image on the drum surface. Toner particles are electrostatically attracted to the negatively charged latent image areas. 4. Pre-Transfer Lamp The pre-transfer lamp (PTL) illuminates the drum prior to image transfer. This reduces the attraction between the toner and the drum, thus making image transfer easier. 5. Image Transfer Copy paper is fed to the drum surface, at the exact timing, to align the copy paper and the developed image on the drum surface. Then a strong negative charge is applied to the back side of the paper. The negative charge pulls the toner particles from the drum surface onto the paper. 6. Paper Separation A strong ac corona discharge is applied to the back side of the copy paper, reducing the charge on the paper and breaking the electrostatic attraction between the paper and the drum. Then, the stiffness of the copy paper causes it to separate from the drum. The pick-off pawls help to separate paper which has low stiffness. 7. Cleaning The cleaning blade, which is angled against drum rotation (counter blade system), removes any toner remaining on the drum surface. 8. Quenching The light from the quenching lamp electrically neutralizes the surface of the drum.

A163

2-3

FSM

3. MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT

22 21

23 24 25

20 19 18 17 16 15 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 14 11

13 12

FSM

2-4

A163

1. 1st Original Feed Roller 2. 1st Press Rollers 3. Copy Tray 4. Exit Rollers 5. Fusing Exit Rollers 6. Hot Roller 7. Pressure Roller 8. Gas Spring 9. OPC Drum 10. T/S Corona Unit 11. Main Drive Unit 12. Table 13. Paper Spool

14. Roll Feeder 15. Paper Registration Rollers 16. Development Unit 17. Toner Cartridge 18. Manual Feed Table 19. Charge Corona Unit 20. 2nd Original Feed Roller 21. Original Table 22. 2nd Press Rollers 23. Exposure Lamp 24. Fiber Optic Array 25. Cleaning Blade

A163

2-5

FSM

4. DRIVE LAYOUT

11

12 13

15 14

16

10

5 6

1. Original Feed Roller Pulley 2. Original Feed Roller One Way Pully 3. Development Unit 4. Development Unit Relay Gear 5. Development Drive Chain 6. Paper Registration Roller Clutch 7. Drum Drive Relay Gear 8. Main Motor

9. Fusing Drive Chain 10. Exit Unit Drive Belt 11. Hot Roller Drive Gear 12. Fusing Drive Sprocket/Gear 13. Toner Collection Coil Drive Gear 14. Drum Drive Gear 15. Original Feed Drive Pulley 16. Original Feed Drive Belt

FSM

2-6

A163

5. ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS

Refer to the electrical component layout on the reverse side of the Point to Point (Water proof paper) index numbers. Name Motors Main Exhaust Fan Function Drives all mechanical components except the fans. (DC Motor) Removes the ozone built up around the drum section to the ozone filter. (DC Motor) Index. No.

32 5

Magnetic Clutches Registration Toner Supply Solenoids Pick-off Pawl Switches Main Supplies power to the copier. 17 18 12 Original & Paper Cuts ac power when the original or paper feed Feed Safety unit is opened. Fusing Exit Safety Sensors Door Open Toner Density Original Registration Light Entrance Feed Indicates "Door Open" in the operation panel and prohibits the key operation. Detects the density of toner in the developer. Detects when the original lead edge passes at the front of the exposure glass. Detects the intensity of the exposure lamp output. Detects when copy paper is inserted (jam detector). 29 26 4 27 Cuts ac power when the fusing exit unit is opened. Moves the pick-off pawls against the drum. 6 Drives the registration rollers. Turns on to supply toner to the development unit. 30 31

24

A163

2-7

FSM

Name Registration Exit

Function Detects when copy paper arrives at the registration rollers (jam detector). Detects jams through the fusing exit unit.

Index. No. 25 7

Printed Circuit Boards Main PSU AC Drive FL Regulator Operation Panel Lamps Exposure Fusing Pre-Transfer (PTL) Quenching (QL) Provides light to reflect the originals image onto the drum (fluorescent lamp). Provides heat to the fusing unit. Reduces the charge on the drum surface prior to image transfer. Neutralizes any charge remaining on the drum surface after cleaning. 2 3 20 1 Controls all copier functions both directly and through other PCBs. Converts the ac voltage to dc voltage. Provides ac power to the fusing lamp and PSU. Stabilizes power to the exposure lamp. Control the operation panel display. 22 21 15 23 10

Power Packs Charge/Bias/Grid Provides high voltage power for the charge Power Pack corona, charge grid, and development bias. Transfer/ Separation Thermistors Hot Roller Pressure Roller Monitors the hot rollers surface temperature. Monitors the pressure rollers surface temperature. 8 11 Provides high voltage power for the transfer corona and separation. 19 16

Thermofuses Fusing Protects against fusing overheat. 9

Heaters
FSM 2-8 A163

Name Function Anticondensation Keeps moisture from forming inside the copier (option). Others Total Counter Circuit Breaker (Europe, Asia)/ Fuse (U.S.A.) Keeps track of the total length of copies made (Europe) or the total copies made (U.S.A.). Guards against voltage surges in the input power.

Index. No. 13

28

14

A163

2-9

FSM

FSM

2-10

A163

INSTALLATION

1. ENVIRONMENT
1. Temperature Range: 2. Humidity Range: 3. Ambient Illumination: 4. Ventilation: 15oC to 30oC (59oF to 86oF) 20% to 80% RH Less than 1,500 Lux (do not expose to direct sunlight). Minimum space 20 m3 Room air should turn over at least 30 m3/hr/person. Less than 0.15 mg/m3 (4 x 10-3 oz/yd3)

5. Ambient Dust:

6. If the installation place is air-conditioned or heated, place the machine as follows: a) Where it will not be subjected to sudden temperature changes from low to high, or vice versa. b) Where it will not be directly exposed to cool air from an air conditioner in the summer. c) Where it will be directly exposed to reflected heat from a space heater in the winter. 7. Avoid placing the machine in an area filled with corrosive gases. 8. Avoid any area higher than 2,000 m (6,500 ft) above sea level. 9. Place the machine on a strong and level base. 10. Avoid any area where the machine may be subjected to frequent strong vibration.

FSM

3-1

A163

1.1 MINIMUM SPACE REQUIREMENTS

Back 600 mm

Left 600 mm Front 1000 mm

Right 600 mm

1. Front: 2. Back: 3. Right: 4. Left:

1,000 mm (39 in) 600 mm (24 in) 600 mm (24 in) 600 mm (24 in)

1.2 MACHINE LEVEL

1. Front to back: Within 5 mm (0.2") of level 2. Right to left: Within 5 mm (0.2") of level Make sure that the machine is level using a carpenters level.

A163

3-2

FSM

1.3 POWER SOURCE

1. Input Voltage Level: 115 V/60 Hz More than 15 A (for U.S.A. version) 220 V/230 V/240 V/50 Hz More than 7 A (for European version) 2. Permissible Voltage Fluctuation:
10%

3. Do not set anything on the power cord. NOTE: a) Make sure the plug is firmly inserted in the outlet. b) Avoid multi-wiring.

FSM

3-3

A163

1.4 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Copier Check the accessories and their quantities according to the following list: Guide Wire ............................................................. 2 pcs Copy Tray ............................................................... 1 pc Copy Guide ............................................................ 1 pc

A163

3-4

FSM

[D]

[B]

[E] [C]

[E]

[A]

1. Lower the feet [A] so that the table does not move while the copier is being installed on the table. 2. Place the copier [B] on the table [C] (Place the copier feet [D] into the table holes [E]). Warning: The copier is not attached to the table. Pushing the copier too hard may cause it to drop onto the floor. While moving the copier, push the table.

FSM

3-5

A163

Rev. 5/95

[A]

[C]

[B]

[D] [E] 3. Open the paper path section [A] and remove two strips of shipping tape [B]. 4. Remove the right upper cover [C] (2 screws). 5. Remove the drum protection sheet [D], and remove the screw [E] to apply cleaning blade pressure to the drum. Remove paper from transport section. Close the paper path section.

A163

3-6

FSM

Rev. 5/95

[A]

[E] [C] [B]

[D]

6. Open the original feed unit [A], manual feed table [B], and toner supply cover [C]. Remove a sheet [D] covering the developer entrance. Pour 1 kg of the developer [E] into the development unit evenly across its width as shown, then close all doors. 7. Plug in the power supply cord and turn on the main switch.

FSM

3-7

A163

Rev. 5/95

[D]

[B]

[A]

[C]

[E] NOTE: If the fusing temperature is lower than 60C when the main switch is turned on, the main motor will rotate. In this case, it is not necessary to access the SP mode when loading the second Kg of developer (in step 11). Turn off the main switch to stop the main motor after the developer is loaded from the development entrance. 8. Press the following keys on the operation panel: Clear Mode key [A] + key [B] + key Clear/Stop key [C] 9. Press the Clear/Stop key again for longer than 3 seconds. The wrench and toner end indicators will blink (SP INPUT/OUTPUT mode). 10. Select 23 using the + key [D] and press the RF Select key [E]. The main motor will rotate. 11. Press the RF Select key to stop the main motor after the developer is loaded from the development entrance. Pour in another kg of developer into the development unit evenly across its width (Total: 2 Kg). Press the Clear Modes/Stand by key 3 times to leave the SP mode.

A163

3-8

FSM

Rev. 5/95

[C]

[B]

[A]

[D]

[E]

[F]

12. Press the following keys on the operation panel: Clear key [A] + key [B] --key [C] Clear/Stop key [D] 13. Press the Clear/Stop key again for longer than 3 seconds. The roll paper end and call service indicators will blink (SP mode). 14. Select 36 using the + and - keys. Enter "1" by pressing the following keys. Function Select key [E] + key RF Select key [F] Five minutes later, the copier will automatically return to the normal operating mode from SP mode. (New developer initialization)

FSM

3-9

A163

[A]

[B]

[C]

15. Install the toner cartridge [A] as shown. 16. Remove the sealing tape [B] from the cartridge and turn the knob [C] until it stops.

A163

3-10

FSM

[A] [C] [B]

17. Attach the guide wires [A] to the copy tray [B]. 18. Install the copy tray [B] and copy guide [C]. 19. Reinstall all the covers. 20. Check the copy quality and copier operation.

FSM

3-11

A163

1.5 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Table Check the accessories and their quantities according to the following list: Top Plate ................................................................ 1 Left Side Plate ........................................................ 1 Right Side Plate ..................................................... 1 Middle Plate ........................................................... 1 Rear Cover ............................................................. 1 Screws with Spring Washer - M4x8 .......................14

A163

3-12

FSM

Rev. 5/95

[E]

[D] [H]

[C]

[A] [G] [E]

[C] [A] [A] A, B [F] [A]

[D] [B]

[A]

NOTE: To ensure grounding, paint has been removed from the surfaces around the screw holes [A] (only from the surfaces where the two components meet) and from the surface around the screw hole [B] at the inside of the left plate. 1. Temporarily install the top plate [C], left [D], and right side plate [E] (6 screws). 2. Turn the table up-side down in the direction of A. 3. Install the middle plate [F] and rear cover [G] (4 screws each). 4. Tighten all the screws until the spring washers [H] of screws are flattened. 5. Flip the table the correct way.

FSM

3-13

A163

1.6 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Roll Cutting Rail Check the accessories and their quantities according to the following list: Cutter Guide ........................................................... 1 pc Cutter Knife ............................................................ 1 pc Roll Paper Arm ....................................................... 2 pcs Roll Paper Shaft ..................................................... 1 pc Roll Shaft Holder .................................................... 2 pcs Roll Flange ............................................................. 2 pcs

[A]

[B] [A] [B]

1. Remove the small caps [A] from the lower front cover. 2. Attach the roll shaft holders [B] as shown.

A163

3-14

FSM

[J] [G] [K]

[A]

[C] [E] [B] [H] [A] [G]

[D] [C] [F]

[H] [I]

[I]

3. Attach the roll paper arms [A] to the cutter guide [B]. (Install each arm pin [C] into each cutter guide hole [D]. Position the cutter guide pin [E] in the lower slot of the roll paper arm [F].) 4. Install the cutter guide on the roll shaft holder [G]. 5. Slide the roll paper shaft [H] into the roll paper. 6. Fit the roll flanges [I] onto the roll paper shaft (both ends). 7. Push the roll flanges [I] inside to fix the roll paper position. 8. Set the roll paper shaft on the roll shaft holder. 9. Set the paper between the cutter guide stay [J] and slide shafts [K]. 10. Check the roll cutting rail operation.

FSM

3-15

A163

SERVICE TABLES

1.
1.1

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE

PM TABLE
Symbol key: I=Inspect L=Lubricate R=Replace A=Adjust C=Clean
EM 2.1KM (3.6K) ( 4.3KM 6.4KM 8.6KM (7.2K) (10.8K) (14.4K) ) A1 sideways/D size 10.8KM (18K)

Notes

A. Original Feed 1 First original feed roller 2 Second original feed roller 3 1st and 2nd press rollers 4 Original table B. Optics 1 Fiber optics array 2 Exposure lamp

C C I C C C I C

C C C C I C

Alcohol Alcohol

Alcohol Alcohol Clean with lens paper if necessary Clean using water if necessary Water or alcohol Alcohol Replace at 20K (A1 sideways/ D size) Clean using a dry cloth if necessary Clean using a dry cloth if necessary Clean at 60K (A1 sideways/ D size)

3 Exposure glass 4 Reflection plate C. Development 1 Developer

C C

C C

C C

C C

C C

C C

2 Cartridge holder 3 Entrance seal

4 Development filter

D. Around drum 1 Corona wires 2 Grid wires 3 Charge corona end blocks and casing 4 Pre-transfer lamp C C C C C C C C C C Clean using blower brush if necessary R C Dry cloth Dry cloth Dry cloth

FSM

4-1

A163

EM

2.1KM (3.6K) ( C C C

4.3KM 6.4KM 8.6KM (7.2K) (10.8K) (14.4K) ) A1 sideways/D size C C C C C C C C C

10.8KM (18K)

Notes Dry cloth Dry cloth

5 T/S corona wires 6 T/S corona end blocks and casing 7 Pick-off pawls 8 Quenching Lamp E. Cleaning 1 Cleaning blade

R C C

Dry cloth Clean using blower brush if necessary Replace at 20K (A1 sideways/ D size) Replace if damaged Empty used toner

I 2 Cleaning seal 3 Toner tank

I I

I I

I I

I I

I I

F. Paper Feed 1 Registration roller 2 Paper feed guide plate 3 Manual feed table G. Fusing 1 Hot roller

C C C

C C C

C C C

C C C

C C C

Water Water Water

2 Pressure roller

3 Thermistors 4 Hot roller strippers 5 Pressure roller stripper 6 Entrance guide plate C C

C C C C C

Replace at 48K (A1 sideways/ D size) Replace at 60K (A1 sideways/ D size) Clean using suitable solvent Clean using suitable solvent Clean using suitable solvent Clean using suitable solvent if necessary Clean using alcohol

7 Exit turn guide

A163

4-2

FSM

EM

2.1KM (3.6K) (

4.3KM 6.4KM 8.6KM (7.2K) (10.8K) (14.4K) ) A1 sideways/D size

10.8KM (18K)

Notes Clean using suitable solvent if necessary

8 Exit guide plate

Others 1 Chain I 2 Gears I 3 Ozone filter F. Roll Feeder 1 Feed Roller R I R I R I R I R I I I I

Lubricate with G501 if necessary Lubricate with G501 if necessary

Alcohol

FSM

4-3

A163

1.2

REGULAR PM PROCEDURE

1. Make a copy

Make a copy of OS-A1 chart.

2. Original Feed (every 3.6K)

Clean the original table using alcohol. Inspect the 1st and 2nd press rollers. If they are dirty, clean them using alcohol.

Original Feed (every 7.2K)

1. Clean the first and second original feed rollers using alcohol. 2. Clean the first and second press rollers using alcohol.

3. Optics (every 3.6K)

1. Clean the reflection plate using alcohol.

2. Clean the exposure glass using water. 3. Clean the exposure lamp using water if necessary. 4. Clean the fiber optics array using lens paper if necessary.

4. Around Drum (every 3.6K)

NOTE: After removing the drum, wrap it in clear sheets of paper to protect it. 1. Clean the charge corona wire, T& S corona wires and grid wires using a dry cloth. (Do not expand the corona wires.) 2. Clean the T/S corona end blocks, casing using a dry cloth. 3. Clean the pick-off pawls using a dry cloth. 4. Clean the pre-transfer lamp if it is dirty. 5. Clean the quenching lamp if it is dirty.

A163

4-4

FSM

Around Drum (every 7.2K)

Clean the charge corona end blocks and casing.

Around Drum (every 18K)

Replace the charge corona wires and T/S corona wires.

5. Cleaning Unit (every 3.6K)

1. Inspect the cleaning blade. Replace it, if it is damaged. 2. Inspect the cleaning seal. Replace it, if it is damaged.

Cleaning Unit (every 20K)

Replace the cleaning blade.

6. Development Unit (every 3.6K)

1. Clean the cartridge holder using a dry cloth if it is dirty. 2. Clean the entrance seal using a dry cloth if it is dirty.

Development Unit (every 30K)

Replace the developer.

Development Unit (every 60K)

Clean the development filter.

FSM

4-5

A163

7. Paper Feed (every 3.6K)

1. Clean the registration roller using water.

2. Clean the paper feed guide plates using water. 3. Clean the manual table using water.

8. Fusing Unit (every 3.6K)

Clean the small separation rollers using suitable solvent.

Fusing Unit (every 6.4K)

1. Clean the fusing thermistors using suitable solvent. 2. Clean the hot roller strippers using suitable solvent.

Fusing Unit (every 48K)

Replace the hot roller.

9. Others (every 3.6K)

1. Inspect the drive chain. Lubricate using G501 if necessary. 2. Inspect the drive gears. Lubricate using G501 if necessary. 3. Replace the ozone filter.

10. Roll Feeder (every 3.6K)

1. Clean the feed roller using alcohol.

11. Copy Quality.

1. Check the copy quality. 2. Perform the light sensor adjustment.

A163

4-6

FSM

2.
2.1

SERVICE TABLES
TEST POINTS
Function VAA (+24V) Vcc (+5V) GND Toner density sensor (CN104-A10) Light sensor output (CN104-B1)

Main Board
Number TP101 TP102 TP103 TP104 TP105

Charge/Bias/Grid Power Pack

Number TP1 TP2 Function Development Bias Voltage Grid Voltage

2.2

VARIABLE RESISTORS
Function Charge Corona Voltage

Charge/Bias/Grid Power Pack

Number VR1

Caution: VR1 should not be changed in the field. Charge corona can be adjusted using SP #--10.

T&S Power Pack

Number Function VRT Transfer Corona Voltage VRD (DC) Separation Corona Voltage (DC) VRD (AC) Separation Corona Voltage (AC)

Caution: VRT, VRD (DC), and VRD (AC) should not be changed in the field. They can be adjusted using SP #--12 to --17.

FSM

4-7

A163

3.
3.1

SERVICE TOOLS
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE

The service program (SP) mode is used to check electrical data, change mode or adjustment values. 3.1.1 Service Program Mode Access Procedure How to access the SP mode for service representatives (All service program modes can be accessed with this procedure.) Press the following keys in sequence. key is pressed, hold it down for more than 3 indicators blink).

The second time that the seconds (until the and

How to access the SP mode for customers and sales representatives modes 1 to 35 are accessible by a customer with this procedure.) Press and key then hold down indicators blink).

(SP

key more than 3 seconds (until the

How to leave the SP mode Press the following keys in sequence

or turn off the main switch. NOTE: Each of the above procedure must be finished within 20 seconds. How to select the program number The program number can be selected by the and keys. The selected program number is displayed in the lead edge erase indicator (the two digit indicator beside the mark). To select the program number quickly, hold down or key.

A163

4-8

FSM

How to change settings 1. Access the SP mode and select the program number. 2. Press the key to select the paper length indicator (the four digit indicator beside the mark). 3. The present setting is displayed in the paper length indicator. 4. Select the setting using the key to enter the selected setting. 5. Leave the SP mode. How to read data 1. Access the SP mode and select the program number. 2. Press the key and select the paper length indicator (the four digit indicator beside the mark). 3. Press the 4. Press key, then the paper length indicator shows the data. key again to stop displaying the data. and keys, then press the

FSM

4-9

A163

3.1.2 Service Program Mode Table 1: A "*" before the mode number means that the mode can be accessed by custormers or sales representative. 2: In the data colum, the default value is printed in bold letters. The default settings for several items depend on the machine destination (refer to page 4-26.).

Mode No. Fusing Temperature 1 (Normal) *1

Function Selects the fusing temperature for plain paper.

Data 0: Mode 1 1: Mode 2 2: Mode 3 3: Mode 4 4: Mode 5 5: Mode 6 6: Mode 7

*2

*3

*4

*5

*6

*7

Selects the fusing temperature for translucent 0: Mode 5 paper. 1: Mode 6 2: Mode 7 3: Mode 8 Selects the fusing temperature for translucent 0: Mode 2 Fusing Temperature 3 film. 1: Mode 3 (Low) 2: Mode 4 3: Mode 5 Copy Count Selects the copy count amount up or down. 0: Up Up/Down 1: Down Beeper On/Off Selects if the beeper sounds or not. 0: On 1: Off 2: Only when the edge margin or paper length is changed continuously, the beeper is off. Paper Feed Out Selects the time to when the paper is 0: 2 minutes Waiting Time automatically fed out after it has been set on 1: 1 minute Setting the manual table, or after the Roll Feed 2: 3 minutes Select key is pressed. 3: 4 minutes 4: 5 minutes Manual Feed Start Selects the time to when the registration 0: 2 seconds Time Setting roller starts rotating after the entrance sensor 1: 0.7 second detects the paper leading edge. 2: 1 second 3: 3 seconds 4: 4 seconds 5: 5 seconds

Fusing Temperature 2 (High)

A163

4-10

FSM

Rev. 1/26/96 Mode No. Function Data Count up/down at To change the leading edge margin (print Leading Edge every: Increase/Decrease number) increase/decrease speed, the 0: 0.1 second customer holds down the + or -- key. Then, Speed Setting *8 1: 0.50 second after a few 0.25 second intervals (See SP 2: 0.25 second mode 12), the speed begins to change. SP 3: 0.05 second mode 8 determines the rate of speed 4: 0.02 second increase/decrease. Auto Reset Time Selects the time to return to the initial setting. 0: 2 minutes 1: 1 minutes Setting 2: 3 minutes *9 3: 4 minutes 4: 5 minutes 5: No auto reset Auto Energy The machine goes into energy saver mode at 0: No *10 Saver Mode auto reset time. 1: Auto Energy Saver Mode Screen Message Setting *11 Selects one of the options indicated on the display in the energy saver mode. 0: None 1: Pre-HEAt 2: HEllo i lovE yoU 3: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 4: SLEEPinG 5: HAvE A Good dAy. 0: 3 intervals 1: 1 intervals 2: 2 intervals 3: 10 intervals

Leading Edge Increase/Decrease *12 Adjustment Preliminary Interval 13 14 Not Used Not Used Auto Off 15 16 to 19 Not Used

The leading edge margin (print number, paper length) increase/decrease speed starts to change several 0.25 second intervals after the customer starts the adjustment procedure. This SP mode adjusts the number of 0.25 second intervals.

Auto off time can be selected

1 ~ 120 minutes (1 minute per step) Default: 30 minutes

Paper Length Count Up/Down *20 Setting Paper Length Up/Down Speed Setting

Selects if the paper length is in count down or 0: Down up when the preset cut key is pressed. (Long Short) 1: Up (Short Long) To change the paper length increase/decrease speed, the customer holds down the + or -- key. Then, after a few 0.25 second intervals (See SP mode 12), the speed begins to change. SP mode 21 determines the rate of speed increase/decrease. Selects the fixed paper size pattern chosen when the "Preset Cut" key is pressed. 0: 0.10 second 1: 0.5 second 2: 0.25 second 3: 0.05 second 4: 0.02 second 5: 0.01 second Refer to page 4-25.

*21

*22

Fixed Paper Size Pattern Setting

Optional Paper *23 Size Setting to *32

Up to 10 different paper size can be stored UdEF: Undefined from 23 to 32. If "19" is selected in SP No. 22, this data is used as fixed paper size when the "Preset Cut" key is pressed.

FSM

4-11

A163

Rev. 12/22/95 Mode No. Optional Paper Size Setting Function Data Up to 10 different paper size can be stored UdEF: Undefined from 23 to 32. If "19" is selected in SP No. 22, this data is used as fixed paper size when the "Preset Cut" key is pressed.

*23 to *32 33 to 34 *35

Not Used

All Indicators On

Turns on all the indicators on the operation panel when the Roll Feed Select key is pressed. Carries out the new developer initialization for 5 minutes. The machine counts down the remaining time on the display. After the initialization, the machine automatically adjusts the toner sensor output to 4.0 0.1V. During the toner sensor adjustment, "Adj" is displayed. When the adjustment is completed, the machine automatically returns to normal operating mode.

0: No 1: All indicators on If the initialization is canceled before returning to the normal operating mode, do it again from the beginning. If the machine fails to adjust the toner sensor output, "E=11" is indicated. 0: Release SC 1: SC condition

New Developer Initialization

36

37 38 39 40

Not Used Release Fusing Unit Service Call Not Used Roll Feeder Identification Roll Feeder Speed Setting (Factory Use) Roll Feeder Cutting Length Adjustment (300 mm, Plain Paper) Roll Feeder Cutting Length Adjustment (300 mm, Translucent Paper) Roll Feeder Cutting Length Adjustment (300 mm, translucent Film) Identify the roll feeder installation. 0: No 1: Roll Feeder Installed 0: Standard --50 0 50 Faster Slower 0: Standard --9.9 0 9.9 mm Longer Shorter Recovers from the fusing unit SC condition. After it has been recovered, the machine returns to its initial (power on) condition.

41

To adjust the paper feed speed of the roll feeder. To adjust the cutting length of 300 mm in the plain paper mode.

42

To adjust the cutting length of 300 mm in the translucent paper mode.

43

To adjust the cutting length of 300 mm in the translucent film mode.

44

A163

4-12

FSM

45

46

47

48

Mode No. Roll Feeder Cutting Length Adjustment (1100 mm, Plain Paper) Roll Feeder Cutting Length Adjustment (1100 mm, translucent Paper) Roll Feeder Cutting Length Adjustment (1100 mm, Translucent Film) Not Used Main Motor Speed Adjustment

Function To adjust the cutting length of 1100 mm in the plain paper mode.

Data 0: Standard --50.00 50.0 mm Longer Shorter

To adjust the cutting length of 1100 mm in the translucent paper mode.

To adjust the cutting length of 1100 mm in the translucent film mode.

49

50

Toner End Detection Setting

Used Toner

51

Used Toner Counter 52

0: Standard --9 0 11 Slower Faster If the main motor speed is incorrect, PJ56 or PJ57 will be indicated when a long copy is made. In these cases this adjustment is required. Determines the possible number of copies 0: 27 sheets (when A1 paper is used) after the toner near 1: 9 sheets end condition. 2: 18 sheets 3: 36 sheets Determines the total copy length before the 0: 1220 toner overflow indicator lights. 1: 610 2: 915 3: 1000 4: 1464 5: 1830 6: 2000 7: 2440 8: No overflow indication 9: 10m (Should be used for test) Indicates the copy length after clearing the tF=XX,XXX used toner counter. This counter is (Beeper) automatically cleared if the clear mode key is pressed after turning off and on the main switch in the full toner condition.

To change the main motor speed.

FSM

4-13

A163

Mode No. Used Toner Counter Clear

Function Clear used toner counter.

53

54

Developer Warm-up Setting

Data 0: Full toner condition is not detected 1: Full toner condition is detected. To clear the counter, input "0" even if "0" is already indicated. Determines the warm-up time to increase the 0: 1 minute Q/M of the developer. This warm-up is done 1: 2 minute 2: 3 minute if the fusing temperature is lower than 60 C 3: None when the main switch is turned on. (In mm mode) 0: 2000 mm 1: 3600 mm 2: 5200 mm 3: 6800 mm 4: 8400 mm 5: 9999 mm (In inch mode) 0: 80.0 inch 1: 160.0 inch 2: 240.0 inch 3: 320.0 inch 4: 400.0 inch 5: 480.0 inch 0: 99 sheets 1: 10 sheets 2: 20 sheets 3: 30 sheets 4: 40 sheets 5: 50 sheets 6: 67 sheets 7: 70 sheets 8: 80 sheets 9: 90 sheets

Paper Length Limit Setting

Determines the maximum paper length. Note: If paper longer than 2000 mm is used, skew copy, poor fusing, crease copy original damage might occur.

55

Copy Number Limit Setting

Determines the maximum copy number.

56

57 to 58 59

Not Used

Misfeed Special Recovery Mode Fixed Paper Length Special Mode

60

While the Emergency Stop key is held down, the main motor and the registration clutch are energized. Each time +/-- key is pressed while holding the Preset Cut key down, the length selected in SP mode 61 is increased/reduced from the preset paper size.

0: No 1: Misfeed Special Recovery Mode 0: Normal 1: Fixed Paper Length Special Mode

A163

4-14

FSM

Mode No. Fixed Paper Length Special Mode

Function Selects the interval of each step for SP60.

Data (In mm mode) 0: 100 mm 1: 50 mm 2: 60 mm 3: 120 mm 4: 200 mm 5: 240 mm 6: 250 mm 7: 500 mm 8: 600 mm (In inch mode) 0: 10.0 inch 1: 5.0 inch 2: 6.0 inch 3: 12.0 inch 4: 20.0 inch 5: 24.0 inch 6: 25.0 inch 7: 50.0 inch 8: 60.0 inch

61

Special Toner Supply Mode 62

In the energy saver mode, 10% toner supply 0: No is done while the "Emergency Stop" key is 1: Special Toner pressed. Toner sensor voltage is displayed Supply Mode on the "Paper Length" indicator. If the voltage is lower than 1V, toner is not supplied. Selects the indication speed on the display. 0: 300 ms/letter 1: 100 ms/letter 2: 200 ms/letter 3: 400 ms/letter 4: 500 ms/letter Example: vEr_1994_06_06_01 Year Date

63

Not Used SP Mode Display Speed Setting

64

ROM Version Display 65

Indicates the ROM version.

Month Internal Use Only RAM Abnormal Condition Check 66 Displays the total number of abnormal conditions of the back-up RAM. A number is added if an abnormal RAM condition is detected when the machine is powered on.

67 to 69

Not Used

FSM

4-15

A163

Mode No. Total Copy Length/Number Display 70 to 75

Function Displays the total copy length/number according to the following units. SP70 = Yard SP71 = meter SP72 = 100 inches SP73 = 50 inches SP74 = A1 length (594 mm) SP75 = sheet (any size)

Data SP70: t0 = XXX,XXX SP71: t1=XXX,XXX SP72: t2=XXX,XXX SP73: t3=XXX,XXX SP74: t4=XXX,XXX SP75: t5=XXX,XXX

OPC Counter 76

Developer Counter Display 77

Toner Counter Display 78

Toner Supply Level Indication

79

Number of Misfeeds by Location 80 to 85

Displays the total length of copied paper after do = XX,XXX the OPC drum is installed. This counter should be cleared when the OPC drum is replaced. (SP #--1) Displays the total length [m] of copied paper dE = XX,XXX This counter is after the new developer is poured. automatically cleared when the new developer initialization is done. Displays the total length of copied paper [m] dt = XX,XXX after a new toner cartridge is installed. This counter is automatically cleared when the new toner cartridge is installed. Indicates the present toner sensor level. dL = ab -- -- c a: Toner density setting n, H, L b: TS level 0~5 c: Copy number step 0: ~30m 1: ~60m 3: ~90m 4: ~120m 5: ~150m 6: 150m ~ Displays the total number of paper misfeeds Jt = XXX by location. Misfeed location codes displayed Jt = Total Jam in each SP number are as follows: SP80: Jt, J90, J98, J99 SP81: J01, J02, J03, J04 SP82: J20, J21, J22, J23 SP83: J30, J31, J32 SP84: J40, J41, J42, J43 SP85: J56, J57, J58, J59

A163

4-16

FSM

Mode No. Misfeed Record Display

Function Displays the locations of the last five misfeeds one after the other.

86

Data J1 = XX (Last jam) J2 = XX (1 before the last jam) J3 = XX (2 before the last jam) J4 = XX (3 before the last jam) J5 = XX (4 before the last jam) Beeper (XX = Jam Location)

87 to 89 90 to 92

Not Used

Number of Service Calls by Location

Service Call Records

93

Et = XXX Displays the total number of service calls (SC) by location. SC codes displayed in each Et = Total SCs SP number are as follows: SP90: Et, E1, E9, E10, E11 SP91: E2, E3, E4, E5 SP92: E6, E7, E8 Displays the last five service calls one after E1 = XX (The last error code) the other. E2 = XX (1 before the last error code) E3 = XX (2 before the last error code) E4 = XX (3 before the last error code) E5 = XX (4 before the last error code) Beeper (XX= Error Code)

94 to 99

Not Used

FSM

4-17

A163

Mode No. RAM Clear

--1

Function Data Clears selected data items form the RAM. To 0: Not Used clear the memory, input the number of the 1: Copy Number item you want to delete, then press the Counter (The memory for key. SP75) Note: 2: Copy Length If all the memory is cleared (if a number from Counter 20 to 28 is selected), reinput the factory (SP70 to 74) settings that are shown on the decal attached 3: OPC Counter inside the upper right cover. (SP76) Please refer to page 4-26 to know the default 4: Developer settings for each destination. (When No. 10 Counter to 26 is selected.) (SP77)(*Note1) 5: Toner Counter (SP78) 6: Counter for toner density step.(*Note2) 7: Clear data No.1 to 9 and 53. 8: SC Counter (SP90 to 93) 9: Jam Counter (SP80 to 86) 10: Not Used

* Note: 1 This counter is not used for the toner density step control (described on page 2-16). * Note: 2 For the toner density step control, this counter counts down from 150 (m) to 0 (m) after the developer initialization. When the developer initialization is done, this counter to 150 and after 150m of copies, the counter stays at 0. If this counter is cleared, the counter is set to 0.

A163

4-18

FSM

Mode No.

Function

Data 11: Change the setting to the U.S.A. version 12: Not Used 13: Not Used 14: Not Used 15: Not Used 16: Not Used 17: Factory use 18: Not Used

--1

19: Not Used 20: Not Used 21: Clear all the memories and change the setting to the U.S.A version 22: Not Used 23: Not Used 24: Not Used 25: Not Used 26: Not Used

--1

27: Factory use 28: Clear all the memories Total Counter Unit Selects the unit in which the total counter Setting counts up by. 0: 1 yard 1: 1 m 2: 100 inches 3: 50 inches 4: A1 length (594 mm) 5. Sheet (Any size) Selects the unit in which the edge margin and 0: mm paper length is indicated by. 1: Inch 0: Standard --9.9 0 9.9 mm Advance Delay

--2

--3 --4 --5

Inch/mm Exchange Not Used Registration Adjustment

Adjusts the paper registration.

FSM

4-19

A163

Mode No. Light Sensor Adjustment --6

--7

Hot Roller Temperature Adjustment Pressure Roller Temperature Adjustment Hot Roller/ Pressure Roller Temperature Display

--8

Function Data Change the light sensor setting. 50: Standard Turn on and off the exposure lamp using the 0 50 99 Copy Media key. Darker Lighter Tracing paper: ON Film: OFF Change the hot roller temperature setting. 0: Standard --9 0 9C Decrease Increase Change the pressure roller temperature 0: Standard setting. --9 0 9C Decrease Increase Displays the hot roller temperature and Fu = XXX Pr = XXX pressure roller temperature. Fu: Hot roller Even if the SP mode is canceled when the temperature temperature is displayed, the temperature is Pr: Pressure roller continuously displayed during stand-by temperature condition or copy cycle. If the hot roller temperature To release this condition, turn the main switch off and on. is lower than 100 C (pressure roller temperature is lower than 50C), "LLL" is indicated. If the hot roller temperature is higher than 210C (pressure roller temperature is higher than 180C), "HHH" is indicated. Determines the drum charge voltage. 200: Standard In this mode, the charge corona can be 150 200 249 turned on and off using the Copy Media key. Low High Translucent paper = ON Translucent Film = OFF 9: Standard 0 9 15 Low High

--9

Drum Charge Setting --10

Copy Grid Setting Determines the copy grid voltage. In this mode, the grid voltage can be turned on and off using the Copy Media key. --11 Translucent paper = ON Translucent Film = OFF Transfer Corona Voltage Setting --12

Determines the transfer corona voltage. 80: Standard In this mode, the transfer corona can be 40 80 120 turned on and off using the Copy Media key. Low High Translucent paper = ON Translucent Film = OFF Determines the transfer corona voltage at the 120: Standard paper trailing edge. 40 120 249 In this mode, the transfer corona can be Low High turned on and off using the Copy Media key. Translucent paper = ON Translucent Film = OFF

Transfer Voltage at Paper Trailing Edge Setting --13

A163

4-20

FSM

Mode No. Separation AC Voltage Setting --14

Function Data Determines the AC separation corona 170: Standard voltage. 130 170 220 In this mode, the separation corona can be Low High turned on and off using the Copy Media key. Translucent paper = ON Translucent Film = OFF Determines the AC separation corona 190: Standard voltage at the paper leading edge. 130 190 220 In this mode, the separation corona can be Low High turned on and off using the Copy Media key. Translucent paper = ON Translucent Film = OFF Determines the DC separation corona 200: Standard voltage. 0 200 249 In this mode, the separation corona can be Low High turned on and off using the Copy Media key. Translucent paper = ON Translucent Film = OFF

Separation AC Voltage at the Paper Leading --15 Edge Setting

Separation DC Voltage Setting

--16

Separation DC Voltage at the Paper Leading --17 Edge Setting

Determines the DC separation corona 200: Standard voltage at the paper leading edge. 0 200 249 In this mode, the separation corona can be Low High turned on and off using the Copy Media key. Translucent paper = ON Translucent Film = OFF

--18 Not Used to --19 Bias Voltage for the Image Area Setting --20

Determines the development bias voltage for 3: Standard the image area. 038 In this mode, the bias voltage can be turned Low High on and off using the Copy Media key. Translucent paper = ON Translucent Film = OFF Determines the development bias voltage for 4: Standard the non-image area. 048 In this mode, the bias voltage can be turned Low High on and off using the Copy Media key. Translucent paper = ON Translucent Film = OFF

Bias Voltage for Non-image Area Setting --21

FSM

4-21

A163

Mode No. Toner Density Setting

Function Data Selects the toner density setting. The toner 0: Standard density changes according to the copy length 1: Low after the developer is replaced. 2: High Copy length (A1 size) ~ 30 m (~50 sheets) ~ 60 m (~100 sheets) ~ 90 m (~150 sheets) ~ 120 m (~200 sheets) ~ 150 m (~250 sheets) Std. Low High

4.25V 4.35V 4.00V 4.00V 4.30V 3.50V 3.50V 4.25V 3.00V 3.00V 3.75V 2.50V 2.50V 3.25V 2.00V

--22

23 to 24

Not Used

Toner Density Sensor Voltage Setting --30

Toner Sensor --31 Voltage Display (Last Copy)

Changes the toner density sensor voltage. Normally, the value is automatically adjusted when the new developer initialization (SP36) is done. In this mode, PTL, main motor, QL and the bias voltage for non-image area can be turned on and off using the Copy Media key. Translucent paper = ON Translucent Film = OFF Displays the toner sensor output voltage for the last copy.

80: Standard 50 80 120 Low High

A = X,XX (Beeper)

A163

4-22

FSM

Mode No. Toner Sensor Voltage Display (Real Time)

--32

Function Displays the real time toner sensor output voltage. In this mode, the PTL, main motor, QL and the bias voltage for non-image areas can be turned on and off using the Copy Media key. Translucent paper = ON Translucent Film = OFF Even if the SP mode is canceled when the voltage is displayed, the voltage is displayed during the stand-by condition or copy cycling (the toner sensor output voltage, paper length and copy counter are displayed one after the other). To release this condition, turn the main switch off and on.

Data A = X,XX A = Toner Sensor Voltage During the stand-by condition, and copy cycling the following data is displayed. A=X,XX LE=X,XXX CO=XX (Beeper) LE = Paper Length (ex. 297 mm: LE=0.297 12 inch: LE=0.120) CO=Copy counter

--33 Not Used to --44 Forced Ready Condition --50 (Factory Use) --51 Lamp Off Mode

Goes to "Ready" condition ignoring the fusing 0: Normal temperature. This mode cannot be used 1: Forced Ready during the development idling. Condition Fluorescent lamp does not turn on during the copy cycle. Ignores jam detections except for initial jams. The setting automatically returns to "0" when the main switch is turned off. The machine caries out copy operation without an original. This mode can be used if the optional roll feeder is installed and selected paper length is more than 594mm. The machine starts operation when the roll feed select key is pressed, and stops when the Emergency Stop key is pressed. 0: Normal 1: Lamp off 0: Normal 1: No Misfeed Detection 0: Normal 1: Next Paper is fed when the fusing exit sensor is deactivated. 2~250: Next paper is fed (X-1) seconds after the fusing exit sensor is deactivated. X = Input Number

No Misfeed --52 Detection Mode Free Run Mode

--53

--54 Not Used to --59 Fluorescent Lamp Counts the time when the exposure sensor is 0~250: The total time Abnormal Time more than 1 V higher than the target value. (seconds) that the --60 Check 1 lamp voltage is more than 1 volt higher than the target value.

FSM

4-23

A163

Mode No. Function Data Fluorescent Lamp Counts the time when the fluorescent lamp is 0~250: The total time Abnormal Time in full power during the copy cycle. (seconds) that the --61 Check 2 fluorescent lamp is at full power. --62 Not Used 0: NO 1: Manual Feed Attention Mode 1 Manual Feed 0: NO --65 Attention Mode 2 1: Manual Feed Attention Mode 2 Partial copy Enable to make "+" margin in the partial copy 0: NO Leading Edge mode, ("--" margin cannot be made.) 1: "+" margin can be --66 Margin made in the part copy mode Toner Full Supply In the Special Toner Supply mode (SP62), if 0: NO Mode the "clear/stop" key is pressed while the 1: Toner Full Supply --67 "Emergency Stop" key is pressed, 100%, Mode toner supply is done. Combine Originals Normally the copy process stops at the 0: Normal Mode trailing edge of paper or original which ever 1: Combine comes first. If this mode is selected, copy Originals Mode --68 process continues to the paper trailing edge even if the original trailing edge comes first. Using this mode, several originals can be combined on copy sheet. --63 Factory Use Only Manual Feed --64 Attention Mode 1 Beeper sounds if a sheet is set on the manual feed table before the "Set Paper" indicator lights. Beeper sounds when the manual table is ready to accept the next sheet.

A163

4-24

FSM

Fixed Paper Size Pattern Data (SP No.22)

In mm Mode 0: 1189, 841, 594, 420, 297 1: 2000, 1189, 841, 594, 420, 297, 245 2: 2000, 1900, 1800, 1700, 1600, 1500, 1400, 1300, 1200, 1100, 1000, 900, 800, 700, 600, 500, 400, 300, 245 3: 2000, 1900, 1800, 1700, 1600, 1500, 1400, 1300, 1200, 1189, 841, 594, 420, 297, 245 4: 2000, 1800, 1456, 1189, 1030, 841, 728, 594, 515, 420, 364, 297, 245 5: 2000, 1500, 1230, 880, 625, 450, 330, 245 6: 1456, 1030, 728, 515, 364, 257 7: 2000, 1456, 1030, 728 515, 364, 257, 245 8: 9: 10: 11: 12: 2000, 1500, 1189, 1100, 841, 594, 420, 300, 297, 245 2000, 1456, 1200, 1189, 1091, 1085, 1030, 1016, 1000, 939, 900, 880, 841, 813, 788, 765, 762, 758, 728, 679, 636, 625, 594, 591,546, 515, 508, 420,364, 297, 257 2000, 1800, 1600, 1400, 1200, 1000, 800, 600, 400, 245 2000, 1750, 1500, 1250, 1000, 750, 500, 245 2000, 1950, 1900, 1850, 1800, 1750, 1700, 1650, 1600, 1550, 1500, 1450, 1400, 1350, 1300, 1250, 1200, 1150, 1100, 1050, 1000, 950, 900, 850, 800, 750, 700, 650, 600, 550, 500, 450, 400, 350, 300, 245 2000, 1800, 1500, 1189, 1100, 1050, 1000, 950, 900, 841, 800, 750, 700, 650, 594, 550, 500, 420, 297, 245 2000, 1800, 1456, 1200, 1189, 1085, 1030, 900, 880, 841, 765, 728, 625, 594, 515, 420, 364, 297, 245 2000, 1800, 1500, 1200, 1189, 594, 245 2000, 1800, 1500, 1200, 1000, 841, 420, 245 2000, 1800, 1500, 1220, 1189, 915, 841, 610, 594, 458, 420, 305, 297, 245 2000, 1800, 1500, 1189, 1118, 864, 841, 594, 559, 432, 420, 297, 280, 245 The data stored in SP23 to 32

13: 14: 15: 16: 17: 18: 19:

In inch Mode 0: 48.0, 36.0, 24.0, 18.0, 12.0 1: 44.0, 34.0, 22.0, 17.0, 11.0 2: 80.0, 72.0, 64.0, 48.0, 36.0, 24.0, 18.0, 12.0, 9.6 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: 8: 9: 10: 11: 12: 80.0, 72.0, 64.0, 44.0, 34.0, 22.0, 17.0, 11.0, 9.6 80.0, 72.0, 64.0, 48.0, 44.0, 36.0, 34.0, 24.0, 22.0, 18.0, 17.0, 12.0, 11.0, 9.6 80.0, 70.0, 60.0, 50.0, 40.0, 30.0, 20.0, 10.0, 9.6 80.0, 75.0, 70.0, 65.0, 60.0, 55.0, 50.0, 45.0, 40.0, 35.0, 30.0, 25.0, 20.0, 15.0, 10.0, 9.6 80.0, 75.0, 70.0, 65.0, 60.0, 55.0, 50.0, 48.0, 36.0, 24.0, 18.0, 12.0, 9.6 80.0, 75.0, 70.0, 65.0, 60.0, 55.0, 50.0, 44.0, 34.0, 22.0, 17.0, 11.0, 9.6 80.0, 75.0, 70.0, 65.0, 60.0, 55.0, 50.0, 48.0, 44.0, 36.0, 34.0, 24.0, 22.0, 18.0, 17.0, 12.0, 11.0, 9.6 80.0, 77.5, 75.0, 72.5, 70.0, 67.5, 65.0, 62.5, 60.0, 57.5, 55.0, 52.5, 50.0, 47.5, 45.0, 42.5, 40.0, 37.5, 35.0, 32.5, 30.0, 27.5, 25.0, 22.5, 20.0, 17.5, 15.0, 12.5, 10.0, 9.6 80.0, 77.5, 75.0, 72.5, 70.0, 67.5, 65.0, 62.5, 60.0, 57.5, 55.0, 52.5, 50.0, 48.0, 36.0, 34.0, 24.0, 22.0, 18.0, 17.0, 12.0, 11.0, 9.6 80.0, 77.5, 75.0, 72.5, 70.0, 67.5, 65.0, 62.5, 60.0, 57.5, 55.0, 52.5, 50.0, 48.0, 36.0, 24.0, 18.0, 12.0, 9.6 4-25 A163

FSM

13: 14:

15: 16: 17: 18: 19:

80.0, 77.5, 75.0, 72.5, 70.0, 67.5, 65.0, 62.5, 60.0, 57.5, 55.0, 52.5, 50.0, 44.0, 34.0, 22.0, 17.0, 11.0, 9.6 80.0, 78.0, 76.0, 74.0, 72.0, 70.0, 68.0, 66.0, 64.0, 62.0, 60.0, 58.0, 56.0, 54.0, 52.0, 50.0, 48.0, 46.0, 44.0, 42.0, 40.0, 38.0, 36.0, 34.0, 32.0, 30.0, 28.0, 26.0, 24.0, 22.0, 20.0, 18.0, 16.0, 14.0, 12.0, 10.0, 9,6 80.0, 72.0, 60.0, 48.0, 36.0, 24.0, 12.0, 9.6 80.0, 78.0, 72.0, 66.0, 60.0, 50.0, 54.0, 48.0, 42.0, 36.0, 30.0, 24.0, 18.0, 12.0, 9.6 80.0, 78.0, 75.0, 72.0, 69.0, 66.0, 63.0, 60.0, 57.0, 54.0, 51.0, 48.0, 45.0, 42.0, 39.0, 36.0, 33.0, 30.0, 27.0, 24.0, 21.0, 18.0, 15.0, 12.0, 9.6 80.0, 72.0, 64.0, 57.3, 48.0, 46.8, 40.6, 36.0, 34.0, 33.1, 28.7, 24.0, 23.4, 22.0, 20.3, 18.0, 17.0, 16.6, 14.4, 12.0, 11.7, 11.0, 10.1, 9.6 The data stored in SP23 to 32

Default Settings (SP # --1)

SP. No. #1 #2 #3 #4 #5 #6 #8 #9 #10 #20 #21 #22 #--2 #--3 U.S.A. 2 0 1 0 2 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 5 1

A163

4-26

FSM

3.2

INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK MODE

The input check mode allows you to check the current status of electrical components (such as sensors, switches, etc.) from the operation panel. The output check mode allows you to turn the individual electrical components (such as motors, solenoids, etc.) ON/OFF from the operation panel. 3.2.1 INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK MODE ACCESS PROCEDURE How to access the output check mode Press the following keys in sequence.

The second time that the seconds (until the and

key is pressed, hold it down for more than 3 indicators blink).

How to leave the input/output check mode Press the following keys in sequence.

or turn off the main switch. NOTE: Each of the above procedures must be finished within 20 seconds.

How to select the program number The program number can be selected by pressing the To select an input check mode, press the To select an output check mode, press the key. key. and keys.

The selected number is displayed on the lead edge erase indicator (the two digit indicator beside the mark). To select the program number quickly, hold down the or key.

FSM

4-27

A163

Rev. 5/95

3.2.2 INPUT CHECK MODE TABLE The on/off status of the selected electrical component is displayed on the paper length indicator ("ON" or "OFF" is displayed.). If a program number not used is selected, "NOT" is displayed.
Program No. --1 --2 --3 --4 Sensor/Switch /Signal

Registration Sensor Exit Sensor Original Registration Sensor Entrance Sensor Main Motor LOC Signal (Status is --5 "ON" when the main motor is normally rotating.) Door Switch (Status is "ON" when the --6 door is open.) --7 to --9 Not Used --10 R/F Leading Edge Sensor --11 Roll Feeder Door Switch --12 Right Cutter Switch --13 Left Cutter Switch --14 Paper End Sensor

A163

4-28

FSM

3.2.3 OUTPUT CHECK MODE TABLE Press the key to turn on the selected electrical component. The status of the component is displayed on the paper length indicator. To turn off the component, press the
Program No. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 to 19 20 21 22 Electrical Component Main Motor Toner Supply Clutch Pick off solenoid Registration Clutch Total Counter Pre-transfer Lamp Quenching Lamp Fusing Lamp Exposure Lamp (100% duty ratio) Exposure Lamp (selected ID level)

key again.

Main Charge Corona Grid Voltage Transfer Charge Corona Not Used Separation Charge Corona Not Used Bias Voltage for the Image Area Bias Voltage for the Non-image Area Main Charge Corona + Grid Voltage Main Motor + PTL + Bias Voltage for 23 the Non-image Area + Quenching Lamp 24 to 25 Not Used 26 27 28 Roll Feeder Dehumidity Heaters Roll Feeder Cutter Motor *Note Roller Feeder Paper Feed Motor

NOTE: The cutter unit continuously moves between the left and right cutter switches. The number of the movement (0~9999) is displayed on the paper length indicator.

FSM

4-29

A163

3.3

POWER ON INITIAL SETTING MODE

The initial setting, when the main switch is turned on, can be changed in this mode. The procedure is as follows: 1. Turn on the main switch while holding the Emergencey stop key down and indicators blink). 2. Input the operation panel setting that the customer requires (paper size, image density, etc.). 3. Turn off the main switch. The setting, just before the main switch is turned off, is memorized as the power on initial setting. It appears again when the main switch is turned on.

A163

4-30

FSM

4.

JAM CODE LIST

When a document (original) jam or paper jam occurs, the cause of the jam is displayed by using the following jam code.

4.1

ACCESS PROCEDURE

1. When a document jam or paper jam occurs, press and hold the Clear/Stop key. 2. Read the jam code.

4.2
Code PJ01 PJ02 PJ03 PJ04 PJ05 PJ20 PJ21 PJ22 PJ23 PJ30 PJ31 PJ32 PJ40 PJ41 PJ42 PJ43 PJ56 PJ57 PJ58 PJ59

JAM CODE TABLE

Cause of Jam Initial misfeed at the registration sensor. Initial misfeed at the exit sensor. SP Mode No. SP81 (Initial Jams)

Initial misfeed at the original registration sensor. Initial misfeed at the entrance sensor. Initial misfeed at the leading edge sensor of the roll feeder. Registration sensor OFF check at the paper leading SP82 edge. (Manual Feed and Registration sensor ON check at the paper leading edge. Registration Jams) Registration sensor OFF check at the paper trailing edge. Registration sensor ON check at the paper trailing edge. Exit sensor OFF check at the paper leading edge. Exit sensor ON check at the paper leading edge. Exit sensor OFF check at the paper trailing edge. Leading edge sensor ON check at the paper leading edge. Leading edge sensor OFF check at the paper leading edge. Paper cutter failure. Door open during the roll feeding. Leading edge sensor ON check at the paper trailing edge. Leading edge sensor OFF check at the paper trailing edge. Entrance sensor ON during the roll feeding. Registration sensor ON check at the paper leading edge (in roll feeding). SP83 (Jams at Fusing Unit) SP84 (Roll Feeder Jams)

SP85 (Roll Feeder Jams)

FSM

4-31

A163

Code PJ90 PJ98 PJ99

Cause of Jam Roll feeder. motor does not turn off after paper is fed 500 mm more than the maximum paper length. Registration sensor does not turn off after paper is fed 2500 mm. Original registration sensor does not turn off after paper is fed 2500 mm.

SP Mode No. SP80 (Others)

NOTE: To display total jam number, access SP mode No. 80.

A163

4-32

FSM

5.
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

SPECIAL TOOLS AND LUBRICANTS

DESCRIPTION Digital Multimeter Deluxe Test Lead Accessory Kit Grease -- Mobil Temp.78 Grease-G501 Current Measuring Drum Test Chart OS-A1 (2 sheets/set) Spring Hook Setting Powder PART NO. 54209507 54209508 54479078 52039501 A0239520 A0239504 54199653 54429101 REMARKS BECKMAN RMS3030 BECKMAN DL241 400 g/can

FSM

4-33

A163

6.
6.1

SERVICE REMARKS
DRUM UNIT

6.1.1 Drum The organic photoconductor drum is comparatively more sensitive to light and ammonia gas than a selenium drum. 1. Never expose the drum to direct sunlight. 2. Never expose the drum to direct light of more than 1,000 Lux for more than a minute. 3. Never touch the drum surface with bare hands. When the drum surface is touched with a finger or becomes dirty, wipe with a dry cloth or clean with wet cotton. Wipe with a dry cloth after cleaning with wet cotton. 4. Never use alcohol to clean the drum; alcohol dissolves the drum surface. 5. Store the drum in a cool, dry place away from heat. 6. Take care not to scratch the drum as the drum layer is thin and is easily damaged. 7. Never expose the drum to corrosive gases such as ammonia gas. 8. Always keep the drum in the protective sheet when inserting or pulling the drum unit out of the copier to avoid exposing it to bright light or direct sunlight. This will protect the drum from light fatigue. 9. Before removing the drum, place a sheet of paper under the drum to catch any falling toner. 10. Dispose of used drums according to local regulations. 11. Perform the light sensor adjustment when a new drum is installed. 12. Hold both ends of the drum unit to carry it. 13. Be careful not to scratch the drum with the pick-off pawls when removing or reinstalling the drum. 14. When installing and/or removing the pick-off pawl unit, do not press too strongly. Otherwise, the drum unit may deform.

A163

4-34

FSM

15. When the drum unit is removed from the copier, do not close the paper path section if possible. Otherwise, the gas springs at both sides open the paper path section forcibly if the paper path section is released. If you close the paper path section, take care not to injure yourself by opening the paper path section. Also, releasing only one side of the paper path section deform the copier machine, which may cause paper jam and copy image problem. Release both levers together while holding the paper path section to open the paper path section slowly. 16. The drum unit is heavy. Take care not to injure yourself by dropping the drum unit when removing and installing it.

6.2

CHARGE CORONA

1. The wire can also be cleaned with a blower brush. If the wire is cleaned with a dry cloth, make sure that the wire does not become stretched. Do not use sand paper or a solvent. 2. Do not touch the corona wire and the grid wires with oily hands. Oil stains may cause uneven image density on copies. 3. Make sure that the corona wire is correctly positioned and that there is no foreign material (iron filings, etc.) on the casing. 4. Clean the grid wires with a dry cloth. 5. When reinstalling the charge corona unit, make sure that the 2 connectors (C for the charge corona, G for the grid bias) are set properly. 6. Make sure that the grid wires are correctly placed on the eight slots, are all straight, and not crossed. 7. Do not expand and bend the corona wires and grid wires. 8. Make sure that the wire junction is positioned inside the right endblock.

FSM

4-35

A163

6.3

OPTICS

1. Clean the exposure glass with water or alcohol. 2. Clean the fiber optics array with lens paper or silicone cloth. 3. Make sure that the exposure glass is under the rear original guide plate when reassembling. 4. Make sure that the direction of the aperture of the exposure lamp is towards the fiber optics array side (rear side) when reassembling. 5. When reassembling, be careful not to damage the right side of the fiber optics array by touching the optics side plate.

6.4

DEVELOPMENT

1. Be careful not to nick or scratch the development roller. 2. Clean the drive gears after removing used developer. 3. Initial conditioning (SP#36) is necessary when the developer is replaced. 4. Dispose of used developer according to local regulations. 5. Do not loosen the painted screws which determine the development doctor blade height and do not push the doctor blade too hard, otherwise the doctor gap may change. 6. Be careful not to bend the bias terminal. 7. When the development unit is removed from the copier, do not close the paper path section if possible. Otherwise, the gas springs at both sides open the paper path section forcibly if the paper path section is released. If you close the paper path section, be careful not to injure yourself when opening the paper path section. Also, releasing only one side of the paper path section deform the copier machine, which may cause paper jam and copy image problem. Release both levers together while holding the paper path section to open the paper path section slowly. 8. The development unit is heavy. Take care not to injure yourself by dropping the development unit when removing and installing it. 9. During the developer initialization, do not turn off the main switch, or do not open the original feed unit or the paper path section, or do not unplug the copier power cord. If these conditions happen, do the developer initialization again, the toner density sensor cannot be adjusted.

A163

4-36

FSM

6.5

TRANSFER AND SEPARATION

1. Clean the corona wires with a blower brush. If the wires are cleaned with a dry cloth, make sure that the wire does not become stretched. 2. When adjusting the corona current, always use the drum current measuring drum. 3. Make sure that the T & S corona unit is set correctly by pressing it down when reinstalling. 4. Handle the new wire by the ends only. Oil from your hands may cause uneven charge on the drum. 5. Do not expand and bend the corona wires. 6. Do not rub the corona wires with rough material (sand paper,... etc.) as this will damage the corona wire. 7. Do not use any solvent to clean the wire as this will cause uneven charge on the drum.

6.6

CLEANING UNIT

1. Be careful not to damage the edge of the cleaning blade. 2. Dispose of used toner according to local regulations. 3. Do not press the cleaning blade too hard. Otherwise, the drum unit may deform. 4. When installing or replacing the cleaning blade, release the pressure several times manually, and then hold down the cleaning blade gently along its entire length ensure that the cleaning blade contacts the drum. Otherwise, cleaning failure may occur. 5. When replacing the cleaning blade, apply setting powder on the edge of the cleaning blade. 6. Empty the toner collection bottle every service call and clear the memory counter SP#52 for used toner overflow detection by SP#53. Do not perform SP#53 without emptying the toner collection bottle. If "FULL" is indicated in the copy counter, SP#52 can also be reset to 0 by pressing the Clear Modes/Standby key after opening and closing the paper path section. Instruct customers to deal with the toner collection bottle if the "FULL" condition is indicated.

FSM

4-37

A163

Rev. 9/27/96

6.7 FUSING UNIT

1. Be careful not to damage the edges of the hot roller strippers and tension springs. 2. Do not touch the fusing lamp with bare hands. 3. Make sure that the fusing lamp does not touch the hot roller. 4. Be careful not to damage the hot roller thermistor and pressure roller thermistor when removing and reinstalling hot roller or the pressure roller. 5. The fusing unit is heavy. Take care not to injure yourself by dropping the fusing unit when removing and installing it.

6.7A

PRESSURE ROLLER EVALUATION PROCEDURE

The following procedure is a method to determine whether the pressure roller should be replaced. 1. Access Sp mode with the steps below. In order, press Clear Modes (C) key, Plus (+) key, Minus (-) key, Clear/Stop key, press and hold the Clear/Stop key again for longer than 3 seconds. 2. Select Lamp Off Mode with the steps below. a) Confirm that "Lead Margin" indicators lights. If "Lead Margin" indicator does not light, press Function Select key until it lights. b) Select "-51" by pressing Minus key. ("-51" is the number to select Lamp Off Mode.) c) Press Function Select key until "Paper Length" indicator lights. d) Select "1" by pressing Plus key. ("1" is the number to set Lamp Off Mode.) e) Press RF Select key to set Lamp Off Mode. 3. To prevent a paper misfeed create a lead edge margin with the steps below. a) Press Function Select key until "Lead Margin" indicator lights. b) Continue to press Plus key until "99 mm" or "4.0 inches" (max. value) is indicated. 4. Make a copy using a less fusible kind of paper like film, translucent paper or thicker plain paper with vertical grain direction. Note: Before making a copy, set the fusing temperature setting to the mode which is one step lower than the proper setting for the particular kind of paper. For example, if the proper setting is Mode 3, select Mode 2 for this test. Refer to TSB No. FW740-010 for more information regarding the proper settings for particular types of paper and the adjustment procedure for non-listed papers.
4-38 FSM

A163

5. Scrape some black areas on the copy using a cotton cloth approximately 5 times. 6. Check whether the toner is peeled off on the areas that correspond with the scraped parts of the pressure roller. If white lines and/or bands appear, the pressure roller should be replaced with a new one. 7. Before turning the main switch "OFF" to reset the SP mode, reset "Lamp Off Mode", "Lead Margin" and "Fusing Temperature Setting" back to the original settings.

Rev. 9/27/96

6.8 ORIGINAL FEED

1. Do not touch the original feed rollers, original registration rollers, platen roller and press rollers with bare hands. 2. Clean the white plate with water or alcohol.

6.9 PAPER FEED

Service Tables A163

1. Do not touch the manual feed rollers and registration rollers with bare hands. 2. A worn out registration roller causes paper to crease. It should be replaced.

6.10 ROLL FEEDER

1. The copier is not attached to the table and roll feeder is attached to the table and copier. Do not lift the copier from the table, otherwise roll feeder unit is deformed. 2. When the copier and roll feeder is moved, loosen the screws for angle bracket and spacer and retighten them for absorb floor distortion.

6.11 OTHERS
1. When replacing the main board, if the RAM on the old main board is still usable, remove and place it on the new main board. Then, install the new main board in the copier. 2. After installing the new main board with a new RAM, clear the RAM memory. (Do not clear RAM memory if you have placed the old RAM on the new main board.) 3. Take care not to damage the mylars on the rear feed table during servicing. 4. When replacing a sensor, do not overtighten the screws. This may damage the sensor.

FSM

4-39

REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

1.

EXTERIOR COVERS
[A] [C] [B] [J] [I] [H] [G] [D] [E] [F]

1.1

LEFT SIDE COVER REMOVAL

1.1.1 Left Upper Cover 1. Remove the left upper cover [A] (2 screws). 1.1.2 Left Lower Cover 1. Open the paper path section [B]. 2. Remove the left lower cover [C] (2 screws).

1.2

RIGHT SIDE COVER REMOVAL

1.2.1 Right Upper Cover 1. Remove the right upper cover [D] (2 screws). 1.2.2 Right Lower Front, Right Lower Middle, and Right Lower Rear Covers 1. Open the paper path section. 2. Remove the right lower cover [E] (2 screws), right lower middle cover [F], and toner collection bottle [G]. 3. Remove the right lower rear cover [H] (1 screw).

1.3

REAR COVER REMOVAL

1.3.1 Rear Cover 1. Remove the rear cover [I] (2 screws). NOTE: When re-installing the rear cover, push in the rear cover hooking portion [J] over the copier bottom plate as shown.

FSM

5-1

A163

2.

OPTICS
[C] [A] [D]

[B]

[E]

[G]

[F]

2.1

ORIGINAL FEED UNIT REMOVAL

1. Remove the left and right upper covers. 2. Remove the copy tray [A]. 3. Push the projections [B] into the holes [C] of the rear side of the original feed unit as shown and remove the operation panel [D] (2 connectors). 4. Open the original feed unit [E] and unhook the stoppers [F] at both ends. 5. Turn the original feed unit and two bushings [G] at both ends 1/4 of a turn and remove.

A163

5-2

FSM

[F] [C]

[C]

[B]

[E]

[D]

[A]

2.2

EXPOSURE GLASS REMOVAL

1. Remove the original feed unit. 2. Remove the exposure glass bracket [A] (2 screws). 3. Remove the rear original guide plate [B] (2 screws). 4. Remove the exposure glass [C] by sliding it out to the right side and lifting up the left side as shown. NOTE: Make sure that the exposure glass is under the rear original guide plate when reassembling.

2.3

EXPOSURE LAMP REMOVAL

1. Remove the exposure glass. 2. Remove the front original guide plate [D] (2 screws). NOTE: If the exposure lamp is too tight to be turned, remove one side of the exposure lamp socket (1 screw) and remove the exposure lamp. 3. Turn the exposure lamp [E] 1/4 of a turn and remove. NOTE: Make sure that the direction of the aperture [F] of the exposure lamp is towards the fiber optics array side (rear side).

FSM

5-3

A163

2.4

FIBER OPTICS ARRAY REMOVAL

[C]

[B]

[D] [A]

1. Follow the steps from 1 to 3 of the exposure lamp removal. 2. Remove the original registration sensor bracket [A] (1 screw). 3. Lift up the fiber optics array [B] and remove it from the left side by sliding it out to the right side as shown. NOTE: When reassembling, be careful not to damage the right side [C] of the fiber optics array by touching the optics side plate [D].

A163

5-4

FSM

2.5

LIGHT SENSOR REPLACEMENT

Rev. 5/95

[A]

1. Remove the exposure lamp. 2. Replace the light sensor [A] (1 screw, 1 connector). 3. Perform light sensor adjustment. See page 5-39

FSM

5-5

A163

3.
3.1

DEVELOPMENT
DEVELOPMENT UNIT REMOVAL

[B]

[A] [C]

1. Remove the left and right upper cover. 2. Open the paper path section and original feed unit. 3. Remove the toner supply cover [A]. 4. Remove the manual entrance feed cover [B] (2 pins). 5. Remove the paper feed driven unit [C] (2 screws and 1 connector).

A163

5-6

FSM

[A] [B] [A]

[A] [B] [A] [E]

[C]

[D] [F] [G] [F]

6. Remove the 4 shoulder screws [A] and 2 screws [B] fixing the development unit. 7. Disconnect the 14p connector [C] and remove it out of the cutout [D]. 8. Remove the development unit [E].

CAUTION: Do not loosen the painted screws [F] which determine the development doctor blade height and do not push the doctor blade [G] too strongly, otherwise the doctor gap may change.

FSM

5-7

A163

3.2

DEVELOPER REMOVAL
[B] [C]

[A]

[D]

NOTE: Be careful not to bend the bias terminal. 1. Remove the development unit and place it on a large sheet of paper [A] as shown. 2. Remove the toner supply unit casing [B] (2 pins) and development filter [C] and bracket [C] and clean them. 3. Stand up the development unit as shown (the drive section of the unit is the upper side). 4. Turn the paddle roller knob [D] clockwise. The developer will fall out onto the paper. 5. Repeat step 4 until all of the developer has been dumped out. 6. Clean the development unit prior to reassembling. Especially, clean the right end of the unit.

A163

5-8

FSM

3.3

TONER DENSITY SENSOR REPLACEMENT

[C]

[E]

[D] [B]

[A]

1. Remove the development unit. 2. Disconnect the harness connector [A] and take the harness from the 2 clamps [B]. 3. Remove the 2 screws [C] of the toner density sensor holder. 4. Pull out the harness from the toner density sensor side until the relay connector [D] appears. 5. Replace the toner density sensor [E] (2 screws and 1 connector).

FSM

5-9

A163

3.4

PTL REPLACEMENT

[B] [A]

1. Remove the paper feed driven unit (follow the steps from 1 to 5 of the development unit removal). 2. Remove the PTL assembly [A] (4 screws, 3 connectors, and 4 clamps [B]).

A163

5-10

FSM

3.5

DEVELOPMENT BIAS VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT

NOTE: This adjustment is required when the charge/bias/grid power pack is replaced. Preparation: 1. Turn off the main switch, and remove the rear cover. 2. Connect the ground terminal of the multimeter to the machine ground, and connect the voltage terminal to TP1 on the charge/bias/grid power pack. 3. Set the multimeter range to dc 1500 V. 4. Turn on the main switch. 3.5.1 Bias Voltage for Image Area ADJUSTMENT STANDARD: dc --180 10 V. 1. Access SP mode and select No. --20. 2. Press the key to turn on the bias voltage.

3. Check the multimeter. If the voltage is not that of the standard voltage, press the keys. 4. If the voltage is within that of the standard voltage, press the key. key and then change the voltage using and

FSM

5-11

A163

3.5.2 Bias Voltage for Non-image Area ADJUSTMENT STANDARD: dc --200 10V 1. Access SP mode and select No. --21. 2. Press the key to turn on the bias voltage.

3. Check the multimeter. If the voltage is not that of the standard voltage, press the keys. 4. If the voltage is within the standard, press the key. key and then change the voltage using and

A163

5-12

FSM

4.
4.1

DRUM UNIT
DRUM UNIT REMOVAL

[A]

[B] [A]

[F]

[C] [D] [E]

1. Remove the development unit. 2. Remove the 2 screws [A] at both ends. 3. Remove the timing belt [B] and disconnect the harness connector [C]. 4. Remove the drum unit [D]. 5. Place the drum unit on the flat floor. NOTE: (1) When reinstalling the drum unit, hook the drum unit guides [E] on the pins [F] of the copier side plates. (2) Hold both ends of the drum unit to carry it.

FSM

5-13

A163

Rev. 5/95

4.2

DRUM REPLACEMENT
[E] [F] [C] [D] [B]

[B] [A]

1. Remove the drum unit. 2. Remove the pulley [A] (1 C-ring). 3. Remove the 2 bearing holders [B] (2 screws each). NOTE: Be careful not to scratch the drum with the pick-off pawls when removing or reinstalling the drum. 4. Remove the drum [C] with the drum shaft. 5. Loosen the drum knob [D] by turning it counter clockwise as shown. 6. Remove the drum flange [E]. 7. Replace the drum with new one. NOTE: when reinstalling the gear [F], make sure that the direction of the projection of the gear is on the drum side.

A163

5-14

FSM

Rev. 5/95

4.3

CLEANING BLADE REPLACEMENT

[E [A] [B]

[D] [C] [F]

1. Remove the drum unit. 2. Remove the charge corona unit (Pg 5-16) 3 Remove the quenching lamp unit [A]. 4. Remove the pressure spring [B] and bushing [C]. 5. Slide the cleaning blade [D] to the left side and remove it from the right side. NOTE: 1. Do not press the cleaning blade too strongly. Otherwise, the drum unit may deform. 2. When installing or replacing the cleaning blade, release the pressure [E] several times manually, and then hold down the cleaning blade gently along its entire length to ensure that the cleaning blade contacts the drum. Even if the drum is installed already, this action [F] can be taken through the rear side from where the rear feed table assembly is removed (follow steps 1 to 3 of the ozone filter replacement). 3. When replacing the cleaning blade, apply setting powder on the edge of the cleaning blade.

FSM

5-15

A163

4.4

CHARGE CORONA UNIT REMOVAL

[A]

[A]

[B]

1. Remove the drum unit. 2. Remove the ground springs [A]. 3. Remove the charge corona unit [B] (2 connectors). NOTE: When reinstalling the charge corona unit, make sure that the 2 connectors (C for the charge corona, G for the grid bias) are set properly.

A163

5-16

FSM

4.5

CHARGE CORONA WIRE REPLACEMENT

[E]

[B] [A] [C]

[B]

[D] 1. Remove the charge corona unit. 2. Remove the 4 grid wires [A] (4 springs). 3. Remove the endblock covers [B]. 4. Replace the corona wire [C] (1 spring). NOTE: (1) Make sure that the grid wires are correctly placed on the eight slots [D], are all straight, and not crossed. (2) Handle the new wire by the ends only. Oil from your hands may cause uneven charge on the drum. (3) Do not expand and bend the corona wires and grid wires. (4) Do not rub the corona wires with rough material (sand paper,... etc.) as this will damage the corona wire. (5) Do not use any solvent to clean the wire as this will cause uneven charge on the drum. (6) Make sure that the wire junction [E] is positioned inside the right endblock.

FSM

5-17

A163

4.6

PICK-OFF PAWL UNIT REMOVAL

[A]

[B]

1. Remove the drum unit and place it as shown. 2. Remove the pressure spring [A] and pick-off pawl unit [B] (2 screws and 1 connector). NOTE: When installing and/or removing the pick-off pawl unit, do not press too strongly. Otherwise, the drum unit may deform.

A163

5-18

FSM

4.7

GRID VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT

Rev. 2/7/96

ADJUSTMENT STANDARD: dc --940 10V.

NOTE: This adjustment is required when the charge/bias/grid power pack is replaced. 1. Turn off the main switch and remove the rear cover. 2. Connect the ground terminal of the multimeter to the machine ground, and connect the voltage terminal to TP2 on the charge/bias/grid power pack. 3. Set the multimeter range to dc 1500 V. 4. Turn on the main switch. 5. Access SP mode and select No. --11. 6. Press the the keys. 8. If the voltage is within that of the standard voltage, press the key. key to turn on the grid voltage. key and then change the voltage using and

7. Check the multimeter. If the voltage is not that of the standard voltage, press

FSM

5-19

A163

4.8

DRUM CURRENT ADJUSTMENT

NOTE: a) The drum currents vary with environmental conditions such as humidity and atmospheric pressure. Generally it is not necessary to adjust the drum currents because they have already been adjusted for a wide range of environments at the factory. b) Drum current adjustment is necessary whenever the power packs are replaced: adjustment may also be necessary to correct problems with paper separation, incomplete toner transfer, or image density. c) Make sure that the main switch is turned off when you change the range on the digital multimeter. If it is not, the multimeter may be damaged. d) There are variable resistors to change the charge currents, but they should not be changed. The drum currents should be adjusted by changing SP mode setting. Preporation 1. Remove the developer unit. 2. Remove the drum unit. 3. Remove the OPC drum from the drum unit, and install the current measurement drum [A] instead of the OPC drum.

[A]

A163

5-20

FSM

4. Install the drum unit [B] on the machine.

[B]

CAUTION: Be careful not to turn on the main motor. If the main motor accidentally turns on, some parts around the drum may be damaged.

FSM

5-21

A163

4.8.1 Charge Current Adjustment

ADJUSTMENT STANDARD: dc--1000 20 A WARNING: Make sure that the machine is unplugged before connecting the multimeter on the charge/bias/grid power pack. Pay extreme attention when connecting the multimeter. The potential of the charge corona terminal becomes --5kV. 1. Connect all the terminals of the current measurement drum to the machine ground. 2. Disconnect the charge corona terminal of the charge/bias/grid power pack. 3. Connect the multimeter as shown in the illustration. 4. Set the multimeter range at dc 2 mA. 5. Plug in the machine and turn on the main switch. 6. Access SP mode and select No. --10. 7. Press the key to turn on the charge corona.

8. Check the multimeter. If the voltage is not that of the standard voltage, press the key and then change the voltage using keys so that the charge current is dc --1000 20 A. 9. If the voltage is within that of the standard voltage, press the key. and

A163

5-22

FSM

4.8.2 Transfer Current Adjustment

ADJUSTMENT STANDARD: dc --100 5 A (Leading edge to 20 mm from the trailing edge) dc --150 5 A (20 mm trailing edge) 1 Connect the multimeter as shown above. 2. Set the multimeter range at dc 200 A. 3. Plug in the machine and turn on the main switch. 4. Access SP mode and select No. --12. 5. Press the key to turn on the transfer corona. key and then change the keys so that the transfer current is dc

6. Check the multimeter. Press the voltage using --100 5 A. and

7. If the voltage is within that of the standard voltage, press the 8. Select SP mode No. --13. 9. Press the key to turn on the transfer corona. key and then change the

key.

10. Check the multimeter. Press the voltage using --150 5 A. and

keys so that the transfer current is dc

11. If the voltage is within that of the standard voltage, press the

key.

FSM

5-23

A163

4.8.3 Separation Current Adjustment

ADJUSTMENT STANDARD: ac 250 10 A (Normal Paper) ac 350 10 A (Film and leading edge of translucent paper) dc --20 2.5 A 1. Connect the multimeter as shown above. 2. Set the multimeter range at ac 2 mA. 3. Plug in the machine and turn on the main switch. 4. Access SP mode and select No. --14. 5. Press the key to turn on the separation corona. key and then change the current

6. Check the multimeter. Press the using 10 A. and

keys so that the ac separation current is ac 250

7. If the voltage is within that of the standard voltage, press the 8. Select SP mode No. --15 9. Press the key to turn on the separation corona.

key.

10. Check the multimeter. Press the using 10 A. and

key and then change the current

keys so that the ac separation current is ac 350

11. If the voltage is within that of the standard voltage, press the

key.

A163

5-24

FSM

12. Set the multimeter range at dc 200 A. 13. Select SP mode No. --16. 14. Press the key to turn on the separation corona.

Rev. 5/95

15. Check the multimeter. Press the using 2.5 A. and

key and then change the current

keys so that the dc separation current is dc --20

16. If the voltage is within that of the standard voltage, press the 17. Select SP mode No. --17. 18. Press the key to turn on the separation corona.

key.

19. Check the multimeter. Press the using 2.5 A. and

key and then change the current

keys so that the dc separation current is dc --20

20. If the voltage is within that of the standard voltage, press the

key.

FSM

5-25

A163

5.
5.1

FUSING
FUSING UNIT REMOVAL
[H] [H] [I]

[E] [B]

[F]

[C]

[D]

[A]

[F]

[B] 1. Remove the copier rear cover.

[G]

2. Open the exit cover [A] and remove the shoulder screws [B] at both ends. 3. Disconnect the connector [C] and flex the hinge arms [D] of the exit cover slightly to the outside of the exit unit shafts and remove. 4. Turn the exit unit 1/4 of a turn to the front side (rear view) and remove it by pulling out. NOTE: When reinstalling the exit unit, set the right hinge [F] between the two pulleys [G] and raise the left hinge [H] using tape [I].

A163

5-26

FSM

[F]

[E] [G]

[C]

[D] [C]

[B]

[A]

5. Disconnect the connectors [A]. 6. Remove the screw [B] fixing the safety switch bracket. 7. Remove the 2 screws [C]. 8. While pressing down the fusing pressure release bar [D], pull out the fusing unit. NOTE: While pressing down the fusing pressure release bar [D], set the fusing unit on the guides [E] and align the cuts [F] to the side plates [G] at both ends when reinstalling the fusing unit.

FSM

5-27

A163

Rev. 5/95

5.2

HOT ROLLER REPLACEMENT

[B] [F] [B]

[C] [D]

[C] [E]

[G]

[J]

[K]

[I] [A]

[G]

[A] [J] [I]

[H]

NOTE: Be careful not to damage the hot roller thermistor when removing and reinstalling the hot roller. 1. Remove the fusing unit. 2. Remove the pressure springs [A]. 3. Remove the fusing lamp brackets [B] and cushions [C] (1 screw each). 4. Remove the fusing lamp [D] from the left side as shown (1 connector [E], rear view). 5. Remove the 2 C-rings [G], 1 gear [H], 2 bushings [I], and 2 bearings [J]). 6. Slide the hot roller [K] to the right side and remove it from the left side.

A163

5-28

FSM

5.3

PRESSURE ROLLER REPLACEMENT

[H] [D] [G]

Rev. 5/95

[C] [E] [B] [F] [A] [I]

[I] [J]

CAUTION: 1) Do not touch the hot roller or pressure roller while they are hot. 2) Be careful not to damage the hot roller thermistor [A] and pressure roller thermistor [B] when removing and reinstalling the pressure roller. 1. Remove the hot roller. 2. Push the projection [C] of the fusing entrance guide stopper and remove the fusing entrance guide [D]. 3. Remove the pressure roller stripper unit [E] (4 screws). 4. Lift up the pressure roller (access the pressure roller from the cut [F] of the frame), slide out the pressure roller shaft [G] to the left, then remove the pressure roller [H]. 5. Replace the pressure roller (2 stoppers [I] and 1 shaft [J]). NOTE: When reinstalling pressure roller, set the right pressure roller stopper and push the pressure roller shaft to the right from the left, and set the left pressure roller stopper [ ].

FSM

5-29

A163

[A] [B]

[C]

5.4

PRESSURE ROLLER THERMISTOR REPLACEMENT

1. Follow step 1 to 5 of the fusing unit removal. 2. Remove the pressure roller thermistor [A] (1 screw).

5.5

PRESSURE ROLLER STRIPPER UNIT REPLACEMENT

1. Follow step 1 to 5 of the fusing unit removal. 2. Remove the pressure roller stripper unit [B] (4 screws).

5.6

HOT ROLLER STRIPPER UNIT REPLACEMENT

1. Follow step 1 to 4 of the fusing unit removal. 2. Remove the hot roller stripper unit [C] (2 screws).

A163

5-30

FSM

[A] [E] [D] [E] [E] [G] [C] [B]

[A] [F] [G]

5.7

HOT ROLLER THERMISTOR REPLACEMENT

1. Remove the fusing unit. 2. Remove the 4 screws [A] of the fusing stay. 3. Disconnect the thermofuse connector [B] from the fusing lamp harness [C]. 4. Remove the hot roller thermistor [D] (1 screw and 1 spring, 7 clamps [E]).

5.8

FUSING THERMOFUSE REPLACEMENT

1. Follow step 1 to 3 of the hot roller thermistor replacement. 2. Remove the fusing thermofuse [F] (1 screw and 4 clamps [G]).

FSM

5-31

A163

5.9

FUSING TEMPERATURE ADJUSTMENT

[A] [B]

Caution: When the main switch is turned on, the machine will suddenly start to drive the fusing section. Keep your hands away from any mechanical and electrical components during this period. This procedure is required only when the hot roller thermistor is replaced. Adjustment standard: Mode 1 (155C), Mode 2 (160C), Mode 3 (165C), Mode 4 (170C), Mode 5 (180C), Mode 6 (190C), Mode 7 (196C) 1. Turn off the main switch. 2. Remove the copier rear cover. 3. Remove the pressure roller thermistor screw and hang the thermistor by the harness. 4. Actuate the fusing exit safety switch [A]. 5. Turn on the main switch, select the normal fusing temperature mode, and wait for longer than 10 minutes. 6. Using a digital thermometer and probe [B], measure the temperature at the middle of the hot roller. 7. If the actual temperature is different from the value for the mode being used (use SP#1 to find out the current mode), adjust the temperature using SP#-7. 8. Repeat steps 5 to 7 and confirm the temperature. 9. Reassemble the machine.

A163

5-32

FSM

6.
6.1

T & S CORONA UNIT

T & S CORONA UNIT REMOVAL

[A] [B]

[C]

[C]

[D] 1. Open the paper path section [A] and take out the T & S corona unit [B] (2 connectors [C]). NOTE: 1) Make sure that the T & S corona unit is set correctly by pressing it down when reinstalling. 2) Remove the connector cover [D] (1screw) for connecting the 2 connectors.

FSM

5-33

A163

6.2

TRANSFER AND SEPARATION CORONA WIRE REPLACEMENT

[A]

[B]

[I] [C] [B] [H] [F] [E]

[H] [G]

[D]

NOTE: (1) Handle the new wire by the ends only. Oil from your hands may cause uneven charging of the drum. (2) Do not stretch or bend the corona wires. (3) Do not rub the corona wires with rough material (sand paper, etc.) as this will damage the corona wire. (4) Do not use any solvent to clean the wire as this will cause uneven charging of the drum. 6.2.1 Preparation 1. Remove the T & S corona unit. 2. Remove the paper guides [A] and endblock covers [B].

A163

5-34

FSM

6.2.2 Separation Corona Wire Replacement 1. Remove the separation corona wire [C]. 2. Hook the new separation corona wire on the terminal [D] of the right endblock. NOTE: Make sure that the wire junction [E] is positioned inside the right endblock. 3. Hook the other side of the separation corona wire on the spring hook [F] (special tool: 54199653). While pushing the spring [G] in the direction of the arrow, hook the separation corona wire on the spring. 4. Set the wire on the slots [H]. 6.2.3 Transfer Corona Wire Replacement 1. Remove the transfer corona wire [I]. 2. Install the new transfer corona wire.

FSM

5-35

A163

7.
7.1

OTHERS
OZONE FILTER REPLACEMENT

[H] [G] [F]

[A]

[E] [I] [D]

[B]

[I]

[C] NOTE: Take care not to damage the mylars [A] on the rear feed table. 1. Open the fusing exit cover [B] and exit unit [C]. 2. Remove the copy tray [D]. 3. Remove the rear feed table assembly [E] (2 screws and 1 connector). 4. Unhook the blower duct [F] and remove. 5. Unhook the fan support plate [G] and remove. 6. Replace the ozone filter [H]. NOTE: When reinstalling the rear feed table assembly, fix the 2 screws [I] while pushing the assembly.

A163

5-36

FSM

7.2

ANTICONDENSATION HEATER INSTALLATION

[C]

[A]

[B] [C]

1. Remove the rear cover of the machine (2 screws). 2. Remove the T&S corona unit. 3. Install the anticondensation heater [A] (3 screws). 4. Put the harness of the heater into the cutout [B] of the frame. 5. Connect the connector of the heater [C] with the one beside the ac drive board.

FSM

5-37

A163

Rev. 5/95

8.

COPY QUALITY ADJUSTMENT

-- General Information -Image density is affected by the following factors: (1) Light Intensity (2) Bias Voltage (3) Toner Density (4) Grid Voltage (5) Charge Corona Current The items listed above must be kept in balance to maintain correct image density. In the field, image density should be adjusted first by changing the light intensity. (Adjust the light sensor voltage.) If results are unsatisfactory, the bias voltage can be changed. Also, if requested by the customer, the overall image density can be changed by changing the toner density. Normally, this should be kept at the normal position (factory setting). The grid voltage and charge corona current are carefully adjusted at the factory. Any adjustment out of the adjustment standards will result in over toning, toner scattering, dirty background, or light image density problems. The grid voltage and charge corona current adjustment should be done only when replacing the Charge/Bias/Grid power pack, or to correct certain problems with image density after checking all other possible causes.

NOTE: Adjusting grid voltage will not affect toner supply amount, but will affect the amount of charge reaching the drum. Exposing the the drum to light will not disipate all residual voltage resulting in overtoning and background.

A163

5-38

FSM

8.1

LIGHT SENSOR ADJUSTMENT

1. Every Call When: 2. When replacing the following part Exposure lamp Light sensor Drum Purpose: Adjustment Standard: Perform: How: RAM on the main board To maintain the correct light intensity. Level 2 (10%) of the 9 step gray scale on the OS-A1 chart should be slightly visible when the 4th manual image density level is selected. Change SP #-6 setting. Change the light sensor voltage.

1. Turn off the main switch. 2. Clean the following parts:

Item No. (1) (2) (3) Section Optics (Exposure glass, fiber optics array) Corona wires (charge, transfer and separation) and casing. PTL Method Damp cotton and dry soft cloth Dry cloth Dry cloth or blower brush

3. Remove the middle right cover. 4. Make several copies at manual image density level 4 with OS-A1 chart. 5. Confirm that level 2 (10%) of the 9 step gray scale is slightly visible on the copy. If the copy image density is not correct, proceed with the following step. 6. Change SP #-6 setting in the SP mode. If the image density is too dark: Increase SP #-6 setting. If the image density is too light: Decrease SP #-6 setting. 7. Confirm that image density is within the adjustment standard.

FSM

5-39

A163

8.2

IMAGE BIAS ADJUSTMENT

1. The image is blurred even though the image density in black solid areas is acceptable. When: 2. Dirty background, where the problem is not caused by excess toner and cannot be solved by adjusting the light sensor voltage. To improve the copy image. SP #-20 Change the development bias voltage for image density control by SP #-20.

Purpose: Perform: How:

SP #-20

3 Standard 038 Darker Lighter

1. Make a copy after adjusting the light intensity. 2. If the image is blurred: Decrease bias voltage by one step and readjust light intensity. If the background is dirty: Increase bias voltage by one step and readjust light intensity.

A163

5-40

FSM

8.3

TONER DENSITY ADJUSTMENT

When: Purpose: Perform: How:

Customer wants to change the overall image density of the copies. To change toner concentration inside development unit. SP #-22 Change the toner density setting by SP #-22

NOTE: The toner density can also be adjusted using SP #-30 (toner density sensor voltage setting). To return SP #-30 to the initial value, take memo when the value is changed.

8.4

REGISTRATION ADJUSTMENT

When: Purpose: Adjustment Standard: Perform: How:

Registration is not within the adjustment standard. To maintain proper registration. 0 3 mm (0 0.12") SP #-5 Change the registration roller start timing by SP #-5.

1. Make several copies by using the manual feed or roll feeder and check the registration. 2. Adjust the registration using SP #-5 if the registration is not within the adjustment standard.

FSM

5-41

A163

TROUBLESHOOTING

1. COPY QUALITY TROUBLESHOOTING

1.1 LOW IMAGE DENSITY
Is the used paper moist or extremely dry? No Yes Replace the paper. Is the toner sensor voltage within the no toner supply level (level 0) ? (Refer to Page 2-16.) Yes No Is there sufficient toner in the cartridge? Yes No Replace the toner cartridge. Is the toner supply clutch energized? Yes No Check the main board and the toner supply clutch. Does the toner sensor voltage decrease in the special toner supply mode (SP#62)? Yes No Check the toner supply mechanism. The amount of toner used exceeds the toner supply amount. Supply toner until the toner sensor voltage reaches the target value. Is the solid black copy dark enough? (Make a solid black copy using SP# --51.) Yes No Does the image density recover (without dirty background) after forcing supply of toner using SP#62? Yes No Check the charge corona, transfer corona and development bias. Check the toner sensor and main board. Check the light sensor, FL regulator and main board.

FSM

6-1

A163

1.2 UNEVEN COPY IMAGE

Make a solid black copy using SP# --51. Is the image density even? Yes No Is the developer level in the development unit? Yes No

Check and correct the machine level. Clean the charge corona wire, grid wire, and transfer corona wire. Check if they are correctly set on the slots of the end blocks. Clean the optics. If the problem is not fixed, replace the exposure lamp.

A163

6-2

FSM

1.3 DIRTY BACKGROUND

Clean the optics and check the copy image. No good Change the light sensor setting to a lighter position using SP# --6. No good Is the bias voltage correct? Yes No

Adjust the bias voltage. Is the toner sensor voltage much lower than the threshold between level 0 and 1? (Check using SP#--32 referring to Page 2-16.) No Yes Check the main board and toner supply clutch. Is the image density of solid areas high? No Yes Check the toner sensor. Make several blank copies. Is the background still dirty? Yes No

Check the cleaning blade. Are the grid voltage and the charge corona current correct? Yes No

Adjust the grid voltage and/or the charge corona current. Replace the drum.

FSM

6-3

A163

1.4 BLACK LINE OR BAND

Vertical line or band? Yes No Does the black line appear at 251 mm intervals? No Yes Clean or replace the drum. If a black band appears 250 mm from the leading edge, turn the main switch off and on . If the problem is not fixed, check the T& S corona leakage.*NOTE Check the part of the following items that corresponds to the position of the vertical line or band.

Charge corona wire Grid wires Light path (Exposure lamp, fiber optics array, exposure glass) Cleaning blade Development unit Drum

NOTE:

If the separation corona leakage is detected, the separation corona will be turned off. This condition will not be reset until the main switch is turned off and on. If the separation corona does not turn on, a black band appears 250 mm from the paper leading edge.

A163

6-4

FSM

1.5 ENTIRELY BLANK COPY

Is the used paper moist? No Yes Replace the paper. Are the terminals of the charge corona unit and the T& S corona unit connected properly? Yes No

Set the terminals properly. Is the charge corona wire or the T & S corona wire broken? No Yes Replace the broken part. Are the charge corona and transfer corona applied? Yes No

Check the main board, charge/bias/grid power pack, and T & S power pack. Does leakage occur in the T & S endblocks? No Yes Replace the defective parts. Are the development drive gears broken? No Yes Replace the broken gears. Check the drum drive mechanism.

FSM

6-5

A163

1.6 PAPER CREASING

Is the used paper moist? No Yes Change the paper. Is the paper feed direction the same as the paper fiber direction? No Yes Change the paper transport direction, if possible.(NOTE 1.) Decrease the fusing temperature using SP mode #1 to #3. (NOTE 2.)

NOTE:

1. If there is rib shape creasing, the paper feed direction should be the same as the paper fiber direction. 2. After decreasing the fusing temperature, check if the image is completely fused on the paper.

A163

6-6

FSM

2. SERVICE CALL CONDITION

When a service call condition occurs, the Call Service indicator and service call codes are displayed. When the service call conditions E2, E3, E4, E5, E6, E7, and E8 conditions occur, for safety reason they cannot be cleared by turning the main switch off and on. Accessing SP38 and changing the date from "1" to "0" must be done to clear these service call conditions.

2.1 SC Code E-1: Exposure Lamp Abnormal

-DefinitionThe light sensor voltage is less than 0.4 volts for 10 seconds. <Points to check> Exposure lamp Light sensor FL regulator (CN402-1,2,4, and 5, CN401-1, -2, -4) Main board (CN106-A3, and CN104-B1, -B2, -A29 -A30)

2.2 SC Code E-2: Fusing Thermofuse Open

-DefinitionThe temperature detected by the hot roller thermistor does not reach 100 C within 4 minutes and 30 seconds after the main switch is turned on. <Point to check> Fusing thermofuse Hot roller thermistor AC drive board (T202-2, RA201-T4) Main board (CN106-A2, A4, B12, B14, B15)

FSM

6-7

A163

2.3 SC Code E-3: Hot Roller Thermistor Open

-DefinitionThe temperature detected by the hot roller thermistor does not reach 50C within 3 minutes after the main switch is turned on. <Point to check> Hot roller thermistor AC drive board ( T202-2, RA201-T4) Fusing thermofuse Main board (CN106-A2, -A5, -B11, -B14, -B15)

2.4 SC Code E-4: Hot Roller Thermistor Short

-DefinitionThe resistance of the the hot roller thermistor is less than 0.11 K. <Point to check> Hot roller thermistor Main board (CN106-A2, -A5, -B11, -B14, -B15)

2.5 SC Code E-5: Pressure Roller Thermistor Open

-DefinitionThe resistance of the pressure roller thermistor is more than 0.53 M. <Point to check> Pressure roller thermistor Main board (CN106-A2, -A4, -B12, -B14, -B15)

A163

6-8

FSM

2.6 SC Code E-6: Pressure Roller Thermistor Short

-DefinitionThe resistance of the pressure roller thermistor is less than 0.55 K. <Point to check> Pressure roller thermistor Main board (CN106-A2, -A5, -B11, -B14, -B15)

2.7 SC Code E-7: Fusing Overheat

-DefinitionThe temperature detected by the hot roller thermistor becomes higher than 250C <Point to check> Hot roller thermistor Fusing thermofuse AC drive board (T202-2, RA201-T4) Main board (CN106-A2, -B14, -B15)

FSM

6-9

A163

2.8 SC Code E-8: Fusing Warm-up Error

-DefinitionThe temperature detected by the hot roller thermistor does not reach the target ready temperature within 12 minutes after main switch is turned on. <Point to check> Hot roller thermistor Fusing lamp Fusing thermofuse AC drive board (T202-2, RA201-T4) Main board (CN106-A2, -A5, -B11, -B14, -B15) AC harness

2.9 SC Code E-9: Toner Density Sensor Abnormal

-DefinitionThe toner density sensor voltage is less than 0.5 volts or more than 4.5 volts. NOTE: This condition is not detected until 251 copies since initializing developer.

<Point to check> Toner density sensor Flow of the developer at the toner density sensor area Main board (CN104-A10, -A11, -B20, -B21)

A163

6-10

FSM

2.10 SC Code E-10: Main Motor Abnormal

-DefinitionThe main board does not receive a signal from the main motor for 2 seconds while the main motor is on. <Point to check> Main motor Mechanical interference of the main motor drive Main board (CN106-A12, -A13)

2.11 SC Code E-11: Toner Density Sensor adjustment Error

-DefinitionThe toner density sensor voltage cannot be adjusted to its standard value (4.1 0.1 volts) during the new developer initialization. NOTE: If clearing the SC condition, the previous data of SP#-30 is still used until its next initialization.

<Point to check> Toner density sensor Developer Flow of the developer at the toner density sensor area Main board (CN104-A10, -A11, -B20, -B21)

FSM

6-11

A163

Rev. 5/95

3. BLOWN FUSE TABLE

3.1 POWER SUPPLY UNIT
Europe version
Fuse No. FU1 FU2 FU3 FU4 Specification 250V 4A 250V 6.3A 250V 6.3A 250V 6.3A Symptom No power. No indication. Beeper sounds. E=10 is indicated. Not used.

USA version
Fuse No. FU1 FU2 FU3 FU4 Specification 125V 8A 250V 5A 250V 5A 250V 5A Symptom No power. No indication. Beeper sounds. E=10 is indicated. Not used.

FU5 125V 1A Counter No symptoms

A163

6-12

FSM

ROLL FEEDER

1. SPECIFICATIONS
Roll Paper Size: Width: 210 mm to 914 mm, 81/2" to 36" Length: 150 meters Diameter: Less than 170 mm --Preset Cut: 1189 mm, 841 mm, 594 mm, 420 mm, 297 mm 48", 36", 24", 18", 12" 46", 34", 22", 17", 11" Up to 10 extra preset cut length can be specified by SP23 ~ 32. --Selected Length Cut: 245 mm to 2000 mm (1 mm per step) 9.6" to 80" (0.1" per step) Within 0.80 second 50 mm/s 1 to 99 Microprocessor +24 volts and +5 volts from the copier Maximum 110 W 1,080 mm x 475 mm x 295 mm 42.71" x 18.70" x 11.61" 29 kg, 63.8 lb

Cut Size:

Cutting Time: Paper Transport Velocity: Repeat Quantity: Control: Power Source: Power Consumption: Dimensions (W x D x H): Weight:

FSM

7-1

A163

2. MECHANICAL COMPONENT AND DRIVE LAYOUT

4 3 2 1 5

8 5

1. Paper Feed Motor 2. Idle Pulley 3. Timing Belt 4. Cutter Motor

5. Paper Feed Rollers 6. Paper Roll Spool 7. Paper Roll 8. Cutter Unit

A163

7-2

FSM

Rev. 5/95

3. ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS

The index numbers refer to the electrical component layout on the reverse side of the Point to Point (Water proof paper).
Name Motors Paper Feed Cutter Switches Door Left Cutter Right Cutter Function Drives all mechanical components except the cutter unit (DC Stepper Motor). Drives the cutter (DC Reversible Motor). Index No. 32 39

Indicates "Door Open" on the operation panel and disables the key operation. Detects whether or not the cutter is at the left home position. Detects whether or not the cutter is at the right home position.

38 40 33

Sensors Paper End Leading Edge Humidity

Detects when the roll paper runs out. Misfeed detector. Also detects the leading edge of the paper to start the paper length pulse count. Detects humidity and turns on the RF antihumidity heaters while copying is not being done (if the humidity is higher than 45%).

35 42 34

Printed Circuit Board RF Control Controls all roll cutter unit functions in accordance with copier CPU. Others Upper RF Antihumidity Heater Lower RF Antihumidity Heater

37

Removes humidity from the roll paper Removes humidity from the roll paper

41 36

FSM

7-3

A163

A163

7-4

FSM

4. MECHANICAL OPERATION
4.1 BASIC OPERATION

[D] [C]

[A]

[B]

The paper feed rollers [A], which are turned by the paper feed motor, feed paper from the paper roll [B] through the cutter unit [C] to the paper leading edge sensor [D] according to the signal from the copier. When the paper feed motor starts, the copier CPU starts measuring the length of the paper. (The paper length is measured by counting the number of steps as the paper feed motor [stepper motor] turns.)

FSM

7-5

A163

Rev. 5/95

[C]

[B] [A]

[D]

After the leading edge of the paper reaches the exit rollers [A], the paper is directed to the copier registration roller [B]. The registration roller stops rotating after the registration sensor [C] detects the leading edge of the copy paper. The copy paper is fed to the registration roller and stops to wait for the original. At the appropriate timing after the original registration sensor is activated by the original, the registration roller and roll paper feed motor start to rotate. The copy paper starts to be fed again. Just before the cut length of copy paper is fed, the speed of the roll paper feed motor is doubled. A paper buckle forms at the trailing edge of the copy paper. When the paper reaches the proper length, paper feed motor stops and the cutter unit cuts the paper. During the time that paper feed motor has stopped, the registration roller continues to feed the copy paper forward. The paper is cut during the time it takes for the paper buckle to be pulled straight. This allows for a neat cut. When the selected cut length is between 245 mm and 309 mm, the roll cutter unit cuts the paper after the first rotation of the roll paper feed roller [D], as the paper reaches the selected length before the registration roller starts to rotate again. After the registration roller stops rotating, the roll paper feed motor continues to rotate and a paper buckle forms at the trailing edge of the paper. When the selected cut length is between 309 mm and 410 mm, the roll cutter unit cuts the paper after the second rotation of the roll paper feed roller. The paper buckle forms after the first rotation of the roll paper feed motor, because the paper feed roller is still rotating after the registration roller has stopped. The registration roller brake ensures that the very stiff types of paper will not rotate the registration rollers when the paper buckles while it is stopped at these rollers.

A163

7-6

FSM

4.2 CUTTER UNIT OPENING AND CLOSING MECHANISM

[B] [A]

[D] [C] The gear [A] from the paper feed motor disengages from the cutter unit gears [B] when the roll cutter unit is unlocked from the lower position and lifted up. At this time, the cutter unit is locked at the upper position by the lock lever [C], and the wheel [D] on the right side can be rotated manually to position the leading edge of the roll paper.

FSM

7-7

A163

4.3 CUTTER OPERATION

[C]

[B]

[C]

[A]

The cutter unit uses a sliding rotary cutting blade [A] which is pulled past a fixed blade by a drive wire. The rotary cutting blade allows the cutter unit to cut paper in both directions. There are home position switches [B] at both ends of the cutter unit. The cutter motor turns off, stopping the cutting action, when the rotary cutting blade knob plate [C] turns off one of these switches.

A163

7-8

FSM

5. SERVICE TABLES
5.1 TEST POINTS
Function GND VA (24 V) VC (5 V) TP No. TP903 TP901 TP902

5.2 BLOWN FUSE CONDITION

Component F901 (250V/1.0A) Unit RF Main board Symptom The AC line for the R/F antihumidity heaters is cut. The heaters are not turned on.

FSM

7-9

A163

6. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
Roll Feeder (A571) CAUTION: Unplug the copier power cord before starting the following procedure. Check the accessories and their quantities according to the following list: Harness Cover ............................................................................ 2 pcs Angle Bracket .............................................................................. 1 pc Spacer ......................................................................................... 1 pc Small Cap..................................................................................... 1 pc Screws - M4x8 ............................................................................ 8 pcs Screws with Spring Washer - M4x8 ............................................. 2 pcs

NOTE: When the Roll Feeder is installed on the copier, the table (A714) is required.

A163

7-10

FSM

[A]

[D] [C]

[C] [H] [E] [G]

[C]

[H] [B]

[F]

1. Lower the feet [A] so that the table does not move while the roll feeder is being installed on the table and the copier. NOTE: Do not place the roll feeder unit [B] onto the floor roughly, to prevent the left and right covers from being damaged. 2. Remove the shipping tapes [C] and shipping cushions [D]. 3. Remove the left and right covers [E and F] (3 screws each). 4. Remove the front cover [G] (2 screws) and lower the front cover arms [H] to the down position.

FSM

7-11

A163

[A] [E]

[B] [F]

[C]

[D]

[G] 5. Open the copier paper path section and remove the copier left lower cover [A] (2 screws), lower right front cover [B] (2 screws), lower right middle cover [C], toner collection bottle [D], and rear cover [E] (2 screws). 6. Remove the small caps [F] from the copier rear cover using cutting pliers. 7. Remove the table rear cover [G] (4 screws).

A163

7-12

FSM

[A]

[D] [C]

[B]

NOTE: Take care not to drop the manual feed table when removing the bracket [A]. 8. Remove the lower front cover [B] (2 screws), reinforcement plate [C] (1 screw), bracket [A] (4 screws) (which is changed by the harness), and the manual feed table [D].

[C]

FSM

7-13

A163

[A]

[B]

[D] [E] [F]

9. Mount the roll feeder unit on the copier (hook the mounting arms [A] on both sides into the mounting rail [B]). NOTE: Lift the unit by holding the plate [C] just under the size marks. 10. Install the angle bracket [D] and spacer [E] (4 screws). 11. Install the small cap [F] (2 screws).

A163

7-14

FSM

[A] [H] [I] [G] [C] [D]

[J]

[A]

[B] [F] [E] NOTE: To ensure grounding, tighten the screws for the ground wire until the spring washers [A] are flattened. 12. Secure the grounding wire [B] (1 screw with spring washer) to the inside of the table. 13. Run the roll feeder harness [C] and roll feeder heater harness [D] through the holes in the table rear cover (right [E] and left [F]) 14. Connect the roll feeder harness to the copier main board {2 connectors [G] and 1 grounding wire [H] (1 screw with spring washer)}. 15. Connect the roll feeder heater harness connector [I] to the copier ac drive board connector. 16. Install the harness covers [J] (1 screw each). 17. Reinstall Manual Feed Table 18. Reattach all the covers and manual feed table excluding the roll feeder right cover.

FSM

7-15

A163

[C]

[B]

[A]

[E]

[F]
Length Temperature NORMAL HIGH (VELLUM) LOW (FILM)

[D]

300 XX XX XX

PRG. No. 42 43 44

1100 XX XX XX

PRG. No. 45 46 47

18. Plug in the power supply cord and turn on the main switch. 19. Press the following keys on the operation panel: Clear Modes key [A] + key [B] - key [C] Clear/Stop key [D] 20. Press the Clear/Stop key again and hold it down for longer than 3 seconds. The roll paper end and call service indicators will blink (SP mode). 21. Select 40 using the + and - keys. Enter "1" by pressing the following keys. Function Select key [E] + key RF Select key [F]. 22. Input values into SP modes 42 to 47 in accordance with the decal that is attached to the right side plate. 23. Press the Clear Modes key 3 times to leave the SP mode. 24. Reattach the roll feeder right cover. 25. Check the roll feeder operation.
A163 7-16 FSM

7. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

7.1 EXTERIOR COVER REMOVAL
7.1.1 Front Cover Removal

[A] [C]

[C] [B]

1. Remove the front cover [A] (2 screws). NOTE: If the screw holes for the front cover become worn by the screws, extra holes are provided next to the original screw holes. 7.1.2 Left and Right Cover NOTE: Be careful not to drop and damage the lower front cover [B]. 1. Remove the left and right covers [C and D] (3 screws each). NOTE: When reattaching the left and/or right covers, unlock and lift the cutter unit for easier assembly.

FSM

7-17

A163

7.2 CUTTER UNIT REMOVAL

[C]

[D]

[A] [B]

[A] 1. Remove the roll feeder left and right covers. 2. Remove the 4 screws [A] of the cutter unit. 3. Take out the cutter unit [B] (1 connector [C]). NOTE: When reinstalling the cutter unit, attach the cutter unit cover [D] with the cutter unit.

A163

7-18

FSM

7.3 PAPER FEED ROLLER REPLACEMENT

[A]

[B]

[C]

[I] [H]

[D]

[E]

[H] [G]

[E]

[F]

1. Remove the cutter unit. 2. Unlock and lift the paper feed roller unit [A] using the release lever [B]. 3. Remove the release lock lever [B] (2 screws). 4. Remove the feed roller guide plate [C] (6 screws). 5. Replace the paper feed roller [D] (2 allen screws [E], 1 gear [F], 1 snap ring [G], 2 bushings [H], and 1 retaining ring [I]).

FSM

7-19

A163

7.4 PAPER FEED MOTOR TIMING BELT TENSION ADJUSTMENT

[A]

[B]

If the timing belt tension for the paper feed motor is not correct, the paper cut length varies for each copy paper. Readjust the timing belt tension for the paper feed if this occurs. 1. Remove the small cap [A] (2 screws). 2. Loosen the screw [B] and re-tighten it.

A163

7-20

FSM

7.5 CUT LENGTH ADJUSTMENT

Rev. 5/95

The cut length adjustment should be done when the roll feeder is installed to correct cutting errors. The cut error correction data is determined in the factory without the copier installed. The cut length varies depending on the copier on which it is installed and/or paper type used. If required, adjust the cut length as follows: NOTE: The cut length should be measured 10 minutes or later after copying because the fusing unit dries the paper and reduces its length temporarily. 7.5.1 Preset Cut : Adjustment standards: 3 mm (for length shorter than 420 mm) 5 mm (for 420 to 1189 mm) NOTE: There are three settings of the cut length depending on the temperature mode. They are set in the factory to match a standard paper type. [Normal (SP#42, 45), High (SP#43, 46), Low (SP#44, 47)]. 1. Make 5 copy samples of A0 lengthwise (1189) and A3 sideways (297) in the preset cut mode. 2. Measure the difference of the length between the each copy sample and preset cut length (1189 and 297). Then, calculate the average difference. 3. Input the average value using SP modes #42 to 47 so that the cut length is within the adjustment standards. Example: 1. Current SP data #42....0 Copy sample length = 297 -- 4 Set SP mode #42...4.0 2. Current SP data #42....0 Copy sample length = 297 -- 4 Set SP mode #42...+ 4.0 4. Make A0 lengthwise and A3 sideways copies using preset cut mode and check their length. 5. Repeat steps 2 to 4 if necessary.

FSM

7-21

A163

7.6 ROLL FEED PAPER SKEW ADJUSTMENT

[B] [A]

[C] [E]

[E]

[D] 1. Mark a line [A] on the exposure glass [B]. 2. Make 594 x 1189 mm copies from the roll feeder unit. NOTE: 594 mm wide paper is easier to adjust than 841 mm wide paper. 3. Measure the lengths [C] and [D]. 4. Loosen the 2 screws [E] which determine the paper spool height. 5. If C > D, lower the right side of the paper spool. If C < D, do the opposite. 6. Make another copy. Check the lengths [C] and [D]. 7. Repeat steps 4 to 6 if necessary. NOTE: If the 10 or more copies are made continuously, the nip band width of the fusing unit may change. For correct adjustment, do this procedure at least 10 minutes after a continuous copy run of 10 or more.

A163

7-22

FSM

A251/A252 Service Manual

The A251/A252 machines are based on the A163 copier. Only the differences from the base copier are described in the following pages. Therefore, this documentation should be treated as an insert version of the base copiers service manual. It should always be utilized together with the base copiers service manual.

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION ......................................... 1-1
1.1 SPECIFICATIONS..................................................................................... 1-1 1.2 PAPER PATH ............................................................................................ 1-3 1.4 MECHANICAL COMPONENT ................................................................... 1-4 1.5 DRIVE LAYOUT ........................................................................................ 1-6 1.6 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS ........................................ 1-7

2. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS........................................ 2-1

2.1 DRUM ........................................................................................................ 2-1
2.1.2 DRUM DRIVE.............................................................................................................. 2-1

2.3 EXPOSURE............................................................................................... 2-2

2.3.2 PAPER AND ORIGINAL FEED (A252 ONLY) ............................................................ 2-2

2.4 DEVELOPMENT........................................................................................ 2-4

2.4.2 TONER DENSITY CONTROL..................................................................................... 2-4

2.8 FUSING AND PAPER EXIT ...................................................................... 2-5

2.8.1 OVERVIEW (A252 COPIER) ...................................................................................... 2-5

3. INSTALLATION............................................................................ 3-1
3.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS ........................................................... 3-1
3.1.1 ENVIRONMENT .......................................................................................................... 3-1 3.1.2 MINIMUM SPACE REQUIREMENTS ......................................................................... 3-2 3.1.3 MACHINE LEVEL........................................................................................................ 3-2 3.1.4 POWER SOURCE ...................................................................................................... 3-3

3.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURES ............................................................... 3-4

3.2.1 COPIER....................................................................................................................... 3-4 3.2.2 TABLE (A836) ........................................................................................................... 3-12 3.2.3 COPY TRAY (A836-10)............................................................................................. 3-14 3.2.4 ROLLER FEEDER (A571)......................................................................................... 3-18

4. SERVICE TABLES ....................................................................... 4-1

4.3 SERVICE TOOLS...................................................................................... 4-1
4.3.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE ..................................................................................... 4-1 4.3.2 INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK MODE ................................................................................ 4-9

4.4 JAM CODE LIST...................................................................................... 4-11

4.4.2 JAM CODE TABLE.................................................................................................... 4-11

4.6 SERVICE REMARKS .............................................................................. 4-15

4.6.12 AC DRIVE BOARD.................................................................................................. 4-15

5. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ......................................... 5-1

5.2 OPTICS ..................................................................................................... 5-1
5.2.1 ORIGINAL FEED UNIT REMOVAL (A252 ONLY) ...................................................... 5-1 5.2.2 EXPOSURE GLASS REMOVAL (A252 ONLY) .......................................................... 5-2 5.2.3 FIBER OPTICS ARRAY REMOVAL (A252 ONLY) ..................................................... 5-2 5.2.4 EXPOSURE LAMP REMOVAL ................................................................................... 5-3 5.2.5 LIGHT SENSOR REPLACEMENT (A252 ONLY) ....................................................... 5-4 5.2.6 SYNCHRO-CUT LENGTH ADJUSTMENT (A252 ONLY) .......................................... 5-5

5.4 DRUM UNIT............................................................................................... 5-6

5.4.1 DRUM UNIT REMOVAL.............................................................................................. 5-6

TOC

A251/A252

5.5 FUSING ..................................................................................................... 5-7

5.5.1 FUSING UNIT REMOVAL........................................................................................... 5-7

5.6 T & S CORONA UNIT................................................................................ 5-9

6.5.1 TRANSFER AND SEPARATION CORONA WIRE REPLACEMENT......................... 5-9

5.8 COPY QUALITY ADJUSTMENT ............................................................. 5-11

5.8.4 REGISTRATION ADJUSTMENT .............................................................................. 5-11

6. TROUBLESHOOTING.................................................................. 6-1
6.2 SERVICE CALL CONDITIION................................................................... 6-1
6.2.12 SC CODE E-14: ZERO CROSS SIGNAL DETECTION ABNORMAL ...................... 6-1 6.2.13 SC CODE E-15: MAIN SWITCH ABNORMAL (U.S.A. VERSION ONLY) ................ 6-1

6.3 BLOWN FUSE TABLE .............................................................................. 6-2

6.3.1 POWER SUPPLY UNIT .............................................................................................. 6-2

A251/A252

ii

TOC

 IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICES

PREVENTION OF PHYSICAL INJURY
1. Before disassembling or assembling parts of the copier and peripherals, make sure that the copier power cord is unplugged. 2. The wall outlet should be near the copier and easily accessible. 3. Note that some components of the copier and the peripherals are supplied with electrical voltage even if the main switch is turned off. 4. If any adjustment or operation check has to be made with exterior covers off or open while the main switch is turned on, keep hands away from electrified or mechanically driven components. 5. The inside and the metal parts of the fusing unit become extremely hot while the copier is operating. Be careful to avoid touching those components with your bare hands. 6. The copier is not attached to the table. Pushing the copier too hard may cause it to drop onto the floor. While moving the copier, push the table. 7. When the main switch is turned on, the machine will suddenly start turning to perform the developer initialization. Keep hands away from any mechanical and electrical components during this period.

HEALTH SAFETY CONDITIONS

1. Never operate the copier without the ozone filters installed. 2. Always replace the ozone filters with the specified ones at the specified intervals. 3. Toner and developer are non-toxic, but if you get either of them in your eyes by accident, it may cause temporary eye discomfort. Try to remove with eye drops or flush with water as first aid. If unsuccessful, get medical attention.

OBSERVANCE OF ELECTRICAL SAFETY STANDARDS

1. The copier and its peripherals must be installed and maintained by a customer service representative who has completed the training course on those models. 2. Caution: The RAM pack on the main control board has a lithium battery which can explode if replaced incorrectly. Replace the RAM pack only with an identical one. The manufacturer recommends replacing the entire RAM pack. Do not recharge or burn this battery. Used RAM packs must be handled in accordance with local regulations.

SAFETY AND ECOLOGICAL NOTES FOR DISPOSAL

1. Do not incinerate the toner cartridge or the used toner. Toner dust may ignite suddenly when exposed to open flame. 2. Dispose of used toner, developer, and organic photoconductors according to local regulations. (These are non-toxic supplies.) 3. Dispose of replaced parts in accordance with local regulations. 4. When keeping used RAM packs in order to dispose of them later, do not put more than 100 RAM packs per sealed box. Storing larger numbers or not sealing them apart may lead to chemical reactions and heat build-up.

A251/A252 OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION

TAB POSITION 8

TAB POSITION 7

TAB POSITION 6

A251/A252 TROUBLESHOOTING

TAB POSITION 5

A251/A252 REPLACEMENTS AND ADJUSTMENT

TAB POSITION 4

A251/A252 SERVICE TABLES

TAB POSITION 3

A251/A252 INSTALLATION

TAB POSITION 2

A251/A252 DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS

TAB POSITION 1

A163, A251, A252, A174 COMPARISON CHART

THE FOLLOWING LIST DEFINES THE DIFFERENCES BETWEEN THE A163, A251, A252 and A174 WIDE FORMAT COPIERS.

Configuration Copy Speed First Copy Warm-up Time Multiple Copy Paper Feed

Syncronized Cut Mode Fusing Lamp Self Diagnostic Codes

A163 Table Top 3 cpm 24 seconds 5 minutes No Manual Feed, (roll feed optional) No Ni-chrome Wire Lamp 11 codes, displayed in copy counter

Mechanical Component Layout 1 motor, 1 fan A163 A163 A163 A163 No A163 140 V, 26 W A163 Main Motor 14 steps No A163 A163 A163 A163 A163 A163 1 Exhaust 1 motor, 1 fan A163 A163 A163 A163 No A163 140 V, 26 W A163 Main Motor 14 steps No A163 A163 A163 A163 A163 A163 1 Exhaust

A251 Table Top 3 cpm 24 seconds 5 minutes No Manual Feed, (roll feed optional) Semi-auto synchro Cut Ni-chrome Wire Lamp 13 codes, displayed in copy counter Same as A163

A174 Console 7.5 cpm 18 seconds 6 minutes 1 10 copies Manual Feed, 2 Roll Feeds (3rd roll feed optional) Full Auto Synchro Cut Halogen Lamp 18 codes, displayed in copy counter Similar to A163 7 motors, 2 vacuum, 1 fan Similar to A163 Similar to A163 Similar to A163 Similar to A163 Yes Similar to A163 125 V, 37 W Similar to A163 Separate Dev. Motor 26 steps Yes Similar to A163 Similar to A163 Similar to A163 Similar to A163 Similar to A163 Separate Fusing Motor 2 Vacuum, 1 Exhaust

Drive Layout Drum Area Drum Drive Charge Charge Corona Circuit Auto. Charge Wire Cleaning Exposure Exposure Lamp Development Development Drive Manual Image Density (ID) Auto Image Density Control Toner Density Control Toner Supply Transfer and Separation Cleaning / Quenching Fusing and Paper Exit Fusing Drive Fans

A252 Table Top 3 cpm 30 seconds 5 minutes 1 10 copies Manual Feed, (roll feed optional) Full Auto Synchro Cut Ni-chrome Wire Lamp 13 codes, displayed in copy counter Similar to A163, different in original feed area 2 motors, 1 fan A163 A163 A163 A163 No A163 140 V, 26 W A163 Main Motor 14 steps No A163 A163 A163 A163 A163 A163 1 Exhaust

OVERALL INFORMATION

SPECIFICATIONS

1.1 SPECIFICATIONS
Configuration: Copy Process: Original Feed: Original Size: Copy Size: Copying Speed: First Copy: Warm-up Time: Multi-Copy: Automatic Reset: Photoconductor: Drum Charge: Reproduction Ratio: Exposure System: Exposure Lamp: Development: Toner Replenishment: Toner Consumption: Development Bias: Toner Density Control: Image Density Adjustment: Paper Separation: Cleaning: Paper Feeding: Image Fusing: Fusing Lamp: Self-diagnostic Codes: Table top Electrostatic transfer system Sheet feed Maximum: 914 x 2,000 (36" x 80")mm Minimum: A4 (81/2" x 11") lengthwise Same as Original Size 3 cpm (A1/D sideways) 24 seconds (A1/D sideways): A251 copier 30 seconds (A1/D sideways): A252 copier Within 5 minutes (Room temperature 23C) 1 to 1 only (A251 copier), 1 to 10 (A252 copier) 2 minutes after copying is finished (can be set to 1, 3, 4, or 5 minutes or to no auto reset) Organic photoconductor drum Single-wire with grid plate (Negative Charge) 1 : 1 (0.5%) Slit exposure via fiber optic array Fluorescent lamp (26 W) Dual-component dry toner system Cartridge system (750 g toner/cartridge) 1,860 A1 or D copies per cartridge (6% original) Negative Direct toner density detection by induction sensor Development bias control + exposure control Dual wire ac corona and pick-off pawls Cleaning blade Manual feed (roll feeder optional) Heat and pressure type, teflon (upper) and silicone rubber (lower) rollers Nichrome wire lamp (115 V: 1,100 W, 230 V: 1,100 W) 13 codes, displayed in copy counter

SM

1-1

A251/A252

Overall Information

1. OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION

SPECIFICATIONS

Power Source:

115 V/60 Hz ..... 15 A 220 V/50 Hz ..... 7 A 230 V/50 Hz ..... 7 A 240 V/50 Hz ..... 7 A Maximum: 1.4 kW Warm-up: 1.2 kW Ready: 0.04 to 1.2 kW Copy cycle: 1.4 kW A251: 1,080 x 570 x 490 mm 42.1" x 22.2" x 19.1" A252: 1,080 x 623 x 480 mm 42.1" x 24.6" x 18.9" A251: 79 kg, 174.0 lb A252: 80 kg, 176.2 lb

Power Consumption:

Dimensions (W x D x H):

Weight:

Optional Equipment and Machine Configuration

Configuration Main frame Optional equipment Roll feeder (A571-06, 07) A251 copier Roll cutting rail (A570-06) Side guides (A569-06) Roll feeder (A571-06, 07) A252 copier Copy tray (A836-10) Side guide (A569-06) Additional equipment Table (A714-05) Table (A836-00) Table (A836-00)

NOTE: 1) Roll cutting rail cannot be installed on the A252 copier. 2) Key counter cannot be installed on these copiers. Other Optional Equipment Paper Spool Drum anti-condensation heater Specifications are subject to change without notice.

A251/A252

1-2

SM

PAPER PATH

- A251 copier -

- A252 copier -

E A E A B D F D

B C

A252V500.PCX

A252V504.WMF

A: Original Path (A251 copier) B: Paper from the manual feed C: Paper from the roller feed D: Paper exit E: Original Path from Rear Feeder F: Original Path (A252 copier): Switching back

SM

1-3

A251/A252

Overall Information

1.2 PAPER PATH

MECHANICAL COMPONENT

1.4 MECHANICAL COMPONENT

3 21 22 23 24 25 1 20 19 18 17 16 15 7 8 9 14 13 12 10 11 5 6 4 2

A252V502.PCX

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13.

1st Original Feed Roller 1st Press Rollers Copy Tray Exit Rollers Fusing Exit Rollers Hot Roller Pressure Roller Gas Spring OPC Drum T/S Corona Unit Main Drive Unit Table Paper Spool

14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25.

Roll Feeder Paper Registration Rollers Development Unit Toner Cartridge Manual Feed Table Charge Corona Unit 2nd Original Feed Roller Original Table 2nd Original Press Roller Exposure Lamp Fiber Optic Array Cleaning Blade

A251/A252

1-4

SM

MECHANICAL COMPONENT

28 31 29

32 30

26

27

A252V505.WMF

26. 27. 28. 29.

Original Guide Rear Copy Tray (Option Copy Tray) Original Feed Motor Original Entrance Roller

30. Original Rear Roller 31. Original Entrance Press Roller 32. Original Rear Press Roller

SM

1-5

A251/A252

Overall Information

DRIVE LAYOUT

1.5 DRIVE LAYOUT

11 12 13 14 15 16 1 2 3

10 4 5 6

9
A252V503.WMF

7 - A252 copier only 17 19

18
A252V501.WMF

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.

Original Feed Roller Pulley Original Feed Roller One Way Pulley Development Unit Development Unit Relay Gear Development Drive Chain Paper Registration Roller Clutch Drum Drive Relay Gear Main Motor Fusing Drive Chain Exit Unit Drive Belt

11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19.

Hot Roller Drive Gear Fusing Drive Sprocket/Gear Toner Collection Coil Drive Gear Drum Drive Gear Original Feed Drive Pulley Original Feed Drive Belt Original Feed Motor Original Rear Roller Pulley Original Entrance Roller Pulley

A251/A252

1-6

SM

ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS

Refer to the electrical component layout on the reverse side of the Point to Point (Water proof paper) index numbers.
Name Motors Main Function Drives all mechanical components except the original feed section (A252only) and the fans. (DC Motor) Removes the ozone built up around the drum section to the ozone filter. (DC Motor) Drives the original feed section. (DC motor) Index. No.

32 5 45

Exhaust Fan Original Feed (A252 only) Magnetic Clutches Registration Toner Supply Solenoids Pick-off Pawl Switches Main Original & Paper Feed Safety Fusing Exit Safety

Drives the registration rollers. Turns on to supply toner to the development unit.

30 31

Moves the pick-off pawls against the drum.

Supplies power to the copier. Cuts AC power when the original or paper feed unit is opened. Cuts AC power when the fusing exit unit is opened.

17 18 12

Sensors Door Open Toner Density Original Registration Light Entrance Feed Registration Exit Original Entrance (A252 only) Original Rear (A252 only) Exit Cover Open

Indicates Door Open in the operation panel and prohibits the key operation. Detects the density of toner in the developer. Detects when the original lead edge passes at the front of the exposure glass. Detects the intensity of the exposure lamp output. Detects when copy paper is inserted (jam detector). Detects when copy paper arrives at the registration rollers (jam detector). Detects jams through the fusing exit unit. Detects the original length and the original jam. Detects the original jam. Indicates Door Open in the operation panel and prohibits the key operation.

29 26 4 27 24 25 7 43 44 47

SM

1-7

A251/A252

Overall Information

1.6 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS

ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS Name Function Printed Circuit Boards Main Controls all copier functions both directly and through other PCBs. PSU Converts the AC voltage to DC voltage. AC Drive Provides AC power to the fusing lamp and PSU. FL Regulator Stabilizes power to the exposure lamp. Operation Panel Control the operation panel display. Original Feed Drive Controls the rotation of the original feed motor. (A252 only) Lamps Exposure Fusing Pre-Transfer (PTL) Quenching (QL) Index. No. 22 21 15 23 10 46

Provides light to reflect the originals image onto the drum (fluorescent lamp). Provides heat to the fusing unit. Reduces the charge on the drum surface prior to image transfer. Neutralizes any charge remaining on the drum surface after cleaning.

2 3 20 1

Power Packs Charge/Bias/ Grid Power Pack Transfer/Separation

Provides high voltage power for the charge corona, charge grid, and development bias. Provides high voltage power for the transfer corona and separation.

19 16

Thermistors Hot Roller Pressure Roller

Monitors the hot rollers surface temperature. Monitors the pressure rollers surface temperature.

8 11

Thermofuses Fusing Heaters Anticondensation

Protects against fusing overheat.

Keeps moisture from forming inside the copier (option).

13

Others Total Counter Circuit Breaker (Europe, Asia)/ Fuse (U.S.A.)

Keeps track of the total length of copies made (Europe) or the total copies made (U.S.A.). Guards against voltage surges in the input power.

28 14

A251/A252

1-8

SM

DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS

DRUM

2. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS

2.1 DRUM
2.1.2 DRUM DRIVE
Detailed Descriptions

[I] [H] [G] [D] [F] [E] [B] [C]

A252D502.WMF

[A]

- A252 copier only [K]

[J]
A252D503.WMF

The OPC drum [A] is 80 millimeters in diameter and 970 millimeters long. It turns constantly when the main motor [B] is on. When the main motor turns on, the drive is transmitted to the drum as follows: main motor drive gear [C] idle gears [D] drum drive gear [E] drum flange [F] drum When the drum knob is tightened, the right flange presses firmly against the drum so that the drum is held tightly between the flanges. The drum and flanges turn together when the main motor is on. At this time, the drive is also transmitted to the original feed rollers [G] through the original feed drive pulley [H] and belt [I] (A251 copier). The original feed rollers [J] (original entrance and rear rollers) for the A252 copier are driven by the original feed motor [K].

SM

2-1

A251/A252

EXPOSURE

2.3 EXPOSURE
2.3.2 PAPER AND ORIGINAL FEED (A252 ONLY)
[D]

[J]

[B] [C] [G] [H]

26 mm

[K] [F] [I]

15 mm

J: Original Rear Roller K: Original Rear Sensor [E]

[A]

A252D500.WMF

A252D501.WMF

In this machine (A252 copier), first, the leading edge [A] of the original is inserted into the original table and the original is delivered to the appropriate start position. Then the original is switched back while it is being scanned. Therefore, the original is scanned from the trailing edge to the leading edge. When an original is placed on the original table, it activates the original entrance sensor [B]. The main motor starts rotating and the quenching lamp, development bias, and PTL begin. Then, the exposure lamp turns on. To ensure correct original feeding (especially for a thin original), the original is returned toward the operator side (300 ms) before the original feed. Thus the original will be fed evenly by each roller on the original entrance roller [C]. 4 seconds after the original entrance sensor is activated, the original feed motor starts rotating 200 mm/s to turn the original entrance rollers [C] and the original rear rollers [J]. The original is delivered to the original feed start position [D]. The 4 second delay allows time for the operator to align the trailing edge (non-operator side) against the first set of the rollers (to prevent skewing).

A251/A252

2-2

SM

EXPOSURE

When the original entrance sensor is turned off by the trailing edge [E] of the original, the roll paper feed motor turns on and paper feeding starts. When the trailing edge of the original reaches the original feed start position (26 mm ahead of the original registration sensor [F]), the original feed motor stops to wait for the copy paper. The registration clutch is activated after paper feed begins. The copy paper is fed to the registration roller [G] and the registration clutch turns off when the copy paper reaches 15 mm ahead of the registration sensor [H]. The voltage is applied to the charge corona. At the appropriate time the original feed motor rotates 50 mm/s in opposite direction and the original is delivered to the exposure glass. The registration clutch and roll paper feed motor turn on again after the trailing edge of the original passes the original entrance sensor. The paper feed resumes and the copy paper is transported to the drum [I]. To measure the original length for synchro-cutting, the copier CPU measures the time from when the original registration sensor detects the leading edge of the original until the original entrance sensor detects the trailing edge of the original (delivering the original to appropriate start position). The copy paper length is measured by counting the number of steps as the roll paper feed motor (stepper motor) turns. Just before the cut length of the copy paper is fed, the speed of the roll paper feed motor is doubled. A paper buckle forms at the trailing edge of the copy paper. When the copy paper is fed out to the appropriate length, the roll paper feed motor stops and the cutter unit cuts the paper. When making duplicate copies, at the appropriate time after the trailing edge of the original passes at the original registration sensor, the rotation of the original feed motor changes in the opposite direction and the speed of the original feed motor changes to 200 mm/s. The roll paper feed motor starts again. The original is delivered to the original feed start position and roll paper feed starts again. The above process is repeated. After all the duplicates have been made, the original is stopped and caught by the original entrance roller (original hold mode: SP16). If the original hold mode is canceled by SP16, the original is fed out without being caught in the original entrance roller. During this procedure the original rear sensor [K] determines the end of the original. When the original hold mode is selected, the original is fed out when the $ key is pressed.

SM

2-3

A251/A252

Detailed Descriptions

DEVELOPMENT

2.4 DEVELOPMENT
2.4.2 TONER DENSITY CONTROL
Recovery from Toner End Condition
After replacing the toner cartridge (opening and closing the original feed unit), the main motor rotates the development unit for 60 seconds. During this period, toner is supplied at 100% of the supply amount until TS level reaches 3. Then, the main motor rotates the development unit for another 30 seconds. Then copies can be made. If the TS level does not reach 3 after rotation of the development unit, the CPU stops the machine and displays the toner end condition. This prevents the operator from resetting the toner end condition by simply opening and closing original feed unit.

A251/A252

2-4

SM

FUSING AND PAPER EXIT

2.8 FUSING AND PAPER EXIT

2.8.1 OVERVIEW (A252 COPIER)
The copy paper is delivered to the lower paper exit.
Detailed Descriptions

The location of the fusing exit sensor is different from the A163 and A251 copier. Except for this difference, the A252 copier is identical to the with A251 and A163 copiers. Please refer to A163 copier service manual for details.

SM

2-5

A251/A252

INSTALLATION

INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

3. INSTALLATION
3.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
3.1.1 ENVIRONMENT
1. Temperature Range: 2. Humidity Range: 3. Ambient Illumination: 4. Ventilation: 5. Ambient Dust: 15C to 30C (59F to 86F) 20% to 80% RH Less than 1,500 lux (do not expose to direct sunlight).
Installation

Minimum space 20 m3 Room air should turn over at least 30 m3/hr/person. Less than 0.15 mg/m3 (4 x 10-3 oz/yd3)

6. If the installation place is air-conditioned or heated, place the machine as follows: a) Where it will not be subjected to sudden temperature changes from low to high, or vice versa. b) Where it will not be directly exposed to cool air from an air conditioner in the summer. c) Where it will not be directly exposed to reflected heat from a space heater in the winter. 7. Avoid placing the machine in an area filled with corrosive gases. 8. Avoid any area higher than 2,000 m (6,500 ft) above sea level. 9. Place the machine on a strong and level base. 10. Avoid any area where the machine may be subjected to frequent strong vibration.

SM

3-1

A251/A252

INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

3.1.2 MINIMUM SPACE REQUIREMENTS

Back 600 mm

Left 600 mm

Right 600 mm

Back 1,000 mm

A252I505.WMF

1. Front: 1,000 mm (39 in) 2. Back: 3. Right: 4. Left: 600 mm (24 in) 600 mm (24 in) 600 mm (24 in)

3.1.3 MACHINE LEVEL

1. Front to back: Within 5 mm (0.2") of level 2. Right to left: Within 5 mm (0.2") of level

Make sure that the machine is level using a carpenters level.

A251/A252

3-2

SM

INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

3.1.4 POWER SOURCE

1. Input Voltage Level: 120 V, 60 Hz More than 15 A (for U.S.A. version) 220 ~ 240 V, 50/60 Hz More than 7 A (for European version) 2. Permissible Voltage Fluctuation: 10%

3. Do not set anything on the power cord.

Installation

NOTE: 1) Make sure the plug is firmly inserted in the outlet. 2) Avoid multi-wiring.

SM

3-3

A251/A252

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

3.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

3.2.1 COPIER
Accessory Check
Check the accessories and their quantities according to the following list:

- A252 copier Original Guide ......................................................................... 6 pcs Operating Instruction Holder ................................................... 1 pc

- A251 copier Guide Wire .............................................................................. 2 pcs Copy Tray ............................................................................... 1 pc Copy Guide ............................................................................. 1 pc Operating Instruction Holder ................................................... 1 pc

A251/A252

3-4

SM

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

[D]

[B]

[E] [C]

[E]

[A]
A252I500.WMF

1. Lower the feet [A] so that the table does not move while the copier is being installed on the table. 2. Place the copier [B] on the table [C] (Place the copier feet [D] into the table holes [E]).

WARNING
The copier is not attached to the table. Pushing the copier too hard may cause it to drop onto the floor. While moving the copier, push the table.

SM

3-5

A251/A252

Installation

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

[A] [B] [G]

A252I501.WMF

[C]
A252I510.WMF

[E] [D]

[F] [E] 3. Open the paper path section [A]. 4. Remove the right upper cover [B] (2 screws). 5. Remove the drum protection sheet [C] and remove the screw [D] to apply cleaning blade pressure to the drum. 6. Open the fusing exit section. Remove the two strips of shipping tape [E] and protection sheet [F]. 7. Remove two strips of shipping tape [G]. (Close the paper path section and fusing exit section.)
A252I502.WMF

A251/A252

3-6

SM

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

[B] [A]
Installation
A252I511.WMF

[F] [D] [C]

A252I503.WMF

[E]
A252I504.WMF

8. Remove two shipping cushions [A]. 9. Open the original feed unit [B], manual feed table [C], and toner supply cover [D]. Remove a sheet [E] covering the developer entrance. Pour 1 kg of the developer [F] into the development unit evenly across its width as shown. NOTE: Close the paper path section while opening the toner supply cover. Otherwise, the toner supply cover will drop. 10. Plug in the power supply cord and turn on the main switch.

SM

3-7

A251/A252

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

[A]

[C]

[D]

[B]

[E]

A252I508.WMF

NOTE: If the fusing temperature is lower than 60C when the main switch is turned on, the main motor will rotate. In this case, it is not necessary to access the SP mode to load the total 2kg of developer (Steps 11 to 14). Turn off the main switch to stop the main motor after the developer is loaded from the development entrance. Then, pour in another kg of developer. 11. Press the following keys on the operation panel: Clear Mode key [A] + key [B] + key Clear/Stop key [C] 12. Press the Clear/Stop key again for longer than 3 seconds. The wrench and toner end indicators will blink (SP INPUT/OUTPUT mode). 13. Select 23 using the + key and key [D] and press the RF Select key [E]. The main motor will rotate. 14. Press the RF Select key to stop the main motor after the developer is loaded from the development entrance. Pour in another kg of developer into the development unit evenly across its width (Total: 2 kg). Press the Clear Modes/Stand by key 3 times to leave the SP mode.

A251/A252

3-8

SM

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

[A]

[E]

[C]

[B]

[F]

A252I508.WMF

15. Press the following keys on the operation panel: Clear key [A] + key [B] key [C] Clear/Stop key [D] 16. Press the Clear/Stop key again for longer than 3 seconds. The roll paper end and call service indicators will blink (SP mode). 17. Select 36 using the + and keys. Enter 1 by pressing the following keys. Function Select key [E] + key RF Select key [F] Five minutes later, the copier will automatically return to the normal operating mode from SP mode.

SM

3-9

A251/A252

Installation

[D]

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

[A]

[B]

[C]
A252I507.WMF

18. Install the toner cartridge [A] as shown. 19. Remove the sealing tape [B] from the cartridge and turn the knob [C] until it stops.

A251/A252

3-10

SM

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

[A] [B]

[D] [C]

A252I506.WMF

A252I509.WMF

A252 copier only (step 20)

20. Install the original guides [A].

A251 copier only (step 21 and 22)

21. Attach the guide wires [B] to the copy tray [C]. 22. Install the copy tray [C] and copy guide [D]. 23. Reinstall all the covers. 24. Check the copy quality and copier operation.

SM

3-11

A251/A252

Installation

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

3.2.2 TABLE (A836)

Accessory Check
Check the accessories and their quantities according to the following list: Top Plate ............................................................................... 1 Left Side Plate ........................................................................ 1 Right Side Plate ..................................................................... 1 Middle Plate ........................................................................... 1 Rear Cover ............................................................................. 1 Screws with Spring Washer - M4 x 8 ..................................... 14

A251/A252

3-12

SM

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

[A] [G] [A] [C] [F] [A] A, B [B] [D] [I] [J]
A836I501.WMF

[E]

[A]

[A] [D]

[E]

[H]

[C]
A836I500.WMF

NOTE: To ensure grounding, paint has been removed from the surfaces around the screw holes [A] (only from the surfaces where the two components meet) and from the surface around the screw hole [B] at the inside of the left plate. 1. Temporarily install the top plate [C], left [D], and right side plate [E] (6 screws). 2. Turn the table up-side down in the direction of A. 3. Install the middle plate [F] and rear cover [G] (4 screws each). NOTE: If the optional copy tray is installed after copier installation, install the front copy tray stay [I] and rear copy tray stay [J] after step 3. 4. Tighten all the screws until the spring washers [H] of screws are flattened. 5. Put the table the correction way up.

SM

3-13

A251/A252

Installation

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

3.2.3 COPY TRAY (A836-10)

Accessory Check
Check the accessories and their quantities against the following list: Front Copy Tray Stay.............................................................. 1 Rear Copy Tray Stay .............................................................. 1 Copy Tray Support.................................................................. 1 Copy Tray Guide..................................................................... 2 Copy Tray Sheet ..................................................................... 3 Nylon Clamp ........................................................................... 1 Rear Copy Tray....................................................................... 3 Copy Tray Stopper.................................................................. 2 Screw...................................................................................... 13 Rear Copy Tray Sheet - Short................................................. 2 Rear Copy Tray Sheet - Center .............................................. 1 NOTE: The copy tray is an option for the A252 copier. When the copy tray is installed on the copier, the table (A836-00) is required.

A251/A252

3-14

SM

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

[B] [A]
A836I501.WMF

[C]

[D]

A836I502.WMF

1. Install the front copy tray stay [A] and rear copy tray stay [B] (4 screws each). NOTE: This step should be done during the table installation when the table and the copy tray are installed at the same time. Refer to the table installation procedure. If the copy tray is installed after the copier installation, remove the roll feeder and copier from the table, then loosen the screws of the table, then do step 1. 2. Install the copy tray guides [C] (1screw each). 3. Install the copy tray support [D] (2 truss screws).

SM

3-15

A251/A252

Installation

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

[C]

[A]

[D] [A]
A836I503.WMF

[C]

[B]

[F] [G]

[E] [E] [D]

A836I504.WMF

4. Adhere the copy tray sheets with rubber [A] to the middle plate [B] of the table so that the copy tray sheets are positioned between the screw holes [C] on the rear copy tray stay [D] as shown in the illustration. 5. Hook the rear copy trays [E] onto the rear copy tray stay [D]. 6. Secure the copier power supply cord [F] to prevent the cord from interfering with the paper path (1 nylon clamp [G] and 1 screw).

A251/A252

3-16

SM

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

[D]

A836I505.WMF

265 5 mm

[D]

265 5 mm

[C]

A836I506.WMF

[A]

[B]

[A]

[B]
A836I508.WMF

7. Adhere the rear copy tray sheet - center (long) [A] and the two rear copy tray sheets - short [B] onto the exit cover as shown. 8. Adhere the copy tray stoppers [C] to the front side of the table middle plate [D].

SM

3-17

A251/A252

Installation

[C]

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

3.2.4 ROLL FEEDER (A571)

CAUTION
Unplug the copier power cord before starting the following procedure.

Accessory Check
Check the accessories and their quantities according to the following list: Harness Cover ....................................................................... 2 pcs Angle Bracket ......................................................................... 1 pc Spacer ................................................................................... 1 pc Small Cap ............................................................................... 1 pc Screws - M4 x 8 ..................................................................... 8 pcs Screws with Spring Washer - M4 x 8 ...................................... 2 pcs Washer (220 ~ 240 V versions only) ....................................... 2 pcs Ground Plate (220 ~ 240 V versions only) .............................. 2 pcs Screws with Spring Washer - M4 x 8 for Ground Plate (220 ~ 240 V versions only) .................................................... 2 pcs NOTE: When the Roll Feeder is installed on the copier, the table (A714 or A836) is required.

A251/A252

3-18

SM

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

[D]

[A]

A571I500.WMF

[C]

[C]

[H] [E]

[G]

[C]

A571I501.WMF

[H] [B] [F]

A571I502.WMF

1. Lower the feet [A] so that the table does not move while the roll feeder is being installed on the table and the copier. NOTE: Do not place the roll feeder unit [B] onto the floor roughly, to prevent the left and right covers from being damaged. 2. Remove the shipping tapes [C] and shipping cushions [D]. 3. Remove the left and right covers [E and F] (3 screws each). 4. Remove the front cover [G] (2 screws) and lower the front cover arms [H] to the down position.

SM

3-19

A251/A252

Installation

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

[A]

[E]

[D] [C] [B]

A571I503.WMF

[F]

A571I504.WMF

[G]
A571I505.WMF

5. Open the copier paper path section and remove the copier left lower cover [A] (2 screws), lower right front cover [B] (2 screws), lower right middle cover [C], toner collection bottle [D], and rear cover [E] (2 screws). 6. Remove the small caps [F] from the copier rear cover using cutting pliers. 7. Remove the table rear cover [G] (4 screws).

A251/A252

3-20

SM

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

[A] [B] [D] [C]

A571I506.WMF

NOTE: Take care not to drop the manual feed table when removing the bracket [A]. 8. Remove the lower front cover [B] (2 screws), reinforcement plate [C] (1 screw), bracket [A] (4 screws) (which is changed by the harness), and the manual feed table [D].

SM

3-21

A251/A252

Installation

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

[A] [B]

[D] [E] [F]

A571I507.WMF

[C]

A571I508.WMF

9. Mount the roll feeder unit on the copier (hook the mounting arms [A] on both sides into the mounting rail [B]). NOTE: Lift the unit by holding the plate [C] just under the size marks. 10. Install the angle bracket [D] and spacer [E] (4 screws). 11. Install the small cap [F] (2 screws).

A251/A252

3-22

SM

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

[I]

[G]

- A251 copier -

[G] [C]

[C] [D] [L] [H] [F]

[N]

A571I512.WMF

[A] [J]
A571I513.WMF

[M] [B] [E]

A571I510.WMF

NOTE: To ensure grounding, tighten the screws for the ground wire until the spring washers [A] are flattened. 12. Secure the grounding wire [B] (1 screw with spring washer) to the inside of the table. 13. Run the roll feeder harness [C] and roll feeder heater harness [D] through the holes in the table rear cover (right [E] and left [F]). NOTE: There are two versions of the ferrite core [N] for the roll feeder harness. One is gray and the other is white. When installing the gray core version on the A252 copier, unwind one loop, as shown.

For A252 copier

14. Connect the roll feeder harness to the copier main board and original feed motor drive board [K] {2 connectors [G] and 1 grounding wire [H] (1 screw with spring washer)}.

For A251 copier

14. Connect the roll feeder harness to the copier main board {2 connectors [G] and 1 grounding wire [H] (1 screw with spring washer)}. 15. Connect the roll feeder heater harness connector [I] to the copier ac drive board connector. 16. 220 ~ 240 V versions only Install the ground plates [L, M] (1 screw with spring washer and 1 washer each). 17. Install the harness covers [J] (1 screw each). 18. Reattach all the covers and manual feed table excluding the roll feeder right cover.
SM 3-23 A251/A252

Installation

[N]

[K]

[A]

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

[A]

[D]

[E]

[C]

[B]

[F]
PRG. NO. 42 43 44

A571I514.WMF

Length Temperature NORMAL HIGH (VELLUM) LOW (FILM)

300 XX XX XX

1100 XX XX XX

PRG. NO. 45 46 47

19. Plug in the power supply cord and turn on the main switch. 20. Press the following keys on the operation panel: Clear Modes key [A] + key [B] key [C] Clear/Stop key [D] 21. Press the Clear/Stop key again and hold it down for longer than 3 seconds. The roll paper end and call service indicators will blink (SP mode). 22. Select 40 using the + and - keys. Enter 1 by pressing the following keys. Function Select key [E] + key RF Select key [F]. 23. Input values into SP modes 42 to 47 in accordance with the decal that is attached to stuck on the right side plate. 24. Press the Clear Modes key 3 times to leave the SP mode. 25. Reattach the roll feeder right cover. 26. Check the roll feeder operation.

A251/A252

3-24

SM

SERVICE TABLES

SERVICE TOOLS

4. SERVICE TABLES
4.3 SERVICE TOOLS
4.3.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
All items except for the following are common with the A163 copier. Please refer to the A163 copier service manual.

Service Program Mode Table

Data 0: 2 minutes 1:1 minute 2: 2 minutes 3: 4 minutes 4: 5 minutes 0: 2 minutes Original Feed Out Select the time to when the original is automatically fed out after it has been set on 1:1 minute Waiting Time 2: 2 minutes the original table in the manual feed mode. Setting 3: 4 minutes (A252 copier only) 4: 5 minutes 5: No auto feed out Original Feed Start Selects the time to when the original feed 0: 1 second Time Setting roller starts rotating after the original 1: 2 seconds entrance sensor or original rear sensor for 2: 3 seconds the rear feed is actuated (A252 copier only). 3: 4 seconds 4: 5 seconds 5: 6 seconds 6: 7 seconds Auto Shut-off Time Determines the auto shut-off time. 1 30 240 Setting (120 V machines only) 0: No Original Hold After original scanning is finished, the 1: Original Hold mode Mode original exit roller stops before completely feeding out the original. This is to prevent the original from dropping onto the floor after scanning. key is The original is fed out when the pressed or when the next original is inserted A252 copier only). Length Size Adjusts the speed of the original feed motor -1.0 (shorter) 0.0 Magnification (A252 copier only). 1.0 (longer) The setting can be changed by the key operation. Semi-synchro Cut Selects whether the roll paper cut key must 0: Pressing the roll paper cut key Original Scanning be pressed at the appropriate time when the trailing edge of the original passes the Semi- 1: Inserting the original Mode synchro cut mark, or whether the original again must be inserted again after the original is scanned and the length is measured (A251 copier only). Mode No. Paper Feed Out Waiting Time Setting Function Refer to the A163 service manual for details. The paper from the roll feeder is fed out only when the roll feeder is attached to the A251 copier.

*6

*13

*14

*15

*16

*17

*18

SM

4-1

A251/A252

Service Tables

SERVICE TOOLS
Mode No. Function Synchro-cut Adjusts the cut length in the semi-synchro Length Adjustment cut mode (A251 copier). Adjusts the cut length in the synchro cut, *19 preset cut, and variable cut modes (A252 copier). The setting can be changed by a key operation. Fixed Paper Size 42.0 size is added to the following modes Pattern Setting in the inch mode: Refer to the A163 copier manual and page 4-13 of this manual for *22 details. 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 7, 8, 9, 11, 12, 13, and 18 *33 Not Used Semi-synchro-cut Adjusts the cut length in the semi-synchro 48 Length Adjustment cut mode (A251 copier only). Data

-25 (Shorter) 0 25
(Longer) 1 mm/step

49

56

57 58

67

69

80

81

Main Motor Speed (Jam code numbers have been changed Adjustment from those used in the A163 copier.) If the main motor speed is incorrect, rJ98 or rJ99 will be indicated when a long copy is made. In these cases this adjustment is required. Copy Number Determines the maximum copy number. The 0: 99 sheets (A251) 1: 10 sheets (A252) default settings for the A251 and A252 Limit Setting 2: 20 sheets copiers are different. 3: 30 sheets 4: 40 sheets 5: 50 sheets 6: 60 sheets 7: 70 sheets 8: 80 sheets 9: 90 sheets Not Used 0: 1,200 mm/48 inch Repeat Copy Determines the maximum copy length for Length Limit 1: The maximum paper repeat copy (A252 copier only). length determined by Setting SP55. dc = X,XXX Machine Displays the total time (hours) of the Operation Counter machine operation (total time of the motor rotation). SP69: t6 =XXX,XXX Total Copy Length Displays the total copy length by feet. /Number Display (Feet) dnF = XX (total number Displays the total number of developer Developer of developer initializations (SP36). Also displays the Initialization initializations) developer counter (SP77) at the last Number Counter Hde = XX,XXX developer initialization. (developer counter at the last developer initialization dtE = XX Toner End Displays the total number of toner end Hdt = XX,XXX Number Counter conditions (dtE). Also, displays the toner counter (SP78) at the last toner end condition (Hdt).

-10 (Shorter) 0 10 (Longer) 0.1 %/step 0: Standard -9 0 11

A251/A252

4-2

SM

SERVICE TOOLS
Mode No. Toner Near End Counter Function Displays the total number of toner near end conditions (dtn). Also, displays the toner counter (SP78) at the last toner end condition (Hdt). Data dtn = XX Hdt = XX,XXX

82 83 84

Not Used Not Used Number of Misfeeds by Location

Displays the total number of originals in the paper length indicator and paper misfeeds by location in the leading edge indicator.

85

90

Number of Service Displays the total number of service calls (SC) in the paper length indicator and SC Call by Location codes by location in the leading edge indicator. Service Call Displays the last five service calls one after Records the other.

Jt = X,XXX (Total Jam) J1 J8 (initial jam) J10 J45 (original jam) J51 J72 (copy paper jam) J80 J99 (roll feeder paper jam) Et = X,XXX (total SCs) E1 E15 (each SC) E1 = XX (The last SC code) E2 = XX (1 before the last SC code) E3 = XX (2 before the last SC code E4 = XX (3 before the last SC code E5 = XX (4 before the last SC code Beeper (XX = SC code)

91

92 93

Not Used Not Used

SM

4-3

A251/A252

Service Tables

SERVICE TOOLS
Mode No. RAM Clear Function Clears selected data items from the RAM. To clear the memory, input the number of the item you want to delete, then press the key. Note: If all the memory is cleared (if a number from 20 to 28 is selected), reinput the factory settings that are shown on the decal attached inside the upper right cover. Please refer to page 4-14 for the default settings for each destination. (When No. 10 to 26 is selected.) Data 0: Not Used 1: Machine Operation (The memory for SP67) 2: Copy Length Counter (SP69 to 75) 3: OPC Counter (SP76) 4: Developer Counter (*Note1) (SP77) / Developer Initialization Number (SP80) 5: Toner Counter (SP78) /Toner End Number (SP81)/Toner Near End Number (SP82) 6: Counter for toner (*Note2) density step. 7: Clear data No.1 to 9 and 53. 8: SC Counter (SP90 to 91) 9: Jam Counter (SP85 to 86) 10: Change the settings to the Japan version

-1

*Note1: This counter is not used for the toner density step control (described on page 2-16 in the A163 manual). *Note2: For the toner density step control, this counter counts down from 150 (m) to 0 (m) after the developer initialization. When the developer initialization is done, this counter is set to 150 and after 150 m of copies, the counter stays at 0. If this counter is cleared, the counter is set to 0.

A251/A252

4-4

SM

SERVICE TOOLS
Mode No. Function Data 11: Change the settings to the U.S.A. version 12: Change the settings to the Europe version 13: Change the settings to the Asia version 14: Charge the settings to the Hoechst version 15: Change the settings to the Regma version 16: Change the settings to the K+E version 17: Factory use 18: Not Used 19: Not Used 20: Clear all the memory and change the settings to the Japanese version 21: Clear all the memory and change the settings to the U.S.A. version 22: Clear all the memory and change the settings to the Europe version 23: Clear all the memory and change the settings to the Asia version 24: Clear all the memory and change the settings to the Hoechst version 25: Clear all the memory and change the settings to the Regma version 26: Clear all the memory and change the settings to the K+E version 27: Factory use 28: Not Used 29: Not Used 30: Clear all the memory

-1

SM

4-5

A251/A252

Service Tables

SERVICE TOOLS
Mode No. Total Counter Unit Setting -2 Function Selects the unit in which the total counter counts up by. Data 0: 1 yard 1: 1 m 2: 100 inches 3: 50 inches 4: A1 length (594 mm) 5: Sheet (Any size) 6: 1 foot 0: Standard 9.9 0 9.9 mm Advance Delay 0: 60 s 1: 70 s 2: 80 s 3: 90 s -50 (Faster) 0 50 (Slower) 0.025 %/step -100 10 100 (Shorter) (Longer) 2.5% +2.5%

-5

Registration Adjustment

Adjusts the paper registration.

Toner Supply Periods in Toner -23 End Condition Original Feed -24 Motor Speed Adjustment -27 Factory Use Only Length Size Magnification Compensation on Leading Edge -28

Selects the periods for supplying toner after clearing the toner end condition.

Adjusts the speed of the original feed motor (A252 copier only).

Registration Adjustment for the Rear Feed -29

Synchro-cut Length Auto Adjustment (297 mm)

-35

The fusing rollers speed is slightly higher than the drum speed. The speed of the copy paper transport will slightly increase after the leading edge of the copy paper enters the fusing unit. To compensate for this, the speed of the original feed motor is corrected from the leading edge to 183 mm (A252 copier only). Adjust the paper registration for the rear original feed (A252 only). If the setting of SP#-74 is 1, this setting is used for the paper registration for the front original feed as well as the rear original feed. In this case, this adjustment is added to the SP#-5 adjustment. Adjusts the original cut length in Synchro Cut mode at 297 mm (standard length). Insert the 297 mm length original five times (this number displayed on the copy number indicator can be changed : 1 to 10). If the actual original length is different from the standard length, input the following value in the cut length indicator before inserting the original: Actual Length - Standard Length Then the machine automatically calculates the correction value. The data is overwritten on SP#-38.

0: Standard 9.9 0 9.9 mm Advance Delay

-9.9 0 9.9 1 step = 0.1 mm

A251/A252

4-6

SM

SERVICE TOOLS
Mode No. Synchro-cut Length Auto Adjustment (1,189 mm) Function Data Adjusts the original cut length in Synchro -50 0 50 Cut mode at 1189 mm. 1 step = 0.1 mm Insert the 1189 mm length original five times (this number displayed on the copy number indicator can be changed : 1 to 10). If the actual original length is different from the standard length, input the following value in the cut length indicator before inserting the original: Actual Length - Standard Length Then the machine automatically calculates the correction value. The data is overwritten on SP#-39. -37 Not Used Synchro-cut Length Manual -38 Adjustment (297 mm) Synchro-cut Length Manual -39 Adjustment (1,189 mm) Light Sensor Voltage Display (Factory use) -9.9 0 9.9 1 step = 0.1 mm (This value is over written when SP#-35 is performed.) Adjusts the synchro cut length when a 1,189 -50.0 0 50 mm original is used. Increasing the number 1 step = 0.1 mm will shorten the paper cut length. (This value is over written when SP#-36 is performed.) Fd = X,XX Displays the real time light sensor output Fd = Light Sensor voltage. Voltage In this mode, the PTL, main motor, QL and the bias voltage for non-image areas can be turned on and off using the Copy Media key. Translucent paper = ON Translucent Film = OFF Even if the SP mode is canceled, the voltage is displayed during the stand-by condition or copy cycling. To release this condition, turn the main switch off and on. 0: Normal Normally, an original cannot be inserted from the rear side in Synchro-cut mode. If 1 1: Synchro-cut Rear is selected in this mode, an original can be Feed Mode inserted from the rear side even if Synchrocut mode is selected. This mode cannot be used with the trailing edge margin function. In this mode, the copy will be 194 mm longer than the original (A252 copier only). Adjusts the synchro cut length when a 297 mm original is used. Increasing the number will shorten the paper cut length.

-36

-62

Synchro-cut Rear Feed Mode -70

SM

4-7

A251/A252

Service Tables

SERVICE TOOLS
Mode No. Cut Length Display Mode Function In semi-synchro cut mode, the machine stores the 1st original cut length and displays it in the paper length counter. In this case, the paper cut mode will be automatically changed to the Preset/Variable cut mode. It is not necessary to press the cut key at the trailing edge of the original from the 2nd copy paper. Before the 2nd original is inserted in the original table, the cut length in the cut length counter can be changed with the +/ keys within the range of the semi-synchro cut (410 mm ~ 2,000, 16.5' ~ 80.0'). Selects the speed of the original feed motor in returning original mode. A slower speed may be effective for the thinner original. Selects the Roll Feeder start timing, just after the original entrance sensor detects the trailing edge of the original, or just after the original entrance sensor detects the insertion of the original. The setting change from 0 to 1 makes the first copy faster and 1 to 1 CPM increases. If the emergency stop key is pressed while the original is being transported to the scanning start position from the original insertion, it is necessary to check for paper left between the copier and roll feeder. Whichever setting is selected, the first copy and 1 to 1 CPM are within specification. Select whether the original is transported from the original table to the scanning start position directly, or whether the original is returned to the scanning start position after the trailing edge of the original passes through the original registration sensor (A252 copier only). The default setting (= 0) is effective for usage of curled originals. If the setting is changed from 0 to 1, perform the synchro-cut length auto adjustment (SP#-35, #-36). Determines how the machine recovers when the fusing temperature becomes lower than the target value during repeat copy operation when selecting mode 8 (highest temperature mode) (A252 copier only). Data 0: Non-Length Display 1: Length Display

-71

Original Feed -72 Motor Returning Speed Setting Roll Feeder Start Timing

0: 200 mm/s 1: 150 mm/s 2: 100 mm/s 0: Trailing edge is detected. 1: Original insertion

-73

Original Transport Mode

-74

0: Original is transported directly to the start position. 1: Original is returned to the start position after the original passes through the original registration sensor.

Fusing Temperature Recovery Setting

-75

0: No recovery (The machine simply continues copying, ignoring the fusing temperature.) 1: Stops copying and feeds out the original. 2: Stops copying but the original is not fed out. Copying starts again after the fusing temperature recovers.

A251/A252

4-8

SM

SERVICE TOOLS

4.3.2 INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK MODE

Input Check Mode Table
The on/off status of the selected electrical component is displayed in the paper length indicator (ON or OFF is displayed). If a program number not used is selected, NOT is displayed.
Program No. -1 -2 -3 -4 -5 -6 -7 -8 -9 -10 -11 -12 -13 -14 -16 Sensor/Switch/Signal Registration Sensor Exit Sensor Original Registration Sensor Entrance Sensor Main Motor LOC Signal (Status is ON when the main motor is normally rotating.) Door Switch (Status is ON when the door is open.) Original Entrance Sensor (A252 copier only) Original Rear Sensor (A252 copier only) Not Used R/F Leading Edge Sensor Roll Feeder Door Switch Right Cutter Switch Left Cutter Switch Paper End Sensor Exit Cover Open (Status is ON when the door is open.)

SM

4-9

A251/A252

Service Tables

SERVICE TOOLS

Output Check Mode Table

Press the Bypass Select key to turn on the selected electrical component. The status of the component is displayed in the paper length indicator. To turn off the component, press the Bypass Select key again.
Program No. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 to 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 Electrical Component Main Motor Toner Supply Clutch Pick off solenoid Registration Clutch Total Counter Pre-transfer Lamp Quenching Lamp Fusing Lamp Exposure Lamp (100% duty ratio) Exposure Lamp (selected ID level) Main Charge Corona Grid Voltage Transfer Charge Corona Not Used Separation Charge Corona Not Used Bias Voltage for the Image Area Bias Voltage for the Non-image Area Main Charge Corona + Grid Voltage Main Motor + PTL + Bias Voltage for the Non-image Area + Quenching Lamp Original Feed Motor (Forward) (A252 copier only) Original Feed Motor (Reverse) (A252 copier only) Roll Feeder Dehumidity Heaters Roll Feeder Cutter Motor *Note Roll Feeder Paper Feed Motor Original Feed Motor (Forward and Reverse) (A252 copier only) Note

30

34

Main Switch OFF (Energy Star)

Original feed motor operation changes every time the roll feed key is pressed. 1st time: Forward 2nd time: Stop 3rd time: Reverse 4th time: Stop Turn off the main switch.

NOTE: The cutter unit continuously moves between the left and right cutter switches. The number of the movements (0 ~ 9999) is displayed in the paper length indicator.

A251/A252

4-10

SM

JAM CODE LIST

4.4 JAM CODE LIST

4.4.2 JAM CODE TABLE
Code dJ01 dJ02 dJ03 dJ05 dJ06 dJ07 dJ08 dJ10 dJ11 dJ17 dJ18 dJ21 dJ22 dJ23 dJ25 dJ26 dJ27 dJ28 dJ32 dJ33 dJ35 dJ36 dJ40 dJ41 dJ42 dJ43 Cause of Jam Initial misfeed at the original entrance sensor. Initial misfeed at the original registration sensor. Initial misfeed at the original rear sensor. Initial misfeed at the entrance sensor. Initial misfeed at the registration sensor. Initial misfeed at the exit sensor. Initial misfeed at the leading edge sensor of the roll feeder. Original entrance sensor OFF check during the original scanning process. Original entrance sensor ON check during the original scanning process. Original entrance sensor OFF check during the original returning process. Original entrance sensor ON check during the original returning process. Original registration sensor leading edge ON check during the original scanning process. Original registration sensor trailing edge OFF check during the original scanning process. Original registration sensor trailing edge ON check during the original scanning process. Original registration sensor leading edge OFF check during the original returning process. Original registration sensor leading edge ON check during the original returning process. Original registration sensor trailing edge OFF check during the original returning process. Original registration sensor trailing edge ON check during the original returning process. Original rear sensor trailing edge OFF check during the original scanning process. Original rear sensor trailing edge ON check during the original scanning process. Original rear sensor leading edge OFF check during the original returning process. Original rear sensor leading edge ON check during the original returning process. Emergency stop key pressed Original registration sensor OFF condition during the original scanning process. Original rear sensor OFF condition during the original returning process. Original rear sensor ON condition when clearing the original hold mode by pressing the key. Remarks A252 only A252 only

A252 only A252 only A252 only A252 only A252 only A252 only A252 only A252 only A252 only A252 only A252 only A252 only A252 only A252 only A252 only
Service Tables

A252 only A252 only A252 only

SM

4-11

A251/A252

JAM CODE LIST Code dJ45 pJ51 pJ52 pJ53 pJ55 pJ60 pJ61 pJ62 pJ63 pJ70 pJ71 pJ72 rJ80 rJ81 rJ90 rJ91 rJ95 rJ98 rJ99 Cause of Jam Original registration sensor does not turn off after paper is fed 2,500 mm. Registration sensor OFF condition is detected just after starting the copy process. Registration sensor OFF condition is detected before starting the roll feeder again. Entrance sensor ON condition is detected during roll feeding. Registration sensor does not turn off after paper is fed 2,500 mm. Registration sensor OFF check at the paper leading edge. Registration sensor ON check at the paper leading edge. Registration sensor OFF check at the paper trailing edge. Registration sensor ON check at the paper trailing edge. Exit sensor OFF check at the paper leading edge. Exit sensor ON check at the paper leading edge. Exit sensor OFF check at the paper trailing edge. Leading edge sensor OFF check at the paper leading edge. Leading edge sensor ON check at the paper leading edge. Paper cutter failure Door open during roll feeding Roll feeder. Motor does not turn off after paper is fed 500 mm more than the maximum paper length. Leading edge sensor ON check at the paper trailing edge during roll feeding. Leading edge sensor OFF check at the paper trailing edge during roll feeding. Remarks

A251 only

A251/A252

4-12

SM

JAM CODE LIST

Fixed Paper Size Pattern Data (SP No. 22)

In mm Mode 0: 1189, 841, 594, 420, 297 1: 2000, 1189, 841, 594, 420, 297, 245 2: 2000, 1900, 1800, 1700, 1600, 1500, 1400, 1300, 1200, 1100, 1000, 900, 800, 700, 600, 500, 400, 300, 245 3: 2000, 1900, 1800, 1700, 1600, 1500, 1400, 1300, 1200, 1189, 841, 594, 420, 297, 245 4: 2000, 1800, 1456, 1189, 1030, 841, 728, 594, 515, 420, 364, 297, 245 5: 2000, 1500, 1230, 880, 625, 450, 330, 245 6: 1456, 1030, 728, 515, 364, 257 7: 2000, 1456, 1030, 728 515, 364, 257, 245 8: 2000, 1500, 1189, 1100, 841, 594, 420, 300, 297, 245 9: 2000, 1456, 1200, 1189, 1091, 1085, 1030, 1016, 1000, 939, 900, 880, 841, 813, 788, 765, 762, 758, 728, 679, 636, 625, 594, 591,546, 515, 508, 420,364, 297, 257 10: 2000, 1800, 1600, 1400, 1200, 1000, 800, 600, 400, 245 11: 2000, 1750, 1500, 1250, 1000, 750, 500, 245 12: 2000, 1950, 1900, 1850, 1800, 1750, 1700, 1650, 1600, 1550, 1500, 1450, 1400, 1350, 1300, 1250, 1200, 1150, 1100, 1050, 1000, 950, 900, 850, 800, 750, 700, 650, 600, 550, 500, 450, 400, 350, 300, 245 13: 2000, 1800, 1500, 1189, 1100, 1050, 1000, 950, 900, 841, 800, 750, 700, 650, 594, 550, 500, 420, 297, 245 14: 2000, 1800, 1456, 1200, 1189, 1085, 1030, 900, 880, 841, 765, 728, 625, 594, 515, 420, 364, 297, 245 15: 2000, 1800, 1500, 1200, 1189, 594, 245 16: 2000, 1800, 1500, 1200, 1000, 841, 420, 245 17: 2000, 1800, 1500, 1220, 1189, 915, 841, 610, 594, 458, 420, 305, 297, 245 18: 2000, 1800, 1500, 1189, 1118, 864, 841, 594, 559, 432, 420, 297, 280, 245 19: The data stored in SP23 to 32 In inch Mode 0: 48.0, 42.0, 36.0, 24.0, 18.0, 12.0 1: 44.0, 42.0, 34.0, 22.0, 17.0, 11.0 2: 80.0, 72.0, 64.0, 48.0, 42.0, 36.0, 24.0, 18.0, 12.0, 9.6 3: 80.0, 72.0, 64.0, 44.0, 42.0, 34.0, 22.0, 17.0, 11.0, 9.6 4: 80.0, 72.0, 64.0, 48.0, 44.0, 36.0, 34.0, 24.0, 22.0, 18.0, 17.0, 12.0, 11.0, 9.6 5: 80.0, 70.0, 60.0, 50.0, 40.0, 30.0, 20.0, 10.0, 9.6 6: 80.0, 75.0, 70.0, 65.0, 60.0, 55.0, 50.0, 45.0, 40.0, 35.0, 30.0, 25.0, 20.0, 15.0, 10.0, 9.6 7: 80.0, 75.0, 70.0, 65.0, 60.0, 55.0, 50.0, 48.0, 42.0, 36.0, 24.0, 18.0, 12.0, 9.6 8: 80.0, 75.0, 70.0, 65.0, 60.0, 55.0, 50.0, 44.0, 42.0, 34.0, 22.0, 17.0, 11.0, 9.6 9: 80.0, 75.0, 70.0, 65.0, 60.0, 55.0, 50.0, 48.0, 44.0, 42.0, 36.0, 34.0, 24.0, 22.0, 18.0, 17.0, 12.0, 11.0, 9.6 10: 80.0, 77.5, 75.0, 72.5, 70.0, 67.5, 65.0, 62.5, 60.0, 57.5, 55.0, 52.5, 50.0, 47.5, 45.0, 42.5, 40.0, 37.5, 35.0, 32.5, 30.0, 27.5, 25.0, 22.5, 20.0, 17.5, 15.0, 12.5, 10.0, 9.6 11: 80.0, 77.5, 75.0, 72.5, 70.0, 67.5, 65.0, 62.5, 60.0, 57.5, 55.0, 52.5, 50.0, 48.0, 42.0, 36.0, 34.0, 24.0, 22.0, 18.0, 17.0, 12.0, 11.0, 9.6

SM

4-13

A251/A252

Service Tables

JAM CODE LIST 12: 80.0, 77.5, 75.0, 72.5, 70.0, 67.5, 65.0, 62.5, 60.0, 57.5, 55.0, 52.5, 50.0, 48.0, 42.0, 36.0, 24.0, 18.0, 12.0, 9.6 13: 80.0, 77.5, 75.0, 72.5, 70.0, 67.5, 65.0, 62.5, 60.0, 57.5, 55.0, 52.5, 50.0, 44.0, 42.0, 34.0, 22.0, 17.0, 11.0, 9.6 14: 80.0, 78.0, 76.0, 74.0, 72.0, 70.0, 68.0, 66.0, 64.0, 62.0, 60.0, 58.0, 56.0, 54.0, 52.0, 50.0, 48.0, 46.0, 44.0, 42.0, 40.0, 38.0, 36.0, 34.0, 32.0, 30.0, 28.0, 26.0, 24.0, 22.0, 20.0, 18.0, 16.0, 14.0, 12.0, 10.0, 9,6 15: 80.0, 72.0, 60.0, 48.0, 36.0, 24.0, 12.0, 9.6 16: 80.0, 78.0, 72.0, 66.0, 60.0, 50.0, 54.0, 48.0, 42.0, 36.0, 30.0, 24.0, 18.0, 12.0, 9.6 17: 80.0, 78.0, 75.0, 72.0, 69.0, 66.0, 63.0, 60.0, 57.0, 54.0, 51.0, 48.0, 45.0, 42.0, 39.0, 36.0, 33.0, 30.0, 27.0, 24.0, 21.0, 18.0, 15.0, 12.0, 9.6 18: 80.0, 72.0, 64.0, 57.3, 48.0, 46.8, 42.0, 40.6, 36.0, 34.0, 33.1, 28.7, 24.0, 23.4, 22.0, 20.3, 18.0, 17.0, 16.6, 14.4, 12.0, 11.7, 11.0, 10.1, 9.6 19: The data stored in SP23 to 32

Default Settings for Each Destination (SP#-1)

SP. No. #1 #2 #3 #4 #5 #6 #7 #8 #9 #10 #13 #14 #15 #17 #19 #20 #21 #22 #-2 #-3 Japan 1 0 1 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 30 0.0 0.0 0 0 0 1 0 U.S.A. 2 0 1 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 30 0.0 0.0 1 0 0 6 1 Europe 2 0 1 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.0 0.0 0 0 0 1 0 Asia 2 0 1 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.0 0.0 0 0 0 1 0 Regma/Ozalid 2 0 1 1 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.0 0.0 0 0 0 1 0 K+E 2 0 1 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 30 0.0 0.0 1 0 0 6 1

#13, #14, #17: A252 only

A251/A252

4-14

SM

SERVICE REMARKS

4.6 SERVICE REMARKS

4.6.12 AC DRIVE BOARD

Noise Filter

AC Drive Board TB202 TB201

A252M500.WMF

Service Remark for 220 240 V Version

Make sure that the harnesses are connected to the noise filter and ac drive board as shown correctly 1. Set the power supply cord hot line (brown wire) connector to terminal 1 on the noise filter. 2. Set the power supply cord neutral line (blue wire) connector to terminal 2 on the noise filter. 3. Set the noise filter harness hot line (black wire) yellow connector to terminal 3 on the noise filter. 4. Set the noise filter harness neutral line (white wire) white connector to terminal 4 on the noise filter 5. Set the noise filter harness hot line (black wire) yellow connector to TB201 on ac drive board. 6. Set the noise filter harness neutral line (white wire) white connector to TB202 on ac drive board.

SM

4-15

A251/A252

Service Tables

SERVICE REMARKS

AC Drive Board TB202 TB201

A252M500.WMF

Service Remarks for 120 V Version

Make sure that the harness is connected to the ac drive board as shown correctly 1. Set the power supply cord harness hot line (black wire) yellow connector to TB201 on ac drive board. 2. Set the power supply cord harness neutral line (white wire) white connector to TB202 on ac drive board.

A251/A252

4-16

SM

REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

OPTICS

5. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

5.2 OPTICS
[A] [D] [C]

[B]

[E]

A252R500.WMF

[G] [F]

A252R501.WMF

5.2.1 ORIGINAL FEED UNIT REMOVAL (A252 ONLY)

1. Remove the left and right upper covers. 2. Remove the upper original guide [A]. 3. Push the projections [B] into the holes [C] of the rear side of the original feed unit as shown and remove the operation panel [D] (1 screw and 2 connectors). 4. Open the original feed unit [E] and unhook the stoppers [F] at both ends. 5. Turn the original feed unit and two bushings [G] at both ends 1/4 of a turn and remove.

SM

5-1

A251/A252

Replacement Adjustment

OPTICS

[D] [B] [G]

[C]

[F] [H] [B] [C] [E] [I] [J]

A252R510.WMF

[A]

[K]

A252R502.WMF

5.2.2 EXPOSURE GLASS REMOVAL (A252 ONLY)

1. Remove the original feed unit. 2. Remove the exposure glass bracket [A] (1 screw). 3. Remove the exposure glass stoppers [B] (2 screws). 4. Remove the exposure glass [C] by sliding it out to the right side and lifting up the left side as shown. NOTE: Make sure that the edge cut side [D] of the exposure glass is towards the upper side when reassembling.

5.2.3 FIBER OPTICS ARRAY REMOVAL (A252 ONLY)

1. Remove the exposure glass. 2. Open the toner supply cover [E] and remove the front original guide plate [F] (1 screw). 3. Remove the rear original guide plate [G] (4 screws and 1 pin [H]). 4. Lift up the fiber optics array [I] and remove it from the left side by sliding it out to the right side as shown. NOTE: When reassembling, be careful not to damage the right side [J] of the fiber optics array by touching the optics side plate [K].
A251/A252 5-2 SM

OPTICS

5.2.4 EXPOSURE LAMP REMOVAL

[B] [A]

[A]

A252R511.WMF

2. Turn the exposure lamp [A] 1/4 of a turn and remove. NOTE: Make sure that the direction of the aperture [B] of the exposure lamp is towards the fiber optics array side (rear side).

SM

5-3

A251/A252

Replacement Adjustment

1. Remove the fiber optics array. NOTE: If the exposure lamp is too tight to be turned, remove one side of the exposure lamp socket (1 screw) and remove the exposure lamp.

OPTICS

5.2.5 LIGHT SENSOR REPLACEMENT (A252 ONLY)

[A]

A252R503.WMF

1. Follow the steps from 1 to 2 of the fiber optics array removal. 2. Replace the light sensor [A] (1 screw, 1 connector).

A251/A252

5-4

SM

OPTICS

5.2.6 SYNCHRO-CUT LENGTH ADJUSTMENT (A252 ONLY)

This adjustment should be carried out when the original registration and/or original entrance sensor is replaced. 1. Measure the actual length of A3 (297) and A0 (1189) originals. 2. Access SP#-35 (synchro-cut length auto adjustment, 297 mm) and input the difference between the measured length and 297 mm. 3. Press the RF Select key. The copy quantity indicator blinks. Input the test copy number (default: 5). 4. Press the RF Select key. 5. Place the measured original (A3) on the original feed table. If the original is not placed correctly (placed diagonally), by pressing the $ key once, this step can be canceled only one time. Otherwise, carry out this procedure from the beginning. 6. Repeat step 5 until the number in the blinking copy quantity indicator is 0. 7. Press the RF Select key. 8. Access SP#-36 (synchro-cut length auto adjustment, 1,189 mm) and carry out the adjustment in the same way as for the 297 mm adjustment.
Replacement Adjustment

SM

5-5

A251/A252

DRUM UNIT

5.4 DRUM UNIT

5.4.1 DRUM UNIT REMOVAL

[A] [B] [B] [A] [F]

[E] [C]
A252R504.WMF

[D]

A252R505.WMF

1. Remove the development unit. 2. Remove the 2 screws [A] at both ends. 3. Remove the timing belt [B] (A251 copier)/grounding plate spring [B] (A252 copier) and disconnect the harness connector [C]. 4. Remove the drum unit [D]. 5. Place the drum unit on the flat floor. NOTE: 1) When reinstalling the drum unit, hook the drum unit guides [E] on the pins [F] of the copier side plates. 2) Hold both ends of the drum unit to carry it.

A251/A252

5-6

SM

FUSING

5.5 FUSING
5.5.1 FUSING UNIT REMOVAL
[J] [K] [H]

[G] [I] [C]

[B]

[D]

[F] [E] [C] [B]

A252R509.WMF

NOTE: Close the paper path section to remove and reinstall the fusing unit. 1. Remove the copier rear cover. 2. Open the exit cover [A] and remove the shoulder screws [B] at both ends. Remove the screws [C] for the grounding wires. 3. Disconnect the connector [D], remove the screw [E], and flex the hinge arms [F] of the exit cover slightly to the outside of the exit unit shafts and remove. 4. Turn the exit unit [G] 1/4 of a turn to the front side (rear view) and remove it by pulling out. NOTE: When reinstalling the exit unit, set the right hinge [H] between the two pulleys [I] and raise the left hinge [J] using tape [K].

SM

5-7

A251/A252

Replacement Adjustment

[A]

FUSING

[B] [A]

[G]

[F]

[H]

A252R507.WMF

[C] [E]

[C]

A252R508.WMF

[D]
A252R506.WMF

5. Disconnect the connectors [A]. 6. Remove the screw [B] fixing the safety switch bracket. 7. 220 ~ 240 V version only: Remove the 2 screws [C] and bronze plate [D] (2 screws). 8. While pressing down the fusing pressure release bar [E], pull out the fusing unit. NOTE: When reinstalling the fusing unit, press down the fusing pressure release bar [E], set the fusing unit on the guides [F] and align the cuts [G] to the side plates [H] at both ends.
A251/A252 5-8 SM

T & S CORONA UNIT

5.6 T & S CORONA UNIT

5.6.1 TRANSFER AND SEPARATION CORONA WIRE REPLACEMENT
[A] [B]

[H]

[C] [B]

[E] [F] [G]

[G]

[D]

A252R512.WMF

NOTE: 1) Handle the new wire by the ends only. Oil from your hands may cause uneven charging of the drum. 2) Do not stretch or bend the corona wires. 3) Do not rub the corona wires with rough material (sand paper, etc.) as this will damage the corona wire. 4) Do not use any solvent to clean the wire as this will cause uneven charging of the drum.

Preparation
1. Remove the T & S corona unit. 2. Remove the paper guides [A] and endblock covers [B].

SM

5-9

A251/A252

Replacement Adjustment

T & S CORONA UNIT

Separation Corona Wire Replacement

1. Remove the separation corona wire [C]. 2. Hook one end of the new separation corona wire on the terminal [D] of the right endblock. 3. Hook the center part of the separation corona wire on the spring [E] of the left endblock. 4. Set the wire on the slots [F]. 5. While pushing the spring in the direction of the arrow, hook the other end [G] of the separation corona wire on the terminal of the right endblock. 6. Make sure the wire is set on the slots [F].

Transfer Corona Wire Replacement

1. Remove the transfer corona wire [H]. 2. Install the new transfer corona wire.

A251/A252

5-10

SM

COPY QUALITY ADJUSTMENT

5.8 COPY QUALITY ADJUSTMENT

5.8.4 REGISTRATION ADJUSTMENT
When: Purpose: Adjustment Standard: Perform: How: Registration is not within the adjustment standard. To maintain proper registration. 0 3 mm (0 0.12") SP#-5, SP#-27 (A252 rear original feed) Change the registration roller start timing by SP#-5 and/or SP#-27

1. Make several copies by using the manual feed or roll feeder and check the registration. 2. Adjust the registration using SP#-5 and/or SP#-27 if the registration is not within the adjustment standard.

SM

5-11

A251/A252

Replacement Adjustment

TROUBLESHOOTING

SERVICE CALL CONDITION

6. TROUBLESHOOTING
6.2 SERVICE CALL CONDITION
The following service conditions are newly added as the A251 and A252 copiers. For other SC conditions, refer to the A163 copier for details. To clear SC E-15, access SP38 and change the data from 1 to 0.

6.2.12 SC CODE E-14: ZERO CROSS SIGNAL DETECTION ABNORMAL

- Definition The zero cross signal is not detected within 0.5 second after the main switch is turned on. - Points to check Main board AC Drive board

6.2.13 SC CODE E-15: MAIN SWITCH ABNORMAL (U.S.A. VERSION ONLY)

- Definition The main switch does not turn off within 0.45 second after sending reset signal. - Points to check Main switch Main board
Troubleshooting

SM

6-1

A251/A252

BLOWN FUSE TABLE

6.3 BLOWN FUSE TABLE

6.3.1 POWER SUPPLY UNIT
Europe Version
Fuse No. FU301 FU302 FU303 FU304 Specification 250 V 5A 250 V 6.3 A 250 V 6.3 A 250 V 6.3 A Symptom No power. Flourescent lamp does not light. Black copy. No indication. Beeper sound. E = 10 is indicated.

U.S.A. Version
Fuse No. FU301 FU302 FU303 FU304 Specification 125 V 8A 125 V 6.3 A 125 V 6.3 A 125 V 6.3 A Symptom No power. Flourescent lamp does not light. Black copy. No indication. Beeper sound. E = 10 is indicated.

AC Drive Board
Fuse No. FU201 CB201 Specification 250 V 15 A (U.S.A. version only) 250 V 8 A (Europe version only) Symptom No power. No power.

A251/A252

6-2

SM

B047/B048 SERVICE MANUAL

Insert Version

The B047/B048 machines are based on the A163/A251/A252 copiers. Only the differences from the base copier are described in the following pages. Therefore, this documentation should be treated as an insert version of the base copiers service manual. It should always be utilized together with the base copiers service manual.

INSERTION PROCEDURE OF SERVICE MANUAL

1. Replace the book spine tag with the new one. 2. Insert the B047/B048 service manual after the A163/A251/A252 manual.

B047/B048
TABLE OF CONTENTS
This manual describes new items for the J2SS-C3 (B047/B048). Please refer to the J2SS Mark II (A251/A252) manual for the descriptions marked with * in page column.

OVERALL INFORMATION
1. OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION ........................................ 1-1
1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 SPECIFICATIONS.....................................................................................1-1 PAPER PATH............................................................................................1-3 DRUM PROCESSES ............................................................................... * MECHANICAL COMPONENTS ................................................................1-4 DRIVE LAYOUT ....................................................................................... * ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS..................................................................1-6

DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS

2. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS ...................................... 2-1
2.1 DRUM....................................................................................................... * 2.1.1 DRUM CHARACTERISTICS ........................................................... * 2.1.2 DRUM DRIVE .................................................................................. * 2.2 CHARGE .................................................................................................. * 2.2.1 OVERVIEW ..................................................................................... * 2.2.2 CHARGE CORONA CIRCUIT ......................................................... * 2.2.3 CORONA UNIT VENTILATION ....................................................... * 2.3 EXPOSURE...............................................................................................2-1 2.3.1 OVERVIEW ..................................................................................... * 2.3.2 PAPER AND ORIGINAL FEED (B048 ONLY)..................................2-1 Basic Operation (Manual Feed) ........................................................... * Original Jam Check Timing.................................................................. * Drive Mechanism ................................................................................. * Original Positioning ...............................................................................2-1 Scanning...............................................................................................2-2 Start Key Enable ...................................................................................2-3 2.3.3 FL REGULATOR CONTROL........................................................... * 2.3.4 MANUAL ID CONTROL................................................................... * Manual ID Control................................................................................ * 2.4 DEVELOPMENT .......................................................................................2-4 2.4.1 OVERVIEW ..................................................................................... * 2.4.2 DRIVE MECHANISM....................................................................... * 2.4.3 CROSS-MIXING .............................................................................. * 2.4.4 TONER DENSITY CONTROL ..........................................................2-4 Toner Near End Condition ................................................................... *
SM i B047/B048

Recovery from Toner End Condition.....................................................2-5 Toner Density Sensor .......................................................................... * 2.4.5 DEVELOPMENT BIAS .................................................................... * Basic Concept...................................................................................... * Manual Image Density Bias ................................................................. * 2.4.6 TONER SUPPLY ............................................................................. * 2.5 IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER SEPARATION .................................... * 2.5.1 PRE-TRANSFER LAMP (PTL) ........................................................ * 2.5.2 IMAGE TRANSFER......................................................................... * 2.5.3 PAPER SEPARATION .................................................................... * 2.5.4 PICK-OFF MECHANISM ................................................................. * 2.5.5 T/S CORONA CIRCUIT................................................................... * 2.6 CLEANING ............................................................................................... * 2.6.1 OVERVIEW ..................................................................................... * 2.6.2 USED TONER COLLECTION ..........................................................2-6 2.7 QUENCHING............................................................................................ * 2.8 FUSING AND PAPER EXIT ......................................................................2-7 2.8.1 OVERVIEW ......................................................................................2-7 2.8.2 DRIVE MECHANISM....................................................................... * Fusing Unit Drive ................................................................................. * 2.8.3 TEMPERATURE CONTROL ............................................................2-8 Fusing Circuit Operation ...................................................................... * Overheat Protection ............................................................................. * Hot Roller Temperature Control............................................................2-8 2.8.4 TEMPERATURE CONTROL ........................................................... * The Ready Condition ........................................................................... * Fusing Unit Operating Modes .............................................................. * 2.8.5 ENERGY SAVER FUNCTION......................................................... * 2.8.6 FUSING ENTRANCE GUIDE HEIGHT............................................ * 2.9 OTHERS .................................................................................................. * 2.9.1 ROLL CUTTING RAIL ..................................................................... * 2.10 ENERGY STAR COMPLIANT MACHINES (ALL THE DESTINATION) ......................................................................2-9

INSTALLATION
3. INSTALLATION ........................................................................... 3-1
3.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS ...........................................................3-1 3.1.1 ENVIRONMENT ...............................................................................3-1 3.1.2 MINIMUM SPACE REQUIREMENTS...............................................3-2 3.1.3 MACHINE LEVEL .............................................................................3-2 3.1.4 POWER SOURCE............................................................................3-3 3.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE .................................................................3-4 3.2.1 COPIER............................................................................................3-4 Accessory Check ..................................................................................3-4 B048 copier only (step 21) ..................................................................3-12 B047 copier only (step 22 and 23) ......................................................3-12
B047/B048 ii SM

Both copiers (step 24 and 25).............................................................3-12 3.2.2 TABLE (B439) ................................................................................3-13 Accessory Check ................................................................................3-13 3.2.3 COPY tray (B440)...........................................................................3-15 Accessory Check ................................................................................3-15 3.2.4 ROLL FEEDER1 and 2 (B435/b436) ..............................................3-19 Accessory Check ................................................................................3-19 3.2.5 Roll Cutting Rail (B437) ..................................................................3-28

SERVICE TABLES
4. SERVICE TABLES...................................................................... 4-1
4.1 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE ........................................... * 4.1.1 PM TABLE....................................................................................... * 4.1.2 REGULAR PM PROCEDURE ......................................................... * 4.2 SERVICE TABLES ................................................................................... * 4.2.1 TEST POINTS ................................................................................. * Main Board .......................................................................................... * Charge/Bias/Grid Power Pack ............................................................. * 4.2.2 VARIABLE RESISTORS ................................................................. * Charge/Bias/Grid Power Pack ............................................................. * T&S Power Pack.................................................................................. * 4.3 SERVICE TOOLS......................................................................................4-1 4.3.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE...........................................................4-1 Service Program Mode Access Procedure .......................................... * Service Program Mode Table ...............................................................4-1 4.3.2 INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK MODE ....................................................4-23 Input/Output Check Mode Access Procedure ...................................... * Input Check Mode Table.....................................................................4-23 Output Check Mode Table ..................................................................4-23 4.3.3 POWER ON INITIAL SETTING MODE ........................................... * 4.4 JAM CODE LIST .....................................................................................4-25 4.4.1 ACCESS PROCEDURE .................................................................. * 4.4.2 JAM CODE TABLE.........................................................................4-25 Fixed Paper Size Pattern Data (SP No. 22)........................................4-27 Default Settings for Each Destination (SP#-1) ....................................4-28 4.5 SPECIAL TOOLS AND LUBRICANTS ..................................................... * 4.6 SERVICE REMARKS ..............................................................................4-29 4.6.1 DRUM UNIT .................................................................................... * Drum .................................................................................................... * 4.6.2 CHARGE CORONA......................................................................... * 4.6.3 OPTICS ........................................................................................... * 4.6.4 DEVELOPMENT ............................................................................. * 4.6.5 TRANSFER AND SEPARATION..................................................... * 4.6.6 CLEANING UNIT ............................................................................. * 4.6.7 FUSING UNIT.................................................................................. * 4.6.8 ORIGINAL FEED ............................................................................. *
SM iii B047/B048

4.6.9 PAPER FEED.................................................................................. * 4.6.10 ROLL FEEDER.............................................................................. * 4.6.11 OTHERS........................................................................................ * 4.6.12 AC DRIVE BOARD .......................................................................4-29 Service Remark for 220 ~ 240 V Version............................................4-29 Service Remarks for 120 V Version ....................................................4-30

REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

5. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT........................................ 5-1
5.1 EXTERIOR COVERS ............................................................................... * 5.1.1 LEFT SIDE COVER REMOVAL ...................................................... * Left Upper Cover ................................................................................. * Left Lower Cover.................................................................................. * 5.1.2 RIGHT SIDE COVER REMOVAL .................................................... * Right Upper Cover ............................................................................... * Right Lower Front, Right Lower Middle, and Right Lower Rear Covers......................................................................................... * 5.1.3 REAR COVER REMOVAL .............................................................. * Rear Cover .......................................................................................... * 5.2 OPTICS .................................................................................................... * 5.2.1 ORIGINAL FEED UNIT REMOVAL (A252 ONLY)........................... * 5.2.2 EXPOSURE GLASS REMOVAL (A252 ONLY)............................... * 5.2.3 EXPOSURE LAMP REMOVAL (A252 ONLY) ................................. * 5.2.4 FIBER OPTICS ARRAY REMOVAL (A252 ONLY).......................... * 5.2.5 LIGHT SENSOR REPLACEMENT (A252 ONLY)............................ * 5.2.6 SYNCHRO-CUT LENGTH ADJUSTMENT (A252 ONLY) ............... * 5.3 DEVELOPMENT ...................................................................................... * 5.3.1 DEVELOPMENT UNIT REMOVAL.................................................. * 5.3.2 DEVELOPER REMOVAL ................................................................ * 5.3.3 TONER DENSITY SENSOR REPLACEMENT................................ * 5.3.4 PTL REPLACEMENT ...................................................................... * 5.3.5 DEVELOPMENT BIAS VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT ......................... * Bias Voltage for Image Area ................................................................ * Bias Voltage for Non-image Area ........................................................ * 5.4 DRUM UNIT ..............................................................................................5-1 5.4.1 DRUM UNIT REMOVAL ................................................................. * 5.4.2 DRUM REPLACEMENT ...................................................................5-1 5.4.3 CLEANING BLADE REPLACEMENT.............................................. * 5.4.4 CHARGE CORONA UNIT REMOVAL............................................. * 5.4.5 CHARGE CORONA WIRE REPLACEMENT .................................. * 5.4.6 PICK-OFF PAWL UNIT REMOVAL ................................................. * 5.4.7 GRID VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT..................................................... * 5.4.8 DRUM CURRENT ADJUSTMENT .................................................. * Charge Current Adjustment ................................................................. * Transfer Current Adjustment................................................................ * Separation Current Adjustment............................................................ *
B047/B048 iv SM

5.5 FUSING .....................................................................................................5-2 5.5.1 FUSING UNIT REMOVAL ............................................................... * 5.5.2 HOT ROLLER REPLACEMENT ...................................................... * 5.5.3 PRESSURE ROLLER REPLACEMENT.......................................... * 5.5.4 PRESSURE ROLLER THERMISTOR REPLACEMENT ................. * 5.5.5 PRESSURE ROLLER STRIPPER UNIT REPLACEMENT.............. * 5.5.6 HOT ROLLER STRIPPER UNIT REPLACEMENT.......................... * 5.5.7 HOT ROLLER THERMISTOR REPLACEMENT ..............................5-2 5.5.8 FUSING THERMOFUSE REPLACEMENT ......................................5-2 5.5.9 FUSING TEMPERATURE ADJUSTMENT .......................................5-3 5.6 T & S CORONA UNIT .............................................................................. * 5.6.1 T & S CORONA UNIT REMOVAL ................................................... * 5.6.2 TRANSFER AND SEPARATION CORONA WIRE REPLACEMENT.............................................................................. * Preparation .......................................................................................... * Separation Corona Wire Replacement ................................................ * Transfer Corona Wire Replacement .................................................... * 5.7 OTHERS .................................................................................................. * 5.7.1 OZONE FILTER REPLACEMENT................................................... * 5.7.2 ANTICONDENSATION HEATER INSTALLATION.......................... * 5.8 COPY QUALITY ADJUSTMENT ...............................................................5-4 5.8.1 LIGHT SENSOR ADJUSTMENT ..................................................... * 5.8.2 IMAGE BIAS ADJUSTMENT........................................................... * 5.8.3 TONER DENSITY ADJUSTMENT................................................... * 5.8.4 REGISTRATION ADJUSTMENT......................................................5-4

TROUBLESHOOTING
6. TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................................ 6-1
6.1 COPY QUALITY TROUBLESHOOTING .................................................. * 6.1.1 LOW IMAGE DENSITY ................................................................... * 6.1.2 UNEVEN COPY IMAGE .................................................................. * 6.1.3 DIRTY BACKGROUND ................................................................... * 6.1.4 BLACK LINE OR BAND................................................................... * 6.1.5 ENTIRELY BLANK COPY ............................................................... * 6.1.6 PAPER CREASING......................................................................... * 6.2 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS .................................................................6-1 6.2.1 SC CODE DESCRIPTIONS .............................................................6-1 SC Code E-1: Exposure Lamp Abnormal .............................................6-1 SC Code E-2: Fusing Thermofuse Open ..............................................6-1 SC Code E-3: Hot Roller Thermistor Open ...........................................6-1 SC Code E-4: Hot Roller Thermistor Short ...........................................6-2 SC Code E-5: Pressure Roller Thermistor Open ..................................6-2 SC Code E-6: Pressure Roller Thermistor Short ..................................6-2 SC Code E-7: Fusing Overheat ............................................................6-2 SC Code E-8: Fusing Warm-up Error ...................................................6-3 SC Code E-9: Toner Density Sensor Abnormal....................................6-3
SM v B047/B048

SC Code E-10: Main Motor Abnormal...................................................6-3 SC Code E-11: Toner Density Sensor Adjustment Error ......................6-3 SC Code E-13: Total Counter Abnormal...............................................6-4 SC Code E-14: Zero Cross Signal Detection Abnormal........................6-4 SC Code E-15: Main Switch Abnormal .................................................6-4 SC Code E-17: Unstable Fusing Temperature .....................................6-4 SC Code E-18: Fusing Lamp Continuous Light ....................................6-4 6.3 BLOWN FUSE TABLE ..............................................................................6-5 6.3.1 POWER SUPPLY UNIT....................................................................6-5 Europe Version .....................................................................................6-5 U.S.A. Version ......................................................................................6-5 AC Drive Board .....................................................................................6-5

ROLL FEEDER UNIT B435/B436

1. OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION ........................................ 7-1
1.1 SPECIFICATIONS.....................................................................................7-1 1.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS ........................................7-2

2. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS ...................................... 7-3

2.1 MECHANICAL OPERATION .....................................................................7-3 2.1.1 BASIC OPERATION.........................................................................7-3 2.1.2 ROLL EDITION DETECTION ...........................................................7-5 2.1.3 DRIVE MECHANISM........................................................................7-5 2.1.4 CUTTER OPERATION .....................................................................7-6

3. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT........................................ 7-7

3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 3.7 CUTTER UNIT REPLACEMENT...............................................................7-7 ROLL FEED LEADING EDGE SENSOR REPLACEMENT.......................7-8 ROLL FEED UNIT REMOVAL...................................................................7-9 ROLL FEED CLUTCH REPLACEMENT .................................................7-10 ROLL FEED MOTOR REPLACEMENT ..................................................7-11 ROLL END SENSOR REPLACEMENT...................................................7-12 CUT LENGTH ADJUSTMENT.................................................................7-13 Preset Cut : Adjustment standards: 3 mm (for Length Shorter than 420 mm) 5 mm (for 420 to 1,189 mm) 11 mm (3,000 mm) .........................................................................................7-13 3.8 SIDE REGISTRATION ADJUSTMENT ....................................................7-14

B047/B048

vi

SM

! IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICES

PREVENTION OF PHYSICAL INJURY
1. Before disassembling or assembling parts of the copier and peripherals, make sure that the copier power cord is unplugged. 2. The wall outlet should be near the copier and easily accessible. 3. Note that some components of the copier and the peripherals are supplied with electrical voltage even if the main switch is turned off. 4. If any adjustment or operation check has to be made with exterior covers off or open while the main switch is turned on, keep hands away from electrified or mechanically driven components. 5. The inside and the metal parts of the fusing unit become extremely hot while the copier is operating. Be careful to avoid touching those components with your bare hands. 6. The copier is not attached to the table. Pushing the copier too hard may cause it to drop onto the floor. While moving the copier, push the table. 7. When the main switch is turned on, the machine will suddenly start turning to perform the developer initialization. Keep hands away from any mechanical and electrical components during this period.

HEALTH SAFETY CONDITIONS

1. Never operate the copier without the ozone filters installed. 2. Always replace the ozone filters with the specified ones at the specified intervals. 3. Toner and developer are non-toxic, but if you get either of them in your eyes by accident, it may cause temporary eye discomfort. Try to remove with eye drops or flush with water as first aid. If unsuccessful, get medical attention.

OBSERVANCE OF ELECTRICAL SAFETY STANDARDS

1. The copier and its peripherals must be installed and maintained by a customer service representative who has completed the training course on those models.

SAFETY AND ECOLOGICAL NOTES FOR DISPOSAL

1. Do not incinerate the toner cartridge or the used toner. Toner dust may ignite suddenly when exposed to open flame. 2. Dispose of used toner, developer, and organic photoconductors according to local regulations. (These are non-toxic supplies.) 3. Dispose of replaced parts in accordance with local regulations.

B047/B048 OVERALL INFORMATION

B047/B048 DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS

B047/B048 INSTALLATION

B047/B048 SERVICE TABLES

ROLL FEED UNIT B435/B436

TAB POSITION 8

TAB POSITION 7

TAB POSITION 6

B047/B048 TROUBLESHOOTING

TAB POSITION 5

B047/B048 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

TAB POSITION 4

TAB POSITION 3

TAB POSITION 2

TAB POSITION 1

Comparison of Major Specifications

FW750 A251
Table Top 60K Copies 3.6K Max. A0/E Max. 2m / 6.6ft. Face-up Yes with Roll Feeder (Manual) 50mm/sec 3 cpm * Less than 300 sec. 24 sec. N/A Manual Bypass * 1 Roll Feeder * Roll Cutting Rail * Table * 1 Roll Feeder * New Table * Copy Stacker
rd

Items
Table Top 60K Copies 3.6K Max. A0/E Max. 2m / 6.6ft. Face-down Yes with Roll Feeder (Auto) 50mm/sec 3 cpm ** 2.4 cpm* Less than 300 sec. 30 sec. 1 to 10 (A0/E) Manual Bypass N/A 2 Roll Feeders + Manual Bypass 3 Roll Feeder 18 sec. Less than 360 sec. 7.5 cpm * 6 cpm ** 90mm/sec 4 cpm Within 3 min. (180 sec.) 21 sec. N/A Manual Bypass * Roll Feeder, 1 roll * Roll Feeder, 2 rolls * Roll Cutting Rail * Table * Side Guide 1230 x 690 x 1070 mm 176 lb. 80 Kg. 430 lb. 195 Kg 1080 x 570 x 490 mm 174 lbs 79 kg Yes (Auto) Face-up Face-down Yes, only with Roll Feeder 60mm/sec Max. 3.6m / 11.8ft. Max. 3m / 9.8ft. Max. A0/E 36" X 118" 10K 3.6K 300K Copies 60K Copies or 5 yrs Console Table Top Condole 60K Copies or 5 yrs 3.6K 36" X 118" Max. 3m / 9.8ft. Face-down Yes, only with Roll Feeder 60mm/sec 4 cpm Within 3 min. (180 sec.) 25 sec. 1 to 10 Manual Bypass * Roll Feeder, 1 roll * Roll Feeder, 2 rolls * * Side Guide

FW740 A163

FW760 A252

FW870 A174

FW770 B047

FW780 B048

Configuration

Table Top

Machine Life (A1/D Sideways)

60K Copies

PM Cycle (A1/D

3.6K

Original Size

Max. A0/E

Original Length

Max. 2m / 6.6ft.

Original Setting

Face-up

Syncronized Cut

No

Process Speed

50mm/sec

Copy Speed (A1/D)

3 cpm *

Warm-up Time (A1/D Sideways)

Less than 300 sec.

1st Copy Time (A1/D Sideways)

24 sec.

Multiple Copy

N/A

Paper Feed (Standard)

Manual Bypass

Options

* 1 Roll Feeder * Roll Cutting Rail * Table

Dimensions (W x D x H) Copier Only 174 lb. 79 Kg.

1080 x 570 x 490 mm

1080 x 570 x 490 mm

1080 x 803 x 480 mm

1080 x 623 x 480 mm 176 lbs 80 kg

Weight Copier Only

174 lb. 79 Kg.

* Copy Speed 1 - 1

** Copy Speed 1 10

OVERALL INFORMATION

SPECIFICATIONS

1.1 SPECIFICATIONS
Configuration: Copy Process: Original Feed: Original Size: Copy Size: Copying Speed: First Copy: Warm-up Time: Multi-Copy: Automatic Reset: Photoconductor: Drum Charge: Reproduction Ratio: Exposure System: Exposure Lamp: Development: Toner Replenishment: Toner Consumption: Development Bias: Toner Density Control: Image Density Adjustment: Paper Separation: Cleaning: Paper Feeding: Image Fusing: Fusing Lamp: Table top Electrostatic transfer system Sheet feed Maximum: 914 x 3,000 (36" x 118")mm Minimum: A4 (81/2" x 11") lengthwise Same as Original Size 4 cpm (A1/D sideways) 21 seconds (A1/D sideways): B047 copier 25 seconds (A1/D sideways): B048 copier Within 3 minutes (Room temperature 23C) B047: Single copies only, B048: Up to 10 copies 2 minutes after copying has finished (can be set to 1, 3, 4, or 5 minutes or to no auto reset) Organic photoconductor drum Scorotron corona wire and grid (Negative Charge) 1 : 1 (0.5%) Slit exposure via fiber optic array Fluorescent lamp (26 W) Dual-component dry toner system Cartridge system (750 g toner/cartridge) 1,860 A1 or D copies per cartridge (6% original) Negative Direct toner density detection using an induction sensor Development bias control + exposure control Dual wire AC corona and pick-off pawls Cleaning blade Manual feed (roll feeder optional) Teflon heat roller (upper) and a silicone rubber pressure roller (lower) Halogen lamp (115 V: 1,200 W, 230 V: 1,200 W)
1-1 B047/B048

SM

Overall Information

1. OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION

SPECIFICATIONS

Self-diagnostic Codes: Power Source: Power Consumption:

16 codes, displayed on the copy counter 115 V/60 Hz, 12 A 220 ~ 240V/50, 60 Hz, 7A Maximum: 1.4 kW Warm-up: 1.3 kW Ready: 0.04 to 1.3 kW Copy cycle: 1.4 kW B047: 1,080 x 570 x 490 mm 42.5" x 22.4" x 19.3" B048: 1,080 x 623 x 480 mm 42.5" x 24.5" x 18.9" B047: 79 kg, 174.0 lbs B048: 80 kg, 176.0 lbs

Dimensions (W x D x H):

Weight:

Optional Equipment and Machine Configuration

Main frame B047 copier Configuration Optional equipment Roll feeder (B435: 1 roll, B436: 2 rolls) Roll cutting rail (B437) Table (B439) Side guides (B438) Roll feeder (B435: 1 roll, B436: 2 rolls) Side guide (B438) Additional equipment Copy tray (B440)

B048 copier

NOTE: 1) Roll cutting rail cannot be installed on the B048 copier. 2) Key counters cannot be installed on these copiers. 3) The B048 requires a roll feeder (either 1 roll or 2 rolls). While the roll feeders are shipped separately, they are not really optional. One must be installed for the B048 to function properly. . Other Optional Equipment Roll Holder Unit (B394) Drum anti-condensation heater Specifications are subject to change without notice.

B047/B048

1-2

SM

PAPER PATH

- B047 copier E A B D

- B048 copier E A B

D C C

B047V102.WMF

B048V102.WMF

A: Original Path B: Manual Feed Path C: Roll Feeder Path D: Paper Exit E: Original Path: Rear Feeder There are two versions of this machine. The B047 is the basic version. It can only make one copy at a time. The B048 is the multi-print version. It can make multiple copies of an original (scanning and copying an original multiple times). Both versions can be equipped with either a single or a double paper roll.

SM

1-3

B047/B048

Overall Information

1.2 PAPER PATH

MECHANICAL COMPONENTS

1.4 MECHANICAL COMPONENTS

20 21 22 19 18 17 16 15 14 4 5 6 7 8 9 13 10 11 1 2

12

B047V101.WMF

1. 1st Original Feed Roller 2. 1st Press Rollers 3. Copy Tray 4. Exit Rollers 5. Fusing Exit Rollers 6. Hot Roller 7. Pressure Roller 8. Gas Spring 9. OPC Drum 10. T/S Corona Unit 11. Main Drive Unit
B047/B048 1-4

12. Roll Feed Unit (1 roll or 2 rolls) 13. Roll Paper 14. Paper Registration Rollers 15. Manual Feed Table 16. Development Unit 17. Toner Cartridge 18. 2nd Original Feed Roller 19. Original Table 20. 2nd Original Press Roller 21. Exposure Lamp 22. Fiber Optic Array
SM

MECHANICAL COMPONENTS

27 26 25

28

29

23

24

B048V101.WMF

23. Original Guide 24. Optional Copy Tray 25. Original Entrance Roller 26. Original Entrance Press Roller

27. Original Roller Feed Motor 28. Original Rear Press Roller 29. Original Rear Roller

SM

1-5

B047/B048

Overall Information

ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

1.6 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

Refer to the electrical component layout on the reverse side of the Point to Point index (Water proof paper).
Name Motors Main Exhaust Fan Original Feed (B048 only) Magnetic Clutches Registration Toner Supply Solenoids Pick-off Pawl Switches Main Original & Paper Feed Safety Fusing Exit Safety Used Toner Cover Function Drives all mechanical components except the fans (DC Motor). Removes the ozone built up around the drum section to the ozone filter (DC Motor). Drives the original feed motor (DC Motor). Index. No. 32 5 45

Drives the registration rollers. Turns on to supply toner to the development unit.

30 31

Moves the pick-off pawls against the drum.

Supplies power to the copier. Cuts AC power when the original or paper feed unit are opened. Cuts AC power when the fusing exit unit is opened. Door Open is displayed on the operation panel when the used toner cover is open.

17 18 12 48

Sensors Door Open Toner Density Original Registration Light Entrance Feed Registration Exit Original Entrance (B048 only) Original Rear (B048 only) Exit Cover Open Toner Overflow

Indicates Door Open on the operation panel and prevents operation. Detects the density of toner in the developer. Activates when the leading edge of the original passes the front of the exposure glass. Measures the intensity of the exposure lamps output. Activates when copy paper is inserted (jam detector). Activates when copy paper arrives at the registration rollers (jam detector). Detects jams through the fusing exit unit. Measures the original length and detects jams. Detects original jams. Indicates Door Open in the operation panel and prevents operation. Detects whether the used toner tank is full or not.

29 26 4 27 24 25 7 43 44 47 46

B047/B048

1-6

SM

ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS Name Function Printed Circuit Boards Main Controls all copier functions both directly and through other PCBs. PSU Converts the voltage from AC to DC voltage. AC Drive Provides AC power to the fusing lamp and PSU. FL Regulator Stabilizes power to the exposure lamp. Operation Panel Controls the operation panel display. Lamps Exposure Fusing Pre-Transfer (PTL) Quenching (QL) Index. No. 22 21 15 23 10

Provides light to reflect the originals image onto the drum (fluorescent lamp). Provides heat to the fusing unit. Reduces the charge on the drum surface prior to image transfer. Neutralizes any charge remaining on the drum surface after cleaning.

2 3 20 1

Power Packs Charge/Bias/ Grid Power Pack Transfer/Separation

Provides high voltage power for the charge corona, charge grid, and development bias. Provides high voltage power for the transfer corona and separation.

19 16

Thermistors Hot Roller Pressure Roller Thermofuses Fusing Heaters Anti-condensation

Monitors the hot rollers surface temperature. Monitors the pressure rollers surface temperature.

8 11

Protects the fusing unit against overheating.

Keeps moisture from forming inside the copier (option).

13

Others Total Counter Circuit Breaker (Europe, Asia)/ Fuse (U.S.A.)

Keeps track of the total length of copies made (Europe) or the total copies made (U.S.A.). Guards against voltage surges in the input power.

28 14

SM

1-7

B047/B048

Overall Information

DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS

EXPOSURE

2. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS

2.3 EXPOSURE
2.3.2 PAPER AND ORIGINAL FEED (B048 ONLY)
[E] [L] [J]
Detailed Descriptions

[C]

26 mm

[K] [F] [I]

[D] [G] [H]

10 mm

J: Original Rear Roller K: Original Rear Sensor L: Fiber Optics Array [B]

[A]

[M]

B047D500.WMF

B047D501.WMF

NOTE: For claritys sake, the following description will refer to the papers edges as edge [A] (furthest edge from the operator) and edge [B] (closest to the operator).

Original Positioning
In the B048 copier, edge [A] of the original is placed onto the original table. This activates the original entrance sensor [C]. The main motor turns the original entrance rollers [D]. The quenching lamp, development bias and PTL also turn on. For proper feeding (especially for a thin original), the original entrance rollers rotate backwards (feeding towards the operator) for 300 ms. This ensures that the original is gripped firmly by both of the original entrance rollers [D], feeding it evenly.
SM 2-1 B047/B048

EXPOSURE

[A] 4 seconds after the sensor is activated, the original feed motor starts rotating. [B] This delay gives the user time to align edge [A] against the original entrance rollers [D]. This helps prevent skew. The original is fed through the machine to the scanning start position [E]. This machine scans the original backwards, starting with edge [B] and scanning towards edge [A]. The original is now ready to scan.

Scanning
The original is scanned, moving back towards the operator. When edge [A] activates the original registration sensor [F], the roll paper feed motor turns on. Copy paper begins to feed, and the registration clutch is activated. When edge [B] reaches the original feed start position [E] (26 mm ahead of the original registration sensor [F]), the original feed motor stops to wait for the copy paper. In the copy section, the registration clutch turns off once the copy papers leading edge is 10 mm past the registration sensor [H]. The voltage is now applied to the charge corona. The original feed motor begins rotating towards the operator again at 60 mm/s, and the original is delivered to the exposure glass. Light from the exposure lamp [M] is reflected off the paper to the fiber optics array [L]. Once the originals edge [B] passes the original entrance sensor, the registration clutch and roll paper feed motor turn on again. The paper feed resumes and the copy paper is transported to the drum [I]. To measure the original length for cutting, the copiers CPU measures the time from when the original registration sensor detects edge [A] until the original entrance sensor detects edge [B]. The copy paper length is measured by counting the number of steps as the roll paper feed motor (a stepper motor) turns. Just before the paper is cut, the feed motor speed doubles. This creates a buckle at the trailing edge of the copy paper. The feed motor then stops as the cutter unit cuts the paper. Copying, however, continues. The buckle provides the necessary slack while cutting. When making duplicate copies, the original feed motor pauses, then changes directions again, and the original is fed back to the scanning position 200 mm/s. Once previous paper exits out of the roll feeder, the roll paper feed starts as well, and the process repeats. After all copies are made, the original is delivered to the original table. If original hold mode is enabled (SP16), the original will stop with edge [A] caught by the original entrance rollers. The original can be fed out by pressing the ! key. If original hold mode is not enabled, the original feeds out completely, and is not caught.
B047/B048 2-2 SM

EXPOSURE

Start Key Enable

When the start key enabled (SP34) is set, the start key acts as a starting trigger. In this mode, when the original activates the original registration sensor, edge [B] is delivered to the original registration sensor position. Everything pauses until the user presses the start key. Original feed and paper feed then resume.
Detailed Descriptions SM 2-3 B047/B048

DEVELOPMENT

2.4 DEVELOPMENT
2.4.4 TONER DENSITY CONTROL
The toner supply amount ratio is determined by the following conditions.
TS 0 ~ 50 sheets Level (~ 30 m) 0 1 2 N 3 4 5 0 1 2 L 3 4 5 0 1 2 H 3 4 5 VTS < 4.00 4.00 VTS < 4.10 4.10 VTS < 4.20 4.20 VTS < 4.30 4.30 VTS < 4.40 4.40 VTS VTS < 4.35 4.35 VTS < 4.38 4.38 VTS < 4.40 4.40 VTS < 4.42 4.42 VTS < 4.45 4.45 VTS VTS < 4.00 4.00 VTS < 4.10 4.10 VTS < 4.20 4.20 VTS < 4.30 4.30 VTS < 4.40 4.40 VTS 51 ~ 100 sheets (30 ~ 60 m) VTS < 3.50 3.50 VTS < 3.80 3.80 VTS < 4.10 4.10 VTS < 4.20 4.20 VTS < 4.35 4.35 VTS VTS < 4.30 4.30 VTS < 4.33 4.33 VTS < 4.36 4.36 VTS < 4.40 4.40 VTS < 4.43 4.43 VTS VTS < 3.00 3.00 VTS < 3.50 3.50 VTS < 4.00 4.00 VTS < 4.20 4.20 VTS < 4.30 4.30 VTS 101 ~ 150 sheets (60 ~ 90 m) VTS < 3.00 3.00 VTS < 3.50 3.50 VTS < 4.00 4.00 VTS < 4.20 4.20 VTS < 4.30 4.30 VTS VTS < 4.25 4.25 VTS < 4.30 4.30 VTS < 4.33 4.33 VTS < 4.36 4.36 VTS < 4.40 4.40 VTS VTS < 2.50 2.50 VTS < 3.00 3.00 VTS < 3.50 3.50 VTS < 4.00 4.00 VTS < 4.25 4.25 VTS 3: 7.5% 201 ~ 250 151 ~ 200 251 sheets ~ sheets sheets (150 m ~) (90 ~ 120 m) (120 ~ 150 m) VTS < 2.50 2.50 VTS < 3.00 3.00 VTS < 3.50 3.50 VTS < 4.00 4.00 VTS < 4.25 4.25 VTS VTS < 3.75 3.75 VTS < 4.00 4.00 VTS < 4.10 4.10 VTS < 4.20 4.20 VTS < 4.38 4.38 VTS VTS < 2.25 2.25 VTS < 2.70 2.70 VTS < 3.15 3.15 VTS < 3.60 3.60 VTS < 3.90 3.90 VTS VTS < 2.25 2.25 VTS < 2.70 2.70 VTS < 3.15 3.15 VTS < 3.60 3.60 VTS < 3.90 3.90 VTS VTS < 3.25 3.25 VTS < 3.50 3.50 VTS < 3.80 3.80 VTS < 4.00 4.00 VTS < 4.35 4.35 VTS VTS < 2.00 2.00 VTS < 2.40 2.40 VTS < 2.80 2.80 VTS < 3.20 3.20 VTS < 3.60 3.60 VTS VTS < 2.00 2.00 VTS < 2.40 2.40 VTS < 2.80 2.80 VTS < 3.20 3.20 VTS < 3.60 3.60 VTS VTS < 2.75 2.75 VTS < 3.20 3.20 VTS < 3.60 3.60 VTS < 3.90 3.90 VTS < 4.30 4.30 VTS VTS < 1.80 1.80 VTS < 2.00 2.00 VTS < 2.50 2.50 VTS < 3.00 3.00 VTS < 3.50 3.50 VTS

TS Level (Toner Supply Ratio) 0: No supply 1: 7.5% 2: 7.5%

4: 15%

5: 100%

Toner density control table has been changed for B047/B048 copiers.

B047/B048

2-4

SM

DEVELOPMENT

Recovery from Toner End Condition

After replacing the toner cartridge (opening and closing the original feed unit), the main motor rotates the development unit for 60 seconds. During the first 30 seconds, toner is supplied at 100% of the supply amount until TS level reaches 3. The main motor continues to rotate the development unit for another 30 seconds. Then copies can be made. If the TS level does not reach 3, the CPU stops the machine and displays the toner end condition. This prevents the operator from resetting the toner end condition by simply opening and closing original feed unit.
Detailed Descriptions

SM

2-5

B047/B048

CLEANING

2.6 CLEANING
2.6.2 USED TONER COLLECTION

[A]

[B]

B047D101.WMF

B047/B048 copiers have a used toner overflow sensor [A] and a used toner cover switch [B]. When the used toner overflow sensor detects that the used toner tank is full, the overflow indicator begins blinking on the operation panel. 30 more meters (A1/D size: 50 copies, SP51) can be copied. After that, the used toner overflow indicator stays ON, and the machine will not operate. The used toner cover switch detects when the used toner cover is open. Door open is displayed on the operation panel, and the start key is disabled.

B047/B048

2-6

SM

FUSING AND PAPER EXIT

2.8 FUSING AND PAPER EXIT

2.8.1 OVERVIEW

[A]

B047D102.WMF

Two thermofuses [A] (184C, 192C) keep the fusing unit from overheating. Two thin-film thermistors measure the hot roller and pressure rollers temperature. The hot roller is a thin-shell, Teflon coated roller. The thinner roller allows a muchshorter warm-up time. However, extra care should be taken while working around the hot roller. It is very easy to damage. Like the A163/A251/A252 copiers, if the fusing temperature is lower than 60C when the main switch is turned on, the machine assumes that it has not been used recently, and the main motor must rotate to generate the necessary triboelectric charge on the toner and developer. In the A163/A251/A252 copiers, the main motor begins rotating immediately. However, the B047/B048 copiers have a thin shell hot roller and a contact thermistor. When cold, the thermistor is hard and might damage the roller. The machine waits until the hot roller temperature reaches 80C. At that temperature the thermistor softens and the hot roller can rotate safely. Except for the differences listed above, the B047/B048 copiers are identical to the A251 and A252 copiers. Please refer to A163/A251/A252 copier service manual for additional details.

SM

2-7

B047/B048

Detailed Descriptions

FUSING AND PAPER EXIT

2.8.3 TEMPERATURE CONTROL

Hot Roller Temperature Control
Hot Roller Temp. (C) 198 Mode 8 Mode 7 190 Mode 6 Mode 5

180

Mode 4 Mode 3

170

Mode 2 Mode 1

160

150 142 ~60 63 66 69 72 75 78 81 84 87 90 93 96 99 102 105 108 111 114 117 120~ Pressure Roller Temp. (C) Mode 8

198

Operating Temperature

190 185 180 Lower Limit

110 115 Lower Limit

120

125

130

135

140

145

B047D001.WMF

The relationship between the hot roller and pressure roller temperatures has been changed due to the thin-shell, Teflon coated roller.

B047/B048

2-8

SM

ENERGY STAR COMPLIANT MACHINES (ALL THE DESTINATION)

2.10 ENERGY STAR COMPLIANT MACHINES (ALL THE DESTINATION)

In conjunction with the modification for the Energy Star compliance, field technicians need to understand the new operation modes, and must be able to configure the machine for the customers specific environment/requirements. This section lists all the differences between the Energy Star compliant machines and the previous models.
Mode Non-Energy Star Energy Star Starts timing once the last copy job is complete. When the specified time has passed, the copier turns off. The time can be adjusted from 1 to 240 minutes. Default: 30 minutes

Auto Off Mode

Not available

RA
CN102 -A3

V A A [24]

Power Relay [!24]

-B13

B047D002.WMF

*15 *33

Mode No. Auto Shut-off Time Setting AOF

Function Determines the auto shut-off time. Auto off enable.

Data 1 30 240 0: Disable 1: Enable

SM

2-9

B047/B048

Detailed Descriptions

INSTALLATION

INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

3. INSTALLATION
3.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
3.1.1 ENVIRONMENT
1. Temperature Range: 2. Humidity Range: 3. Ambient Illumination: 4. Ventilation: 5. Ambient Dust: 15C to 30C (50F to 86F) 20% to 80% RH Less than 1,500 lux (do not expose to direct sunlight). Room air should turn over at least 3 times per hour.
Installation

Less than 0.10 mg/m3 (2.7 x 10-6 oz/yd3)

6. If the location is air-conditioned or heated, place the machine as follows: a) Where it will not be subjected to sudden temperature changes from low to high, or vice versa. b) Where it will not be directly exposed to cool air from an air conditioner in the summer. c) Where it will not be directly exposed to heat. 7. Avoid exposure to corrosive gases. 8. Avoid installing anywhere higher than 2,000 m (6,500 ft) above sea level. 9. Place the machine on a strong and level base. 10. Avoid any area where the machine may be subjected to frequent, strong vibration.

SM

3-1

B047/B048

INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

3.1.2 MINIMUM SPACE REQUIREMENTS

Back 600 mm

Left 600 mm

Right 600 mm

Front 1,000 mm

B047I505.WMF

1. Front: 1,000 mm (39 in) 2. Back: 3. Right: 4. Left: 600 mm (24 in) 600 mm (24 in) 600 mm (24 in)

3.1.3 MACHINE LEVEL

1. Front to back: Within 5 mm (0.2") of level 2. Right to left: Within 5 mm (0.2") of level

Make sure that the machine is level using a carpenters level.

B047/B048

3-2

SM

INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

3.1.4 POWER SOURCE Important:

The machine must be installed in a building/facility equipped with a protective device such as a circuit breaker, as the machine relies on such devices for protection against over-current and short circuits. 1. Input Voltage Level: 120 V, 60 Hz More than 12 A (for U.S.A. version) 220 ~ 240 V, 50/60 Hz More than 7 A (for European version)
Installation B047/B048

2. Permissible Voltage Fluctuation:

10%

3. Do not set anything on the power cord. NOTE: 1) Make sure the plug is firmly inserted in the outlet. 2) Avoid multi-wiring.

SM

3-3

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

3.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

3.2.1 COPIER
Accessory Check
Check the accessories and their quantities according to the following list: - B048 copier Original Guides........................................................................ 6 pcs Operating Instruction Holder.................................................... 1 pc Operating Sheet ...................................................................... 1 pc Caution Decal (-27 only) .......................................................... 1 pc Operating Instructions (-17 only).............................................. 1 pc Original Guide Wire ................................................................. 1 pc - B047 copier Guide Wires............................................................................. 2 pcs Copy Tray ................................................................................ 1 pc Copy Guide.............................................................................. 1 pc Operating Instruction Holder.................................................... 1 pc Operating Sheet ...................................................................... 1 pc Caution Decal (-27 only) .......................................................... 1 pc Operating Instructions (-17 only).............................................. 1 pc

B047/B048

3-4

SM

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

[D]
Installation B047/B048

[A] [B] [C]

B047I024.WMF

Preparation for the B047 copier on the roll feeder. When B047 copier is placed on the roll feeder, first remove the lower front cover [A] and the manual feed table [B] for installation. 1. Remove the lower front cover [A] (2 screws), reinforcement plate [C] (1 screw), bracket [D] (4 screws) (which is hung by the harness), and the manual feed table [B]. 2. Put back the bracket and reinforcement plate.

SM

3-5

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

- B047 model [E] [B]

- B048 model [F] [C] [F] [F] [B]

B047I500.WMF

[A]

[E] [F] [D]

B048I502.WMF

[A]

NOTE: The installation procedures are not shipped with the copier, always bring this manual with you.

!CAUTION
1. Unplug the power cord before performing the following procedures. 2. Before starting the installation, make sure the machine is level. 3. The copier is very heavy (85 kg, 187 lbs). To avoid serious injury, make sure that you have a sufficient number of people to assist you. It takes at least two people to lift the copier safely. 4. Please be careful not to get your hand caught under the copier as you place the copier onto the table or roll feeder. NOTE: Keep the shipping retainers after installing the machine. They will be reused if the machine is moved to another location in the future. 1. For either the table or the roll feeder, lower the feet [A] (table: 2 feet, roll feeder: 4 feet) so that it does not move while the copier is being installed. 2. Place the copier [B] on the table [C] or roll feeder [D] (Place the copier feet [E] into the table holes [F]).

!WARNING
The copier is not attached to the table. Pushing the copier too hard may cause it to fall. While moving the copier, always push the table.

B047/B048

3-6

SM

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

[B] [C] [D] [J] [A] [L] [A]

B047I001.WMF

[I] [D]

[E] [L]
Installation

[K] [J] [F]

B047I103.WMF

[G] [H]
B047I105.WMF

B047I104.WMF

3. Remove all the tape strips [A] as shown. 4. Open the original feed unit [B]. 5. Remove the cushion [C] and close the original feed unit. 6. Release the lock levers [D] and open the paper path section [E]. 7. Remove the right upper cover [F] (2 screws). 8. Remove the drum protection sheet [G] and remove the screw [H]. This applies cleaning blade pressure to the drum. NOTE: Be sure to remove the protective sheet before removing the pressure screw. Otherwise, the cleaning blade will clamp the sheet to the drum, and the drum may be damaged. 9. Open the fusing exit section [I]. Remove the two strips of shipping tape [J] and the protection sheet [K]. 10. Remove two strips of shipping tape [L]. Close the paper path section and fusing exit section.
SM 3-7 B047/B048

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

[A]

[E] [C] [B]

B047I503.WMF

[D]
B047I504.WMF

11. Open the original feed unit [A], manual feed table [B], and toner supply cover [C]. Remove the sheet [D] covering the developer entrance. Pour 1 kg of the developer [E] into the development unit evenly across its width as shown. NOTE: Close the paper path section before opening the toner supply cover. If the paper path section is open, the toner supply cover could fall off. 12. Plug in the power supply cord and turn on the main switch.

B047/B048

3-8

SM

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

[A]

[C]

[D]

[B]

[E]

B435I508.WMF

NOTE: If the fusing temperature is lower than 60C when the main switch is turned on, the main motor must rotate to generate a triboelectric charge on the developer and toner. However, to prevent damage to the hot roller, the main motor will wait until the hot rollers temperature reaches 80C before rotating. This may take a few minutes. In this case, it is not necessary to use the SP mode to load the developer. Skip steps 13 to 16. After the developer is loaded from the development entrance, turn off the main switch to stop the main motor. Pour in the second 1 kg of developer. 13. To begin main motor rotation, enter the SP INPUT/OUTPUT mode by pressing the following keys on the operation panel: Clear Mode key [A] + key [B] + key [B] Clear/Stop key [C] Clear/Stop key [C] again and hold for at least 3 seconds. 14. After 3 seconds, the wrench and toner end indicators will blink (SP INPUT/OUTPUT mode). 15. Use the + and keys [D] to select 23, then press the RF Select key [E]. The main motor will begin rotating. 16. Press the RF Select key to stop the main motor once the developer is loaded from the development entrance. Pour in the second 1 kg of developer into the development unit evenly across its width (Total: 2 kg). Press the Clear Modes/Stand by key 3 times to leave the SP mode.

SM

3-9

B047/B048

Installation

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

[A]

[D]

[E]

[C]

[B]

[F]

B435I508.WMF

17. To enter the SP mode, press the following keys on the operation panel: Clear key [A] + key [B] key [C] Clear/Stop key [D] Clear/Stop key [D] again and hold for at least 3 seconds. 18. After 3 seconds. The roll paper end and call service indicators will blink (SP mode). 19. Using the + and keys, select 36. Enter 1 by pressing the following keys. Function Select key [E] + key RF Select key [F] This begins the developer initialization. Initialization takes about five minutes, after which the copier will automatically return to the normal operation mode.

B047/B048

3-10

SM

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

[A] [B]
Installation
B047I507.WMF

[C]

20. Install the toner cartridge [A] as shown. 1) Shake the cartridge 5 to 10 times and insert it into the toner hopper. 2) Peel off the green tape [B] from right to left to expose the clear tape and toner supply holes. 3) Rotate the knob [C] of the cartridge clockwise until it stops.

SM

3-11

B047/B048

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

[B]

[A]

B047I506.WMF

[C] [E] [D]

B047I509.WMF

B048 copier only (step 21)

21. Install the original guides [A] and original guide wire [B].

B047 copier only (step 22 and 23)

22. Attach the guide wires [C] to the copy tray [D]. 23. Install the copy tray [D] and copy guide [E].

Both copiers (step 24 and 25)

24. Reinstall all the covers. 25. Check the copy quality and copier operation. 26. Install the optional roll feeder. (Refer to the Roll Feeder 1 and 2 Installation procedures) NOTE: While the roll feeder is optional for the B047, it is required for the B048. You must install a roll feeder for the B048 to function properly.

B047/B048

3-12

SM

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

3.2.2 TABLE (B439)

Accessory Check
Check the accessories and their quantities according to the following list: Top Plate ................................................................................ 1 Left Side Plate ........................................................................ 1 Right Side Plate ...................................................................... 1 Middle Plate ............................................................................ 1 Rear Cover ............................................................................. 1 Screws with Spring Washers M4x8 .....................................14
Installation SM 3-13 B047/B048

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

[C] [B]

[F]

[A]
B439I500.WMF

[A]

[E]

[C] [B] [D]

B439I551.WMF

1. Loosely install the top plate [A], left [B], and right side plate [C] (6 screws). 2. Turn the table up-side down. Be sure to rotate it as shown in the illustration. 3. Install the middle plate [D] and rear cover [E] (4 screws each). 4. Tighten all the screws until the spring washers [F] are completely flat. 5. Turn the table right-side up.

B047/B048

3-14

SM

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

3.2.3 COPY TRAY (B440)

Accessory Check Check the accessories and their quantities against the following list: Copy Tray Stay ........................................................................ 1
Copy Tray Support................................................................... 1 Copy Tray Guides.................................................................... 2 Copy Tray Sheets (with rubber pads) ...................................... 3 Rear Copy Trays...................................................................... 3 Copy Tray Stoppers................................................................. 2 Screws with Flat Washers M4x6........................................... 6 Tray Sheet Guides................................................................... 3 Rear Copy Tray Sheets (no rubber pads)................................ 3 NOTE: The copy tray is an option for the B048 copier. When the copy tray is installed on the copier, the roll feeder (B435/B436) is required.
Installation B047/B048

Stepped Screws M4.............................................................. 2

SM

3-15

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

[C]

[D]

[A]
B440I117.WMF B440I118.WMF

[B]

[E]

[F] [A] [H]

B440I119.WMF

[G]
B440I121.WMF

1. Place the copy tray stay [A] under the copy tray as shown. 2. Adhere the copy tray sheets (the Mylar strips with rubber pads) [B] to the tables middle plate [C]. Make sure the center copy tray sheets is positioned between the screw holes [D] on the copy tray as shown. The left and right copy tray sheets should be positioned over the screw holes. 3. Lift the copy tray stay and install the two stepped screws [E] to the left and right side plates [F, G]. After the screws are in place, hook the copy tray stay [A] on the screws. Then secure it to the left and right side plates (2 screws for each: M4x6 with flat washers). NOTE: Be careful when installing the copy tray stay. Do not scratch the surface of the table. 4. Install the copy tray support [H] (2 screws: M4x6 with flat washers).

B047/B048

3-16

SM

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

[B]

[A]
105mm 02mm 05mm 105mm Installation

B440I113.WMF

B440I114.WMF

[C]

[C]

B440I116.WMF

02mm
B440I115.WMF

5. Remove the rear cover [A] (2 screws). 6. Attach the rear copy tray sheets [B] and the tray sheet guides [C] to the rear cover as shown. 7. Install the rear cover (2 screws).

SM

3-17

B047/B048

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

[A]

[B]
B440I120.WMF

6010mm 6010mm

8010mm

[C]

[D]

B440I123.WMF

8. Hook the rear copy trays [A] onto the copy tray stay [B]. 9. Attach the copy tray stoppers [C] onto the bottom of the middle plate [D].

B047/B048

3-18

SM

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

3.2.4 ROLL FEEDER1 AND 2 (B435/B436)

Accessory Check
Check the accessories and their quantities according to the following list: Harness Covers ....................................................................... 2 pcs Ground Plates.......................................................................... 2 pcs Roll Feeder Drive Board .......................................................... 1 pc Left Joint Bracket ..................................................................... 1 pc Right Joint Bracket................................................................... 1 pc Screws M4x8 (Silver)............................................................10 pcs Screws with Flat Washers M4x10......................................... 2 pcs Screw with a Spring Washer M4x8 ....................................... 1 pc Screws with Flat Washers M3x6........................................... 2 pcs Left Joint Cover........................................................................ 1 pc Right Joint Cover ..................................................................... 1 pc Harness Clamp ........................................................................ 2 pcs Paper Holder 1 Roll ................................................................................... 2 pcs 2 Roll ................................................................................... 4 pcs Guide Plate.............................................................................. 1 pc Front Joint Cover ..................................................................... 1 pc Cutter Blade Caution Decal (-27 only) ..................................... 1 pc Joint Harness........................................................................... 1 pc
Installation B047/B048

Screws M4x8 (Blue).............................................................. 4 pcs

SM

3-19

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

[D]

[A] [B] [C]

B047I024.WMF

Preparation for the B047 copier on the roll feeder. When B047 copier is placed on the roll feeder, first remove the lower front cover [A] and the manual feed table [B] for installation. 1. Remove the lower front cover [A] (2 screws), reinforcement plate [C] (1 screw), bracket [D] (4 screws) (which is hung by the harness), and the manual feed table [B]. 2. Put back the bracket and reinforcement plate.

B047/B048

3-20

SM

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

[C]

[E]

[D]

[E]

[B] [A]
B436I102.WMF

!CAUTION
1. Unplug the main machines power cord before starting the following procedure. 2. Before starting the installation, make sure the machine is level. 3. The copier is very heavy (85 kg, 187 lbs). To avoid serious injury, make sure that you have a sufficient number of people to assist you. It takes at least two people to lift the copier safely. 4. Please be careful not to get your hand caught under the copier as you place the copier onto the roll feeder. 1. Lower the feet [A] (4 feet) so that the roll feeder [B] does not move while the copier [C] is being installed.

!CAUTION
Do not open the paper tray until the copier is placed on top of the roll feeder. The paper tray drawer is very heavy. Without the copier weight to hold it down, the roll feeder will fall over. The tray is shipped with a safety latch holding the drawer shut. 2. Place the copier on the roll feeder. Fit the copier feet [D] into the roll feeder holes [E].

!WARNING
The copier is not attached to the roll feeder. Pushing the copier too hard may cause it to fall. While moving the copier, always push the roll feeder.
SM 3-21 B047/B048

Installation

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

[B]

[A]

[C]
B435I507.WMF

[B] [F] [A]

[D]

[E]
B435I506.WMF

3. Release the lock lever [A] and open the copier paper path section [B]. 4. Remove the copiers left lower cover [C] (2 screws), lower right front cover [D] (2 screws), lower right middle cover [E], and toner collection bottle [F] (1 connector).

B047/B048

3-22

SM

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

[A]

[B]

[E]
B435I105.WMF B435I101.WMF

[C]

B435I104.WMF

[D]

B435I127.WMF

5. Pull out the paper tray [A] and install the left [B] and right [C] joint brackets (2 screws each: blue). 6. Remove the paper tray stopper [D] (1 screw). NOTE: After the copier has been placed on the roll feeder, the paper tray can be pulled out and the paper tray stopper can be removed. 7. If necessary, adhere the appropriate language cutter blade caution decal [E] over the English decal on the paper tray as shown.

SM

3-23

B047/B048

Installation

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

[B]

[B]

B435I106.WMF

[A]

[F]

[C]

B435I122.WMF

[D] [G]
B435I124.WMF

[E]

[H]

B435I108.WMF

[D]

[I]
B435I110.WMF

8. Remove the roll feeders rear cover [A] (6 screws). 9. Remove the copiers rear cover [B] (2 screws). 10. Remove the small caps [C] from the copiers rear cover using cutting pliers. 11. Install the roll feeder drive board [D]. 12. Connect the following harness connectors as shown. DC harness [E] Roll Feeder Drive board Joint harness [F] Roll Feeder Drive board

B047/B048

3-24

SM

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Joint harness [G] Copier Main Control board (3 clamps) AC harness [H] AC Drive board [I] [B]

[A] [C]

[A]
B435I107.WMF

[C]

B435I109.WMF

B435I125.WMF

13. Install the grounding plates [A] (1 screw for each: M4x8). 14. Secure the grounding wire [B] (1 screw: M4x8 with a spring washer) to the copier. NOTE: To ensure proper grounding, tighten the ground wires screws until the spring washer is completely flat. 15. Install the harness covers [C] (1 screw for each: M4x10 with flat washers). NOTE: Fold the harness covers around the harness, then attach with a single screw. 16. Reinstall the rear cover of the roll feeder (6 screws). 17. Clamp the power cord to the rear cover of the roll feeder (2 screws: M4x8). 18. Put back the copiers rear cover.

SM

3-25

B047/B048

Installation

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

[A]

[B]

[C, D]

19. Hook the guide plate [A] on the copier and then secure it (2screws: M4x8). 20. Install the front joint cover [B] (2 screws: M3x6 with flat washers). 21. Reassemble the copier. 22. Install the left and right joint covers [C, D] (2 screws for each: M4x8 each).

B047/B048

3-26

SM

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

[A] [G] [D]

[E]

[C]

[B]
Length

[F]
300 XX PRG. NO. 42 1100 XX

B435I508.WMF

Temperature NORMAL

PRG. NO. 45

23. Plug in the power supply cord and turn on the main switch. 24. To enter the SP mode, press the following keys on the operation panel: Clear Modes key [A] + key [B] key [C] Clear/Stop key [D] Clear/Stop key [D] again and hold it for at least 3 seconds. 25. After 3 seconds, the roll paper end and call service indicators will blink (SP mode). 26. Select 40 using the + and - keys. Enter 1 (B435: 1 roll) or 2 (B436: 2 rolls) by pressing the following keys. Function Select key [E] + key RF Select key [F]. 27. To set the paper cut length adjustments, input values into SP modes 42 and 45 as listed on the decal attached to the right side plate. NOTE: 1) When the values for SP modes 42 and 45 are set, the paper cut length adjustment values for vellum and film are automatically entered (SP modes 43, 44, 46 and 47). 2) In the case of the 2 roll feeder, you must enter values for both the 1st and 2nd roll. The value for the 1st roll can only be entered when the corresponding indicator [G] is blinking (same for 2nd roll). Use the Function Select Key to switch between the two rolls. 28. Press the Clear Modes key 3 times to leave the SP mode. 29. Check the roll feeder operation.
SM 3-27 B047/B048

Installation

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

3.2.5 ROLL CUTTING RAIL (B437)

The installation is identical to that of the A163 copiers roll cutting rail (A570). Please refer to the A163 service manual for details. The roll cutting rail and the roll feeder cannot both be installed on the same machine at the same time.

B047/B048

3-28

SM

SERVICE TABLES

SERVICE TOOLS

4. SERVICE TABLES
4.3 SERVICE TOOLS
4.3.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
Service Program Mode Table
1. A * before the mode number means that the mode can be accessed by customers or sales representative. 2. In the data column, the default value is printed in bold letters. The default settings for several items depend on the machine destination (refer to page 4-28.).
Mode No. Fusing Temperature 1 (Normal) *1 Function Selects the fusing temperature for plain paper. Data 0: Mode 1 1: Mode 2 2: Mode 3 3: Mode 4 4: Mode 5 5: Mode 6 6: Mode 7 0: Mode 5 1: Mode 6 2: Mode 7 3: Mode 8 0: Mode 2 1: Mode 3 2: Mode 4 3: Mode 5 0: Up 1: Down 0: On 1: Off 2: Turn the beeper off when holding the button down to rapidly change the edge margin or paper length. 0: 2 minutes 1: 1 minute 2: 3 minutes 3: 4 minutes 4: 5 minutes 0: 2 seconds 1: 0.7 second 2: 1 second 3: 3 seconds 4: 4 seconds 5: 5 seconds

*2

Fusing Temperature 2 (High) Fusing Temperature 3 (Low) Copy Count Up/Down Beeper On/Off

Selects the fusing temperature for translucent paper. Selects the fusing temperature for translucent film. Select weather the user display panel counts up or down. Turns the beeper on and off.

*3 *4

*5

*6

Paper Feed Out Waiting Time Setting

Manual Feed Start Time Setting *7

Sets the copy time-out. Begins timing when a sheet of copy paper has been manually fed, or if the Roll Feed Select key is pressed. If a copy is not made within the specified time limit, the copy paper is ejected. Sets the manual feed delay. The timer begins when the entrance sensor detects the papers leading edge. Once the specified time has passed, the registration rollers start rotating.

SM

4-1

B047/B048

Service Tables

SERVICE TOOLS
Mode No. Leading Edge Increase/Decrease Speed Setting *8 Function This sets the speed at which the leading edge setting increases or decreases. When the customer holds down the + or key, there is a brief pause. After a selected number of 0.25 second intervals (See SP 12), the values begin to change at the selected speed. Sets the delay for the auto reset. After finishing a copy job, the machine will wait the specified amount of time. If no other jobs are begun, it will then automatically reset the copy settings to its default values. Enables and disables the auto energy saver mode. If enabled, the machine will automatically go into energy saver mode after it auto resets. Selects one of the options indicated on the display in the energy saver mode. Data Changes every: 0: 0.1 second 1: 0.50 second 2: 0.25 second 3: 0.05 second 4: 0.02 second

Auto Reset Time Setting *9

*10

Auto Energy Saver Mode Screen Message Setting

0: 2 minutes 1: 1 minutes 2: 3 minutes 3: 4 minutes 4: 5 minutes 5: No auto reset 0: No 1: Auto Energy Saver Mode 0: None 1: Pre-HEAt 2: Hello i lovE yoU 3: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 4: SLEEPinG 5: HavE A Good dAy. 0: 3 intervals 1: 1 intervals 2: 2 intervals 3: 10 intervals

*11

*12

Leading Edge Increase/Decrease Adjustment Preliminary Interval

When the user hold downs the + or key to change the leading edge margin, print number or paper length, there is a pause before the values begin to change rapidly. This paused is measured in 0.25 second intervals. Sets the original time-out. The timer begins when an original is placed on the original table in manual feed mode (B048 copiers only). After the selected time, the original is automatically ejected. Sets the delay between when the original entrance sensor or original rear sensor is actuated, and when the original feed roller begins rotating (B048 copier only). Determines the auto shut-off time. After original scanning is finished, the original exit roller stops before completely feeding out the original. This prevents the original from falling onto the floor after scanning. The original is fed out when the ! key is pressed or when the next original is inserted into the rear feed. (B048 copier only).

*13

Original Feed Out Waiting Time Setting

Original Feed Start Time Setting *14

*15

Auto Shut-off Time Setting Original Hold Mode

0: 2 minutes 1: 1 minute 2: 3 minutes 3: 4 minutes 4: 5 minutes 5: No auto feed out 0: 1 second 1: 2 seconds 2: 3 seconds 3: 4 seconds 4: 5 seconds 5: 6 seconds 6: 7 seconds 1 30 240 0: No 1: Original Hold mode

*16

B047/B048

4-2

SM

SERVICE TOOLS
Mode No. Length Size Magnification Semi-synchro Cut Original Scanning Mode Function Adjusts the speed of the original feed motor (B048 copier only). The setting can be changed by the key operation. Sets the cutting method for semisynchro cut mode (B047 copiers only). When using the default method, the user must manually press the roll paper cut key as the trailing edge of the original passes the tables edge. When using the alternate method, the user feeds the original once, and the original length is measured. The user then feeds the original a second time, and it is scanned and copied. The copy is automatically cut to the appropriate length. Adjusts the cut length in the semisynchro cut mode (B047 copier). Adjusts the cut length in the synchro cut, preset cut, and variable cut modes (B048 copier). The setting can be changed by a key operation. Determines weather the paper length cycles down (to smaller sizes) or up (to larger sizes) when the preset cut key is pressed. This sets the speed at which the paper length setting increases or decreases. When the customer holds down the + or key, there is a brief pause. After a selected number of 0.25 second intervals (See SP12), the values begin to change at the selected speed. Selects the fixed paper size pattern chosen when the Preset Cut key is pressed. Up to 10 different paper size can be stored in SPs 23 to 32. If 19 is selected in SP No. 22, these values are used when the Preset Cut key is pressed. Auto off enable. Select whether the start key can be used as a start trigger. Turns ON all indicators on the operation panel when the Roll Feed Select key is pressed. Data 1.0 0.0 1.0 Shorter Longer

*17

0: Pressing the roll paper cut key 1: Inserting the original again

*18

Synchro-cut Length Adjustment *19

25 0 25 Shorter Longer 1 mm/step

*20

Paper Length Count Up/Down Setting Paper Length Up/Down Speed Setting

0: Down 1: Up

*21

0: 0.10 second 1: 0.5 second 2: 0.25 second 3: 0.05 second 4: 0.02 second 5: 0.01 second Refer to page 4-24. UdEF: Undefined

*22 *23 to *32 *33 *34 35

Fixed Paper Size Pattern Setting Optional Paper Size Setting

AOF Start Key Enable All Indicators ON

0: Disable 1: Enable 0: Disable 1: Enable 0: No 1: All indicators on

SM

4-3

B047/B048

Service Tables

SERVICE TOOLS
Mode No. New Developer Initialization Function Carries out the new developer initialization for 5 minutes. The machine counts down the remaining time on the display. After the initialization, the machine automatically adjusts the toner sensor output to 4.0 0.1 V. During the toner sensor adjustment, Adj is displayed. When the adjustment is completed, the machine automatically returns to normal operating mode. Sets the range of the ID density control to give finer control over darker images. Default level 3 shifts to new ID level 7 (see the chart for the new levels). ID level 8 to 14 cannot be shifted. The light sensor output and development bias will change as follows:
ID level Default ID level Light Sensor Output Development Bias 7 3 0.9 160 6 2.5 0.9 140 5 2 0.88 120 4 1.5 0.84 120 3 1 0.8 120 2 0.8 80 1 0.8 60

36

Data If the initialization is canceled before returning to the normal operating mode, do it again from the beginning. If the machine fails to adjust the toner sensor output, E = 11 is displayed.

Darker Image Density

0: Standard Density 1: Darker Image Density

*37

38 39

Release Fusing Unit Service Call Not Used Roll Feeder Identification

Recovers from the fusing unit SC condition. After it has been recovered, the machine returns to its initial (power on) condition. Sets up the installed roll feeder. When this value is changed, the settings in SP42 and SP45 are set to 0. These SPs then update the SPs linked to them. SP42 updates SP43 and SP44. SP45 updates SP46 and SP47. Each SP mode setting (SP43, 44, 45, and 47) can be changed independently in the appropriate SP mode. Adjusts the roll papers feed speed.

0: Release SC 1: SC condition

0: No 1: Roll Feeder Installed (1 roll) 2: Roll Feeder Installed (2 rolls)

40

41

Roll Feeder Speed Setting (Factory Use)

0: Standard 50 0 50 Faster Slower

B047/B048

4-4

SM

SERVICE TOOLS
Mode No. Roll Feeder Cutting Length Adjustment (300 mm, Plain Paper) Function Adjusts the cutting length of 300 mm in the plain paper mode. When this value is changed, the values for SP43 and SP44 are automatically changed according to the following table:
Inch versions SP42 X SP43 X SP44 X + 0.5 Meter versions SP42 X SP43 X 0.4 SP44 X + 0.5

Data 0: Standard 9.9 0 9.9 mm Longer Shorter

42 If the settings in SP43 or SP44 exceed the maximum and/or minimum values, the maximum or minimum values are used instead. Note: The value for the 1st roll feed can only be input when the corresponding indicator is blinking (same for 2nd roll feed). Use the Function Select Key to switch between the two indicators. To adjust the cutting length of 300 mm in the translucent paper mode. Note: The value for the 1st roll feed can only be input when the corresponding indicator is blinking (same for 2nd roll feed). Use the Function Select Key to switch between the two indicators. To adjust the cutting length of 300 mm in the translucent film mode. Note: The value for the 1st roll feed can only be input when the corresponding indicator is blinking (same for 2nd roll feed). Use the Function Select Key to switch between the two indicators.

43

Roll Feeder Cutting Length Adjustment (300 mm, Translucent Paper)

44

Roll Feeder Cutting Length Adjustment (300 mm, translucent Film)

SM

4-5

B047/B048

Service Tables

SERVICE TOOLS
Mode No. Roll Feeder Cutting Length Adjustment (1,100 mm, Plain Paper) Function Adjusts the cutting length of 1,100 mm in the plain paper mode. When this value is changed, the values for SP46 and SP47 are automatically changed according to the following table:
Inch versions SP45 X SP46 X 1.0 SP47 X + 0.8 Meter versions SP45 X SP46 X 2.4 SP47 X + 0.8

Data 0: Standard 50 0 50 mm Longer Shorter

45 If the settings in SP46 or SP47 exceed the maximum and/or minimum values, the maximum or minimum values are used instead. Note: The value for the 1st roll feed can only be input when the corresponding indicator is blinking (same for 2nd roll feed). Use the Function Select Key to switch between the two indicators. To adjust the cutting length of 1,100 mm in the translucent paper mode. Note: The value for the 1st roll feed can only be input when the corresponding indicator is blinking (same for 2nd roll feed). Use the Function Select Key to switch between the two indicators. To adjust the cutting length of 1,100 mm in the translucent film mode. Note: The value for the 1st roll feed can only be input when the corresponding indicator is blinking (same for 2nd roll feed). Use the Function Select Key to switch between the two indicators. Adjusts the cut length in the semisynchro cut mode (B047 copier only). Changes the main motor speed.

46

Roll Feeder Cutting Length Adjustment (1,100 mm, Translucent Paper)

47

Roll Feeder Cutting Length Adjustment (1,100 mm, Translucent Film)

48

Semi-synchro-cut Length Adjustment Main Motor Speed Adjustment

49

10 0 10 Shorter Longer 0.1 %/step 0: Standard 9 0 11 Slower Faster When making long copies, if the main motor speed is incorrect, rJ98 or rJ99 error messages will be displayed. Use this SP to make the necessary adjustments.

B047/B048

4-6

SM

SERVICE TOOLS
Mode No. Toner End Detection Setting Toner Overflow Detection Setting 51 Function Determines the maximum number of copies (when A1 paper is used) that can be made after the toner near end condition has been detected. Determines the maximum copy length that can be made after the toner near overflow condition has been detected. Data 0: 27 sheets 1: 9 sheets 2: 18 sheets 3: 36 sheets 0: 30 m 1: 6 m 2: 53 m 3: 77 m 4: 100 m 5: 142 m tF=XX,XXX (Beeper)

50

Used Toner Counter 52

Indicates the maximum copy length that can be made before the used toner near overflow condition is triggered This counter is automatically cleared when the toner overflow condition is cleared after emptying the used toner in the bottle. Manually clear the used toner counter.

Used Toner Counter Clear 53

Developer Warm-up Setting 54

Paper Length Limit Setting

Sets the developer agitation time. If the fusing temperature is lower than 60C when the main switch is turned on, the main motor rotates for the set amount of time, generating a triboelectric charge on the developer and toner. Determines the maximum paper length. Note: If paper longer than 2,000 mm is used, you may experience skewed or creased copies, poor fusing, or damage to the original.

0: Full toner condition is not detected 1: Full toner condition is detected. To clear the counter, input 0 even if 0 is already indicated. 0: 50 seconds 1: 2 minute 2: 3 minute 3: None

(In mm mode) 0: 3,000 mm 1: 3,600 mm 2: 5,200 mm 3: 6,800 mm 4: 8,400 mm 5: 9,999 mm (In inch mode) 0: 118.0 inch 1: 160.0 inch 2: 240.0 inch 3: 320.0 inch 4: 400.0 inch 5: 480.0 inch

55

SM

4-7

B047/B048

Service Tables

SERVICE TOOLS
Mode No. Copy Number Limit Setting Function Determines the maximum number of copies. The default settings for the B047 and B048 copiers are different. Data 0: 99 sheets (B047) 1: 10 sheets (B048) 2: 20 sheets 3: 30 sheets 4: 40 sheets 5: 50 sheets 6: 60 sheets 7: 70 sheets 8: 80 sheets 9: 90 sheets 0: Only original drive 1: Original, main motor, roll feed drives.

56

Emergency Stop Key Function Setting

Determines how the emergency stop key functions. When set to 0, the emergency stop key only stops the original drive. When set to 1, it stops the original drive, main motor drive, and roll feed drive (B048 copier only). When a roll runs out of paper, if a layer of white paper remains wrapped around the core, the machine might not detect the paper end condition. This can cause a noise or a Wrong Paper Feed error. If this SP is set to 1, you can use the emergency stop key to recover from this error. Determines the maximum copy length for multiple copies (B048 copier only). While the Emergency Stop key is held down, power is still supplied to the main motor and registration clutch. Adjusts the size of the selected preset paper size. Each time the +/ keys are pressed while holding down the Preset Cut key, the preset paper size is adjusted by the amount selected in SP 61.

57

58

Repeat Copy Length Limit Setting Misfeed Special Recovery Mode Fixed Paper Length Special Mode

59

60

0: 1,200 mm/48 inch 1: The maximum paper length determined by SP55. 0: No 1: Misfeed Special Recovery Mode 0: Normal 1: Fixed Paper Length Special Mode

B047/B048

4-8

SM

SERVICE TOOLS
Mode No. Fixed Paper Length Special Mode Function Selects the interval of each step for SP60. Data (In mm mode) 0: 100 mm 1: 50 mm 2: 60 mm 3: 120 mm 4: 200 mm 5: 240 mm 6: 250 mm 7: 500 mm 8: 600 mm (In inch mode) 0: 10.0 inch 1: 5.0 inch 2: 6.0 inch 3: 12.0 inch 4: 20.0 inch 5: 24.0 inch 6: 25.0 inch 7: 50.0 inch 8: 60.0 inch 0: No 1: Special Toner Supply Mode

61

Special Toner Supply Mode 62

In the energy saver mode, 10% toner supply is done while the Emergency Stop key is pressed. Toner sensor voltage is displayed on the Paper Length indicator. If the voltage is lower than 1 V, toner is not supplied. Sets the display speed.

63 64

Not Used SP Mode Display Speed Setting

ROM Version Display

Indicates the ROM version.

0: 300 ms/letter 1: 100 ms/letter 2: 200 ms/letter 3: 400 ms/letter 4: 500 ms/letter Example: vEr_1994_06_06_01 Year Date

65

Month Suffix 0: No, 1: A, 2: B, 3: C 9: J RAM Abnormal Condition Check The value is set based on the RAM check. Shows the condition of the back-up RAM. Displays the total time (hours) that the machine has been in operation (total time the motor has been rotating). Internal Use Only The condition of the RAM is checked when the machine is powered on. 0: Normal 1: Abnormal dc = X,XXX

66 Machine Operation Counter Not Used

67 68

SM

4-9

B047/B048

Service Tables

SERVICE TOOLS
Mode No. Total Copy Length/ Number Display (Feet) Total Copy Length/Number Display Function Displays the total copy length in feet. Displays the total copy length/number according to the following units. SP70 = Yard SP71 = meter SP72 = 100 inches SP73 = 50 inches SP74 = A1 length (594 mm) SP75 = sheet (any size) Displays the total length of copies (in meters) on the current OPC drum. Data SP69: t6 =XXX,XXX

69

70 to 75

SP70: t0 = XXX,XXX SP71: t1 = XXX,XXX SP72: t2 = XXX,XXX SP73: t3 = XXX,XXX SP74: t4 = XXX,XXX SP75: t5 = XXX,XXX dO = XX,XXX This counter should be cleared when the OPC drum is replaced. (SP#-1) dE = XX,XXX This counter is automatically cleared when new developer is initialized. dT = XX,XXX This counter is automatically cleared when a new toner cartridge is installed. dL = ab - - c a: Toner density setting n, H, L b: TS level 0~5 c: Copy number step 0: ~ 30 m 1: ~ 60 m 3: ~ 90 m 4: ~ 120 m 5: ~ 150 m 6: 150 m ~ dnF = XX (total number of developer initializations) Hde = XX,XXX (developer counter at the last developer initialization dtE = XX Hdt = XX,XXX

OPC Counter 76 Developer Counter Display 77 Toner Counter Display 78 Toner Supply Level Indication

Displays the total length of copies (in meters) on the current developer.

Displays the total length of copies (in meters) on the current toner cartridge

Indicates the present toner sensor level.

79

Developer Initialization Number Counter 80

Displays the total number of times the developer has been initialized (SP36). Also displays the value of the developer counter (SP77) when the last developer initialization was performed. Displays the total number of toner end conditions (dtE). Also, displays the toner counter (SP78) at the last toner end condition (Hdt). Displays the total number of toner near end conditions (dtn). Also, displays the toner counter (SP78) when the last toner end condition was triggered (Hdt).

81

Toner End Number Counter Toner Near End Counter

dtn = XX Hdt = XX,XXX

82

B047/B048

4-10

SM

SERVICE TOOLS
Mode No. Roll Feed Speed Adjustment (translucent paper) Roll Feed Speed Adjustment (film) Number of Misfeeds by Location Function Adjust the roll feed speed for translucent paper. Adjust the roll feed speed for film. Displays the total number of jams by location. Data 50.0 0 50.0 10 steps = 0.09% 50.0 0 50.0 10 steps = 0.09% Jt = X,XXX (Total Jam) J1 J8 (initial jam) J10 J45 (original jam) J51 J72 (copy paper jam) J80 J99 (roll feeder paper jam) J1 = XX (Last jam) J2 = XX (1 before the last jam) J3 = XX (2 before the last jam) J4 = XX (3 before the last jam) J5 = XX (4 before the last jam) Beeper (XX = Jam Location) 20 0 20 1 step = 1 mm 20 0 20 1 step = 1 mm 20 0 20 1 step = 1 mm Et = X,XXX (total SCs) E1 E15 (each SC) E1 = XX (The last SC Xcode) E2 = XX (1 before the last SC code) E3 = XX (2 before the last SC code E4 = XX (3 before the last SC code E5 = XX (4 before the last SC code Beeper (XX = SC code)

83 84

85

Misfeed Record Display

Displays the locations of the last five misfeeds. Locations are displayed one at a time.

86

87

88

89 90

Preset Cut Adjustment (3,000 mm, plain paper) Preset Cut Adjustment (3,000 mm, translucent paper) Preset Cut Adjustment (3,000 mm, film) Number of Service Call by Location Service Call Records

Adjust the cutting length of 3,000 mm. Adjust the cutting length of 3,000 mm.

Adjust the cutting length of 3,000 mm. Displays the total number of service calls (SC) and lists the SCs by location. Displays the last five service calls. SCs are displayed one at a time.

91

92 to 99

Not Used

SM

4-11

B047/B048

Service Tables

SERVICE TOOLS
Mode No. RAM Clear Function Clears selected data items from the RAM. To clear the memory, input the number of the item you want to delete, then press the " key. Note: If all the memory is cleared (if a number from 20 to 28 is selected), you must reenter the roll cutter settings from the decal attached inside the upper right cover. Please refer to page 4-14 for the default settings for each destination. (When No. 10 to 26 is selected.) Data 0: Not Used 1: Machine Operation (The memory for SP67) 2: Copy Length Counter (SP69 to 75) 3: OPC Counter (SP76) 4: Developer Counter (*Note1) (SP77) / Developer Initialization Number (SP80) 5: Toner Counter (SP78)/ Toner End Number (SP81)/Toner Near End Number (SP82) 6: Counter for toner (*Note2) density step. 7: Clear data No.1 to 9 and 53. 8: SC Counter (SP90 to 91) 9: Jam Counter (SP85 to 86) 10: Change the settings to the Japan version 11: Change the settings to the U.S.A. version 12: Change the settings to the Europe version 13: Change the settings to the Asia version 14: Change the settings to the NRG version 15: Change the settings to other version 1 16: Change the settings to other version 2 17: Change the settings to other version 3 18: Not Used 19: Not Used 20: Clear all the memory and change the settings to the Japanese version

-1

*Note1: This counter is not used for the toner density step control (described on page 2-16 in the A163 manual). *Note2: For the toner density step control, this counter counts down from 150 (m) to 0 (m) after the developer initialization. When the developer initialization is done, this counter is set to 150 and after 150 m of copies, the counter stays at 0. If this counter is cleared, the counter is set to 0.

B047/B048

4-12

SM

SERVICE TOOLS
Mode No. RAM Clear Function Clears selected data items from the RAM. To clear the memory, input the number of the item you want to delete, then press the " key. Note: If all the memory is cleared (if a number from 20 to 28 is selected), you must reenter the roll cutter settings from the decal attached inside the upper right cover. Please refer to page 4-25 for the default settings for each destination. (When No. 10 to 26 is selected.) -1 Data 21: Clear all the memory and change the settings to the U.S.A. version 22: Clear all the memory and change the settings to the Europe version 23: Clear all the memory and change the settings to the Asia version 24: Clear all the memory and change the settings to the NRG version 25: Clear all the memory and change the settings to other Other 1 version 26: Clear all the memory and change the settings to other Other 2 version 27: Clear all the memory and change the settings to other Other 3 version 28: Not Used 29: Not Used 30: Clear all the memory 0: 1 yard 1: 1 m 2: 100 inches 3: 50 inches 4: A1 length (594 mm) 5: Sheet (Any size) 6: 1 foot 0: mm 1: Inch

Total Counter Unit Setting -2

Selects the unit which the total counter counts by.

Inch/mm Exchange -3 -4 -5 Not Used Registration Adjustment Light Sensor Adjustment -6

Selects the unit in which the edge margin and paper length is indicated by. Adjusts the paper registration for the by-pass feed. When this setting is changed, the same setting will be set for SP#-45 (Roll Feeder Registration). Change the settings for the light sensor. While in this mode, the exposure lamp can be turned ON and OFF using the Copy Media key. Translucent paper: ON Translucent Film: OFF

0: Standard 9.9 0 9.9 mm Advance Delay 50: Standard 0 50 99 Darker Lighter

SM

4-13

B047/B048

Service Tables

SERVICE TOOLS
Mode No. Hot Roller Temperature Adjustment Pressure Roller Temperature Adjustment Hot Roller/ Pressure Roller Temperature Display Function Change the hot roller temperature setting. Change the pressure roller temperature setting. Displays the hot roller temperature and pressure roller temperature. Even after the SP mode is canceled, the temperature will be displayed during the copy cycle and in standby mode To stop this, turn the main switch off and on. Data 0: Standard 9 0 9C Decrease Increase 0: Standard 9 0 9C Decrease Increase Fu = XXX Pr = XXX Fu: Hot roller temperature Pr: Pressure roller temperature If the hot roller temperature is lower than 80C (pressure roller temperature is lower than 50C), LLL is displayed. If the hot roller temperature is higher than 220C (pressure roller temperature is higher than 180C), HHH is displayed. 200: Standard 150 200 249 Low High

-7

-8

-9

Drum Charge Setting -10

Copy Grid Setting -11

Determines the drum charge voltage. In this mode, the charge corona can be turned on and off using the Copy Media key. Translucent paper = ON Translucent Film = OFF Determines the copy grid voltage. In this mode, the grid voltage can be turned on and off using the Copy Media key. Translucent paper = ON Translucent Film = OFF Determines the transfer corona voltage. In this mode, the transfer corona can be turned on and off using the Copy Media key. Translucent paper = ON Translucent Film = OFF To facilitate setting SP modes, when SP#-12 is entered, SP#-13 will be automatically set to (SP#-12s value X 1.5) Determines the transfer corona voltage at the paper trailing edge. In this mode, the transfer corona can be turned on and off using the Copy Media key. Translucent paper = ON Translucent Film = OFF

9: Standard 0 13 15 Low High

Transfer Corona Voltage Setting

80: Standard 40 80 120 Low High

-12

Transfer Voltage at the Papers Trailing Edge -13

120: Standard 40 120 249 Low High

B047/B048

4-14

SM

SERVICE TOOLS
Mode No. Separation AC Voltage setting Function Determines the AC separation corona voltage. In this mode, the separation corona can be turned on and off using the Copy Media key. Translucent paper = ON Translucent Film = OFF To facilitate setting SP modes, when SP#-14 is entered, SP#-15 will be automatically set to (SP#-14s value X 1.12). Determines the AC separation corona voltage at the papers leading edge. In this mode, the separation corona can be turned on and off using the Copy Media key. Translucent paper = ON Translucent Film = OFF Determines the DC separation coronas voltage. In this mode, the separation corona can be turned on and off using the Copy Media key. Translucent paper = ON Translucent Film = OFF To facilitate setting SP modes, when SP#-16 is entered, SP#-17 will be automatically set to (SP#-16s value X 1.5) Determines the DC separation coronas voltage at the paper leading edge. In this mode, the separation corona can be turned on and off using the Copy Media key. Translucent paper = ON Translucent Film = OFF -18 to -19 Not Used Bias Voltage for the Image Area -20 Determines the development bias voltage for the image area. In this mode, the bias voltage can be turned on and off using the Copy Media key. Translucent paper = ON Translucent Film = OFF Data 170: Standard 130 170 220 Low High

-14

-15

Separation AC Voltage at the Papers Leading Edge

190: Standard 130 190 220 Low High

Separation DC Voltage setting

-16

-17

Separation DC Voltage at the Paper Leading Edge

200: Standard 0 200 249 Low High

3: Standard 038 Low High

SM

4-15

B047/B048

Service Tables

200: Standard 0 200 249 Low High

SERVICE TOOLS
Mode No. Bias Voltage for Non-image Area Setting -21 Function Determines the development bias voltage for the non-image area. In this mode, the bias voltage can be turned on and off using the Copy Media key. Translucent paper = ON Translucent Film = OFF Selects the toner density setting. The toner density changes according to the copy length after the developer is replaced.
Copy Length (A4 size) ~ 30m (~ 50 sheets) ~ 60m (~ 100 sheets) ~ 90m (~ 150 sheets) ~ 120m (~ 200 sheets) ~ 150m (~ 250 sheets) 150m ~ (251 sheets ~) Std. Low High

Data 4: Standard 048 Low High

Toner Density Setting

0: Standard 1: Low 2: High

4.00V 4.35V 4.00V 3.50V 4.30V 3.00V 3.00V 4.25V 2.50V 2.50V 3.75V 2.25V 2.25V 3.25V 2.00V 2.00V 2.75V 1.80V

-22

-23

Toner Supply Periods in Toner End Condition Original Feed Motor Speed Adjustment Original Repeat Skew Check Mode

Selects the length of time that the machine adds toner after clearing the toner end condition. Adjusts the speed of the original feed motor (B048 copier only). Used to check skew when printing multiple copies (B048 only). When using this mode to make multiple copies, only the first and last copies are actually printed. The other copies are just scanned. By comparing the two copies, you can check for skew. Procedure 1. Select 1 in this mode. 2. Exit from SP mode. 3. Select the manual feed and enter the copy quantity to 3 or more. 4. Place the sheet on the manual feed table and place the original on the original table. 5. After all the copies are made, change SP#-27 to 0 or turn the main switch off and on. (This mode will be canceled.)

-24

0: 60 s 1: 70 s 2: 80 s 3: 90 s 50 0 50 Faster Slower 0.030%/step 0: Off 1: On

-27

B047/B048

4-16

SM

SERVICE TOOLS
Mode No. Length Size Magnification Compensation on Leading Edge -28 Function The fusing rollers speed is slightly higher than the drum speed. The speed of the copy paper transport will increase slightly after the leading edge of the copy paper enters the fusing unit. To compensate for this, the speed of the original feed motor is corrected from the leading edge to 183 mm (B048 copier only). Adjusts the paper registration for the rear original feed (B048 only). If the setting of SP#-74 is 1, this setting is used for the paper registration for the front original feed as well as the rear original feed. In this case, this adjustment is automatically set for the SP#-5 adjustment. Changes the toner density sensor voltage. Normally, the value is automatically adjusted when the new developer initialization (SP36) is done. In this mode, PTL, main motor, QL and the bias voltage for non-image area can be turned or and off using the Copy Media key. Translucent paper = ON Translucent Film = OFF Displays the toner sensor output voltage for the last copy. Displays the real time toner sensor output voltage. In this mode, the PTL, main motor, QL and the bias voltage for non-image areas can be turned on and off using the Copy Media key. Translucent paper = ON Translucent Film = OFF -32 When this SP mode is canceled, the voltage will be continually displayed during the copy cycle and in standby mode (the toner sensor output voltage, paper length and copy counter are displayed one at a time). To stop this, turn the main switch off and on. Data 100 10 100 Shorter Longer 2.5% +2.5%

Registration Adjustment for the Rear Feed -29

0: Standard 9.9 0 9.9 mm Advance Delay

Toner Density Sensor Voltage Setting -30

80: Standard 50 80 120 Low High Service Tables A = X,XX (Beeper) A = X,XX A = Toner Sensor Voltage During the stand-by condition, and copy cycling the following data is displayed. A = X,XX LE = X,XXX CO = XX (Beeper) LE = Paper Length (ex. 297 mm: LE=0.297 12 inch: LE=0.120) CO = Copy counter B047/B048

-31

Toner Sensor Voltage Display (Last Copy) Toner Sensor Voltage Display (Real Time)

-33 to -34

Not Used

SM

4-17

SERVICE TOOLS
Mode No. Synchro-cut Length Auto Adjustment (297 mm) Function Adjusts the original cut length in Synchro Cut mode based on a 297 mm sheet (standard length). Insert the 297 mm length original five times (this number displayed on the copy number indicator can be changed : 1 to 10). If the actual original length is different from the standard length, input the following value in the cut length indicator before inserting the original: Actual Length - Standard Length Then the machine automatically calculates the correct value, and the value of SP#-38 is changed. Adjusts the original cut length in Synchro Cut mode at 1,189 mm. Insert the 1,189 mm length original five times (this number displayed on the copy number indicator can be changed: 1 to 10). If the actual original length is different from the standard length, input the following value in the cut length indicator before inserting the original: Actual Length - Standard Length Then the machine automatically calculates the correction value. The data is overwritten on SP#-39. -37 Not Used Synchro-cut Length Manual Adjustment (297 mm) Adjusts the synchro cut length for a 297 mm original. Increasing the number will shorten the paper cut length. Adjusts the synchro cut length for a 1,189 mm original. Increasing the number will shorten the paper cut length. 9.9 0 9.9 1 step = 0.1 mm (This value is over written when SP#-35 is performed.) 50.0 0 50 1 step = 0.1 mm (This value is over written when SP#-36 is performed.) Data 9.9 0 9.9 1 step = 0.1 mm

-35

Synchro-cut Length Auto Adjustment (1,189 mm)

50 0 50 1 step = 0.1 mm

-36

-38

-39

Synchro-cut Length Manual Adjustment (1,189 mm)

-40 to -44 -45

Not Used Roll Feeder Registration Forced Ready Condition (Factory Use) Lamp Off Mode Adjusts the paper registration from the roll feederS. When SP#-5 (Registration Adjustment) is carried out, this data will be automatically set with that data. Forces the machine into the Ready condition regardless of the fusing temperature. This mode cannot be used during the start-up development agitation. Fluorescent lamp does not turn on during the copy cycle.

0: Standard 9.9 0 9.9 Delay Advance 0: Normal 1: Forced Ready Condition

-50

-51

0: Normal 1: Lamp off

B047/B048

4-18

SM

SERVICE TOOLS
Mode No. No Misfeed Detection Mode Free Run Mode Function Ignores jam error signals, except for initial jams. The setting automatically resets to 0 when the main switch is turned off. The machine caries out copy operation without an original. This mode can be used if the optional roll feeder is installed and selected paper length is more than 594 mm. The machine starts operation when the roll feed select key is pressed, and stops when the Emergency Stop key is pressed. Data 0: Normal 1: No Misfeed Detection

-52

-53

0: Normal 1: Next Paper is fed when the fusing exit sensor is deactivated. 2 ~ 250: Next paper is fed (X1) seconds after the fusing exit sensor is deactivated. X = Input Number 0: Normal 1: Forced recovery

-54

Not Used Toner End Recovery

-55

Used Toner Full Condition Detection -56 Roll Feed Speed Correction (Plain Paper) Roll Feed Speed Correction (Translucent Paper)

Sets the process for toner end recovery. When set to the default value, the toner density is checked as described in the Toner Density Control section 2.4.2. Forced recovery skips this testing procedure, and just clears the toner end condition. When the toner overflow counter is used, this sets the maximum copy length. Once the counter reaches this value, the used toner full condition is triggered. Not used. Do not change this setting The fusing sections transport speed is slightly faster than the roll feeders. This is done to stretch the copy paper. However, due to over-stretching, creases may develop along the trailing edge when the copy paper is longer than 1,200 mm. To prevent this, the roll feeders speed is increased slightly every second once the paper feed length exceeds 1,200 mm. The speed is changed 5 times. 5 in this SP can be used to set the final roll feed speed equal to the fusing sections. Do not change this value in the field. It is for designer use only. Not used. Do not change this setting. Tracks the amount of time that the exposure sensor is more than 1 V higher than the target value.

-57

0: Toner overflow sensor 1: 840 m 2: 480 m 3: 1,180 m 0 5 10 Slower Faster 0 5 10 Slower Faster

-58

-59

-60

Roll Feed Speed Correction (Film) Fluorescent Lamp Abnormal Time Check 1

0 5 10 Slower Faster 0 ~ 250: The total time (seconds) that the lamp voltage is more than 1 volt higher than the target value.

SM

4-19

B047/B048

Service Tables

SERVICE TOOLS
Mode No. Fluorescent Lamp Abnormal Time Check 2 Light Sensor Voltage Display (Factory use) Function Tracks the amount of time that the fluorescent lamp is at full power during the copy cycle. Displays the real time light sensor output voltage. In this mode, the PTL, main motor, QL and the bias voltage for non-image areas can be turned on and off using the Copy Media key. Translucent paper = ON Translucent Film = OFF Even if the SP mode is canceled, the voltage is displayed while copying and when in standby mode. To stop this, turn the main switch off and on. -63 -64 -65 Factory Use Only Manual Feed Attention Mode 1 Manual Feed Attention Mode 2 Partial copy Leading Edge Margin Beeper sounds if a sheet is set on the manual feed table before the Set Paper indicator comes on. Beeper sounds when the manual table is ready to accept the next sheet. Allows the user to set a larger or smaller leading edge margin in partial copy mode. B047 can only increase the margin, while B048 can both increase and decrease it. In the Special Toner Supply mode (SP62), if both the clear/stop key and the Emergency Stop key are pressed, toner is supplied at 100%. Normally the copy process stops at the trailing edge of paper or original which ever comes first. If this mode is selected, copy process continues to the copys trailing edge even if the original trailing edge comes first. Use this mode to combine several originals onto a single copy. Normally, an original cannot be inserted into the rear feeder while in Synchro-cut mode. If 1 is selected, an original can be inserted from the rear side even if Synchro-cut mode is used. This cannot be used with the trailing edge margin function. In this mode, the copy will be about 200 mm longer than the original (B048 copier only). 0: No 1: Manual Feed Attention Mode 1 0: No 1: Manual Feed Attention Mode 2 0: No 1: A new margin can be set in the partial copy mode Data 0 ~ 250: The total time (seconds) that the fluorescent lamp is at full power. Fd = X,XX Fd = Light Sensor Voltage

-61

-62

-66

-67

Toner Full Supply Mode Combine Originals Mode

0: No 1: Toner Full Supply Mode 0: Normal 1: Combine Originals Mode

-68

-69

Not Used Synchro-cut Rear Feed Mode

0: Normal 1: Synchro-cut Rear Feed Mode

-70

B047/B048

4-20

SM

SERVICE TOOLS
Mode No. Cut Length Display Mode Function In semi-synchro cut mode, the machine stores the 1st original cut length and displays it in the paper length counter. The paper cut mode will automatically be changed to the Preset/Variable cut mode. For the 2nd copy, it is not necessary to press the cut key at the trailing edge of the original. Also, before the 2nd original is inserted, the cut length in the cut length counter can be changed using the +/ keys. The value can be changed within the normal range of the semi-synchro cut (410 mm ~ 3,000, 16.5' ~ 118.0') (B047 copier only). Selects the speed of the original feed motor in returning original mode. A slower speeds may be necessary for thinner originals (B048 copier only). Determines the timing of the roll feeder. The default value begins the roll feeder just after the original registration sensor is activated. It can also be set to start after the trailing edge passes the original entrance sensor. The default value provides a faster first copy and increases 1 to 1 CPM. If the emergency stop key is pressed while the original is being transported to the scanning start position, copy paper is cut and fed out of the copier. Whichever setting is selected, the first copy and 1 to 1 CPM are within specification. Select whether the original is transported from the original table to the scanning start position directly, or whether the original is returned to the scanning start position after the trailing edge of the original passes through the original registration sensor (B048 copier only). The default setting (= 0) handles curled originals better. If the setting is changed from 0 to 1, perform the synchro-cut length auto adjustment (SP#-35, #-36). Data 0: Non-Length Display 1: Length Display

-71

-72

Original Feed Motor Returning Speed Setting Roll Feeder Start Timing

0: 200 mm/s 1: 150 mm/s 2: 100 mm/s 0: Trailing edge is detected. 1: Original insertion

-73

Original Transport Mode

-74

0: Original is transported directly to the start position. 1: Original is returned to the start position after the original passes through the original registration sensor.

SM

4-21

B047/B048

Service Tables

SERVICE TOOLS
Mode No. Fusing Temperature Recovery Setting Function Determines how the machine recovers when the fusing temperature drops below the target value. This is only triggered when making multiple copies using fusing mode 8 (highest temperature mode) (B048 copier only). Data 0: No recovery (The machine simply continues copying, ignoring the fusing temperature.) 1: Stops copying and feeds out the original. 2: Stops copying but the original is not fed out. Copying starts again after the fusing temperature recovers. 0: No 1: Down during transport forward 2: Down during transport both forward and backwards

-75

Original Transport Torque Down -76

Sets the operation of the original transport torque.

B047/B048

4-22

SM

SERVICE TOOLS

4.3.2 INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK MODE

Input Check Mode Table
The on/off status of the selected electrical component is displayed in the paper length indicator (ON or OFF is displayed). If the selected program number is not used, NOT is displayed.
Program No. -1 -2 -3 -4 -5 -6 -7 -8 -9 -10 -11 -12 -13 -14 -15 -16 -17 -20 -21 -24 -26 Sensor/Switch/Signal Registration Sensor Exit Sensor Original Registration Sensor Entrance Sensor Main Motor LOC Signal (Status is ON when the main motor is rotating normally.) Door Switch (Status is ON when the door is open.) Original Entrance Sensor (B048 copier only) Original Rear Sensor (B048 copier only) Not Used R/F Leading Edge Sensor Roll Feeder Door Switch Right Cutter Switch Left Cutter Switch Paper End Sensor (1st Roll) Paper End Sensor (2nd Roll) Exit Cover Open (Status is ON when the door is open.) Used Toner Cover Switch Toner Overflow Sensor Toner Overflow Sensor Connection Total Counter Fusing SC Detection

Output Check Mode Table

Press the " key to turn on the selected electrical component. The status of the component is displayed in the paper length indicator. To turn off the component, press the " key again.
Program No. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
SM

Electrical Component Main Motor Toner Supply Clutch Pick off solenoid Registration Clutch Total Counter Pre-transfer Lamp Quenching Lamp Fusing Lamp
4-23

Note

B047/B048

Service Tables

SERVICE TOOLS Program No. 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 to 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 Electrical Component Exposure Lamp (100% duty ratio) Exposure Lamp (selected ID level) Main Charge Corona Grid Voltage Transfer Charge Corona Not Used Separation Charge Corona Exhaust Fan Not Used Bias Voltage for the Image Area Bias Voltage for the Non-image Area Main Charge Corona + Grid Voltage Main Motor + PTL + Bias Voltage for the Non-image Area + Quenching Lamp Original Feed Motor (Forward) (B048 copier only) Original Feed Motor (Reverse) (B048 copier only) Roll Feeder Dehumidity Heaters Roll Feeder Cutter Motor *Note Roll Feeder Paper Feed Motor (Forward) Roll Feeder Paper Feed Motor (Reverse) Roll Feed Clutch 1 Roll Feed Clutch 2 Fusing SC Release Original Feed Motor (Forward and Reverse) (B048 copier only) Note

33

34

Main Switch OFF (Energy Star)

Original feed motor operation changes every time the roll feed key is pressed. 1st time: Forward 2nd time: Stop 3rd time: Reverse 4th time: Stop Turn off the main switch.

NOTE: The cutter unit continuously moves between the left and right cutter switches. The number of the movements (0 ~ 9999) is displayed in the paper length indicator. When the roll feeder is pulled out during this operation, the operation will stop.

B047/B048

4-24

SM

JAM CODE LIST Code dJ45 pJ51 pJ52 pJ53 pJ55 pJ60 pJ61 pJ62 pJ63 pJ70 pJ71 pJ72 rJ80 rJ81 rJ90 rJ91 rJ95 rJ98 rJ99 Cause of Jam Original registration sensor does not turn off after paper is fed 3,500 mm. Registration sensor OFF is detected just after starting the copy process. Registration sensor OFF is detected before starting the roll feeder again. Entrance sensor ON is detected during roll feeding. Registration sensor does not turn off after paper is fed 3,500 mm. Registration sensor OFF is detected at the paper leading edge. Registration sensor ON is detected at the paper leading edge. Registration sensor OFF is detected at the paper trailing edge. Registration sensor ON is detected at the paper trailing edge. Exit sensor OFF is detected at the paper leading edge. Exit sensor ON is detected at the paper leading edge. Exit sensor OFF is detected at the paper trailing edge. Leading edge sensor OFF is detected at the paper leading edge. Leading edge sensor ON is detected at the paper leading edge. Paper cutter failure Door open during roll feeding Roll feeder. Motor does not turn off after paper is fed 600 mm more than the maximum paper length. Leading edge sensor ON is detected at the paper trailing edge during roll feeding. Leading edge sensor OFF is detected at the paper trailing edge during roll feeding. Remarks

B047 only

B047/B048

4-26

SM

JAM CODE LIST

Fixed Paper Size Pattern Data (SP No. 22)

In mm Mode 0: 1189, 841, 594, 420, 297 1: 3000, 2000, 1189, 841, 594, 420, 297, 280 2: 3000, 2400, 2000, 1900, 1800, 1700, 1600, 1500, 1400, 1300, 1200, 1100, 1000, 900, 800, 700, 600, 500, 400, 300, 280 3: 3000, 2400, 2000, 1900, 1800, 1700, 1600, 1500, 1400, 1300, 1200, 1189, 841, 594, 420, 297, 280 4: 3000, 2400, 2000, 1800, 1456, 1189, 1030, 841, 728, 594, 515, 420, 364, 297, 280 5: 3000, 2500, 2000, 1500, 1230, 880, 625, 450, 330, 280 6: 1456, 1030, 728, 515, 364 7: 3000, 2000, 1456, 1030, 728 515, 364, 280 8: 3000, 2500, 2000, 1500, 1189, 1100, 841, 594, 420, 300, 297, 280 9: 3000, 2400, 2000, 1456, 1200, 1189, 1091, 1085, 1030, 1016, 1000, 939, 900, 880, 841, 813, 788, 765, 762, 758, 728, 679, 636, 625, 594, 591,546, 515, 508, 420,364, 297, 280 10: 3000, 2400, 2000, 1800, 1600, 1400, 1200, 1000, 800, 600, 400, 280 11: 3000, 2400, 2000, 1750, 1500, 1250, 1000, 750, 500, 280 12: 3000, 2400, 2000, 1950, 1900, 1850, 1800, 1750, 1700, 1650, 1600, 1550, 1500, 1450, 1400, 1350, 1300, 1250, 1200, 1150, 1100, 1050, 1000, 950, 900, 850, 800, 750, 700, 650, 600, 550, 500, 450, 400, 350, 300, 280 13: 3000, 2400, 2000, 1800, 1500, 1189, 1100, 1050, 1000, 950, 900, 841, 800, 750, 700, 650, 594, 550, 500, 420, 297, 280 14: 3000, 2400, 1800, 1456, 1200, 1189, 1085, 1030, 900, 880, 841, 765, 728, 625, 594, 515, 420, 364, 297, 280 15: 3000, 2400, 2000, 1800, 1500, 1200, 1189, 594, 280 16: 3000, 2400, 2000, 1800, 1500, 1200, 1000, 841, 420, 280 17: 3000, 2400, 2000, 1800, 1500, 1220, 1189, 915, 841, 610, 594, 458, 420, 305, 297, 280 18: 3000, 2400, 2000, 1800, 1500, 1189, 1118, 864, 841, 594, 559, 432, 420, 297, 280 19: The data stored in SP23 to 32 In inch Mode 0: 48.0, 42.0, 36.0, 24.0, 18.0, 12.0 1: 44.0, 42.0, 34.0, 22.0, 17.0, 11.0 2: 118.0, 96.0, 80.0, 72.0, 64.0, 48.0, 42.0, 36.0, 24.0, 18.0, 12.0, 11.0 3: 118.0, 96.0, 80.0, 72.0, 64.0, 44.0, 42.0, 34.0, 22.0, 17.0, 11.0 4: 118.0, 96.0, 80.0, 72.0, 64.0, 48.0, 44.0, 36.0, 34.0, 24.0, 22.0, 18.0, 17.0, 12.0, 11.0 5: 118.0, 96.0, 80.0, 70.0, 60.0, 50.0, 40.0, 30.0, 20.0, 11.0, 10.0 6: 118.0, 96.0, 80.0, 75.0, 70.0, 65.0, 60.0, 55.0, 50.0, 45.0, 40.0, 35.0, 30.0, 25.0, 20.0, 15.0, 11.0, 10.0 7: 118.0, 96.0, 80.0, 75.0, 70.0, 65.0, 60.0, 55.0, 50.0, 48.0, 42.0, 36.0, 24.0, 18.0, 12.0, 11.0 8: 118.0, 96.0, 80.0, 75.0, 70.0, 65.0, 60.0, 55.0, 50.0, 44.0, 42.0, 34.0, 22.0, 17.0, 11.0 9: 118.0, 96.0, 80.0, 75.0, 70.0, 65.0, 60.0, 55.0, 50.0, 48.0, 44.0, 42.0, 36.0, 34.0, 24.0, 22.0, 18.0, 17.0, 12.0, 11.0

SM

4-27

B047/B048

Service Tables

JAM CODE LIST 10: 118.0, 96.0, 80.0, 77.5, 75.0, 72.5, 70.0, 67.5, 65.0, 62.5, 60.0, 57.5, 55.0, 52.5, 50.0, 47.5, 45.0, 42.5, 40.0, 37.5, 35.0, 32.5, 30.0, 27.5, 25.0, 22.5, 20.0, 17.5, 15.0, 12.5, 11.0, 10.0 11: 118.0, 96.0, 80.0, 77.5, 75.0, 72.5, 70.0, 67.5, 65.0, 62.5, 60.0, 57.5, 55.0, 52.5, 50.0, 48.0, 42.0, 36.0, 34.0, 24.0, 22.0, 18.0, 17.0, 12.0, 11.0 12: 118.0, 96.0, 80.0, 77.5, 75.0, 72.5, 70.0, 67.5, 65.0, 62.5, 60.0, 57.5, 55.0, 52.5, 50.0, 48.0, 42.0, 36.0, 24.0, 18.0, 12.0, 11.0 13: 118.0, 96.0, 80.0, 77.5, 75.0, 72.5, 70.0, 67.5, 65.0, 62.5, 60.0, 57.5, 55.0, 52.5, 50.0, 44.0, 42.0, 34.0, 22.0, 17.0, 11.0 14: 118.0, 96.0, 80.0, 78.0, 76.0, 74.0, 72.0, 70.0, 68.0, 66.0, 64.0, 62.0, 60.0, 58.0, 56.0, 54.0, 52.0, 50.0, 48.0, 46.0, 44.0, 42.0, 40.0, 38.0, 36.0, 34.0, 32.0, 30.0, 28.0, 26.0, 24.0, 22.0, 20.0, 18.0, 16.0, 14.0, 12.0, 11.0, 10.0 15: 118.0, 96.0, 80.0, 72.0, 60.0, 48.0, 36.0, 24.0, 12.0 11.0 16: 118.0, 96.0, 80.0, 78.0, 72.0, 66.0, 60.0, 50.0, 54.0, 48.0, 42.0, 36.0, 30.0, 24.0, 18.0, 12.0 11.0 17: 118.0, 96.0, 80.0, 78.0, 75.0, 72.0, 69.0, 66.0, 63.0, 60.0, 57.0, 54.0, 51.0, 48.0, 45.0, 42.0, 39.0, 36.0, 33.0, 30.0, 27.0, 24.0, 21.0, 18.0, 15.0, 12.0 11.0 18: 118.0, 96.0, 80.0, 72.0, 64.0, 57.3, 48.0, 46.8, 42.0, 40.6, 36.0, 34.0, 33.1, 28.7, 24.0, 23.4, 22.0, 20.3, 18.0, 17.0, 16.6, 14.4, 12.0, 11.7, 11.0, 10.1 19: The data stored in SP23 to 32

Default Settings for Each Destination (SP#-1)

SP. No. #1 #2 #3 #4 #5 #6 #7 #8 #9 #10 #13 #14 #15 #17 #19 #20 #21 #22 #33 #-2 #-3 #-6 Japan 1 0 1 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 30 0.0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 50 U.S.A. 2 0 1 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 30 0.0 0.0 1 0 0 1 6 1 50 Europe 2 0 1 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 30 0.0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 50 Asia 2 0 1 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 30 0.0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 50 NRG 2 0 1 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 30 0.0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 50 Other 1 Other 2 Other 3 Other 4 2 2 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 2 2 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 30 30 30 0.0 0.0 0.0 0 0.0 0.0 0 1 0 0 0 5 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 6 1 0 1 0 50 50 50

#13, #14, #17: B048 only

B047/B048

4-28

SM

SERVICE REMARKS

4.6 SERVICE REMARKS

4.6.12 AC DRIVE BOARD

Noise Filter

AC Drive Board TB202 TB201

B047S500 WMF

Service Remark for 220 240 V Version

Make sure that the harnesses are connected to the noise filter and ac drive board as shown. 1. Set the power supply cord hot line (brown wire) connector to terminal 1 on the noise filter. 2. Set the power supply cord neutral line (blue wire) connector to terminal 2 on the noise filter. 3. Set the noise filter harness hot line (black wire) yellow connector to terminal 3 on the noise filter. 4. Set the noise filter harness neutral line (white wire) white connector to terminal 4 on the noise filter 5. Set the noise filter harness hot line (black wire) yellow connector to TB201 on ac drive board. 6. Set the noise filter harness neutral line (white wire) white connector to TB202 on ac drive board.

SM

4-29

B047/B048

Service Tables

SERVICE REMARKS

AC Drive Board

TB202

TB201
B047S501.WMF

Service Remarks for 120 V Version

Make sure that the harness is connected to the ac drive board as shown correctly 1. Set the power supply cord harness hot line (black wire) white connector to TB201 on ac drive board. 2. Set the power supply cord harness neutral line (white wire) white connector to TB202 on ac drive board.

B047/B048

4-30

SM

REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

DRUM UNIT

5. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

5.4 DRUM UNIT
5.4.2 DRUM REPLACEMENT
[E] [C] [F] [D] [B] [H]

[G]

[B] [A]
B047R539.WMF

1. Remove the drum unit. 2. Remove the pulley [A] (1 C-ring). 3. Remove the 2 bearing holders [B] (2 screws each). NOTE: Be careful not to scratch the drum with the pick-off pawls when removing or reinstalling the drum. 4. Remove the drum [C] with the drum shaft. 5. Loosen the drum knob [D] by turning it clockwise as shown. 6. Remove the drum flange [E]. 7. Replace the drum with new one. NOTE: 1) When reinstalling the gear [F], make sure that the direction of the projection of the gear is on the drum side. 2) When re-installing the bearing holders, make sure that the right bearing holder [G] has two mylar seals [H] attached. The mylar seals determine the position between the drum unit and copier side plate. This also helps to ensure an even image density on the copy.

SM

5-1

B047/B048

Replacement and Adjustment

FUSING

5.5 FUSING
[B]

[A]
B047R101.WMF

5.5.7 HOT ROLLER THERMISTOR REPLACEMENT

1. Remove the fusing unit. 2. Remove the hot roller thermistor [A] (1 screw, clamps).

5.1.8 FUSING THERMOFUSE REPLACEMENT

1. Remove the fusing unit. 2. Remove the fusing thermofuse [B] (2 screws, 6 clamps, and 2 connectors).

B047/B048

5-2

SM

FUSING

5.1.9 FUSING TEMPERATURE ADJUSTMENT

[A] [B]
B047R538.WMF

!CAUTION
When the main switch is turned on, the machine will suddenly start to drive the fusing section. However, this does not occur immediately. The machine waits until the hot roller is heated to above 80C. Keep your hands away from any mechanical and electrical components during this period. This procedure is required only when the hot roller thermistor is replaced. Adjustment standard: Mode 1 (165C), Mode 2 (170C), Mode 3 (175C), Mode 4 (180C), Mode 5 (190C), Mode 6 (193C), Mode 7 (198C) 1. Turn off the main switch. 2. Remove the copier rear cover. 3. Remove the pressure roller thermistor screw and hang the thermistor by the harness. 4. Actuate the fusing exit safety switch [A]. 5. Turn on the main switch, select the normal fusing temperature mode, and wait for at least 10 minutes. 6. Using a digital thermometer and probe [B], measure the temperature at the middle of the hot roller. 7. If the actual temperature is different from the value for the mode being used (use SP#1 to find out the current mode), adjust the temperature using SP#-7. 8. Repeat steps 5 to 7 and confirm the temperature. 9. Reassemble the machine.

SM

5-3

B047/B048

Replacement and Adjustment

COPY QUALITY ADJUSTMENT

5.8 COPY QUALITY ADJUSTMENT

5.8.4 REGISTRATION ADJUSTMENT
When: Purpose: Registration Tolerance: Perform: How: Registration is not within the registration tolerance. To maintain proper registration. 03 mm (00.12") SP#-5 (by-pass feed), SP#-29 (B048 rear original feed), SP#-45 (roll feed) Change the start timing of the registration roller using SP#-5, SP#-27, and/or SP#-45

1. Make several copies using manual feed or the roll feeder and check the registration. 2. If the registration is not within the registration tolerance, adjust the registration using SP#-5, SP#-29 and/or SP#-45. NOTE: When SP#-5 is changed, the data in SP#-45 will be automatically set to the same value. To adjust SP#-45 separately, you must change it after adjusting SP#-5.

B047/B048

5-4

SM

TROUBLESHOOTING

SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS

6. TROUBLESHOOTING
6.2 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS
When a service call condition occurs, the Call Service indicator ! and SC codes are displayed. SC Codes E2, E3, E4, E5, E6, E7, E8, E15, E17 and E18 cannot be cleared by simply turning the main switch off and on. For safety reasons, you must set SP38 from 1 to 0 to clear these.

6.1.1 SC CODE DESCRIPTIONS

SC Code E-1: Exposure Lamp Abnormal
Definition The light sensor voltage is less than 0.4 volts for 10 seconds. Points to Check Exposure lamp Light sensor FL regulator (CN402-1,2,4, and 5, CN401-1, -2, -3) Main board (CN103-7, and CN105-A13, -A14, -B17, -B18)

SC Code E-2: Fusing Thermofuse Open

Definition After turning on the machine, the temperature detected by the hot roller thermistor does not reach 100C within 4 minutes and 30 seconds. Points to Check Fusing thermofuse Hot roller thermistor AC drive board Main board (CN102-A3, -B11, -B13, -B14)

SC Code E-3: Hot Roller Thermistor Open

Definition After turning on the machine, the temperature detected by the hot roller thermistor does not reach 50C within 3 minutes. Points to Check Hot roller thermistor AC drive board Fusing thermofuse Main board (CN102-A5, -B11, -B13, -B14)

SM

6-1

B047/B048

Troubleshooting

SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS

11 May, 2001

SC Code E-4: Hot Roller Thermistor Short

Definition The resistance of the hot roller thermistor is less than 0.11 K. Points to Check Hot roller thermistor Main board (CN102-A5, -B11, -B13, -B14)

SC Code E-5: Pressure Roller Thermistor Open

Definition The resistance of the pressure roller thermistor is more than 0.53 M. Points to Check Pressure roller thermistor Main board (CN102-A4, -B12, -B13, -B14)

SC Code E-6: Pressure Roller Thermistor Short

Definition The resistance of the pressure roller thermistor is less than 0.55 K. Points to check Pressure roller thermistor Main board (CN102-A4, -B12, -B13, -B14)

SC Code E-7: Fusing Overheat

Definition The temperature detected by the hot roller thermistor exceeds 250C. Points to Check Hot roller thermistor Fusing thermofuse AC drive board Main board (CN102-A1, -B13, -B14)

B047/B048

6-2

SM

SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS

SC Code E-8: Fusing Warm-up Error

Definition After turning on the machine, the temperature detected by the hot roller thermistor does not reach the target ready temperature within 12 minutes. Points to Check Hot roller thermistor Fusing lamp Fusing thermofuse AC drive board Main board (CN102-A3, -A5, -B11, -B13, -B14) AC harness

SC Code E-9: Toner Density Sensor Abnormal

Definition The toner density sensor voltage is less than 0.5 volts or more than 4.5 volts. NOTE: After initializing the developer, this condition cannot be triggered until at least 251 copies are made. Points to Check Toner density sensor Flow of the developer at the toner density sensor area Main board (CN105-A5, -A6, -B25, -B26)

SC Code E-10: Main Motor Abnormal

Definition The main motor is on, but the main board does not receive a signal from the motor for two seconds. Points to Check Main motor Mechanical interference of the main motor drive Main board (CN103-1, -2)

SC Code E-11: Toner Density Sensor Adjustment Error

Definition The new developer initialization process cannot adjust the toner density sensor voltage to its standard range (4.1 0.1 volts). NOTE: After clearing the SP code, the previous data of SP#-30 will continue to be used until the next toner initialization. Points to Check Toner density sensor Developer Flow of the developer at the toner density sensor area Main board (CN105-A5, -A6, -B25, -B26)

SM

6-3

B047/B048

Troubleshooting

SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS

11 May, 2001

SC Code E-13: Total Counter Abnormal

Definition Total counter does not operate. Points to Check Main board AC Drive board

SC Code E-14: Zero Cross Signal Detection Abnormal

Definition The zero cross signal is not detected within 0.5 second of turning on the main switch. Point to Check Main board AC Drive board

SC Code E-15: Main Switch Abnormal

Definition After sending the reset signal, the main switch does not turn off within 0.45 second. Point to check Main switch Main board

SC Code E-17: Unstable Fusing Temperature

Definition While in the copy ready state, the machine detects 3 or more hot roller temperature changes within 60 seconds, or 2 or more within 2 seconds. The change must be greater than 20C in 1 second. Point to Check The thermistor is out of position

SC Code E-18: Fusing Lamp Continuous Light

Definition In the copy ready condition, the fusing lamp turns on at full power continuously for more than 120 seconds while the hot roller is not rotating. - Point to check Poor thermistor cable connection Poor fusing unit connection

B047/B048

6-4

SM

BLOWN FUSE TABLE

6.3 BLOWN FUSE TABLE

6.3.1 POWER SUPPLY UNIT
Europe Version
Fuse No. FU301 FU302 FU303 FU304 Specification 250 V 3.15 A 250 V 6.3 A 250 V 6.3 A 250 V 6.3 A Symptom No power. No indication. Beeper sounds. This symptom will occur when all of three fuses are open.

U.S.A. Version
Fuse No. FU301 FU302 FU303 FU304 Specification 125 V 6.3 A 250 V 5 A 250 V 5 A 250 V 5 A Symptom No power. No indication. Beeper sounds. This symptom will occur when all of three fuses are open.

AC Drive Board
Fuse No. FU201 FU202 CB201 Specification 125 V 15 A (U.S.A. version only) 250 1 A 250 V 8 A (Europe version only) Symptom No power. No power is supplied to the de-humidify heater. No power.

SM

6-5

B047/B048

Troubleshooting

ROLL FEED UNIT B435/B436

SPECIFICATIONS

1. OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION

1.1 SPECIFICATIONS
Roll Paper Size: Width: 210 mm to 914 mm, 81/2" to 36" Length: 150 meters Diameter: Less than 170 mm Preset Cut: 1189 mm, 841 mm, 594 mm, 420 mm, 297 mm 48", 36", 24", 18", 12" 46", 34", 22", 17", 11" Up to 10 extra preset cut lengths can be set using SP23 ~ 32. Selected Length Cut: 297 mm to 3,000 mm (1 mm per step) 11" to 118" (0.1" per step) 60 mm/s Microprocessor +24 volts and +5 volts from the copier Maximum 110 W 1,200 mm x 720 mm x 775 mm 47.24" x 28.35" x 30.51" 78 kg, 171.6 lbs (1 roll) 86 kg, 189.2 lbs (2 rolls)

Cut Size:

Paper Transport Velocity: Control: Power Source: Power Consumption: Dimensions (W x D x H): Weight:

SM

7-1

B435/B436

Roll Feed Unit B435/B436

ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS

1.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS

The index numbers refer to the electrical component layout on the reverse side of the Point to Point index (Water proof paper).
Name Motors Cutter Roll Feed Function Drives the cutter (DC Reversible Motor). Drives all mechanical components except the cutter unit (Dc Stepper Motor). Index No. 59 61

Magnetic Clutches Roll Feed 1 Roll Feed 2

Transmits the roll feed motor drive to the 1st roll feed roller. Transmits the roll feed motor drive to the 2nd roll feed roller.

56 60

Switches Right Cutter Left Cutter Dehumidity

Detects whether or not the cutter is at the right home position. Detects whether or not the cutter is at the left home position. Turns on the RF Dehumidity heaters when not copying.

54 57 62

Sensors Paper End 1 Paper End 2 Leading Edge Door

Detects when the roll runs out of paper. Detects when the roll runs out of paper. Misfeed detector. Also detects the leading edge of the paper, triggering the paper length pulse count. Indicates Door Open on the operation panel and disables the key operation.

51 50 55 58

Printed Circuit Board RF Drive

Controls all roll feed unit functions accordance with copier CPU.

49

Others RF Dehumidity Heater 1 RF Dehumidity Heater 2

Removes humidity from the roll paper. Removes humidity from the roll paper.

53 52

B435/B436

7-2

SM

MECHANICAL OPERATION

2. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS

2.1 MECHANICAL OPERATION
2.1.1 BASIC OPERATION
[D] [C] [B]

[A]

B436D501.WMF

[D]

B436D103.WMF

There are two types of the roll feed unit. B435 Roll feed unit has one roll feed unit (1st [A]). B436 Roll feed unit has two roll feed units (1st [A] and 2nd [B]). The cutter unit [C] uses a sliding rotary cutting blade. When turning on the main switch or when roll paper is replenished, the roll feed motor rotates and the leading edge of the roll paper is fed until the roll lead edge sensor [D] is activated. Then, the leading edge of the roll paper is returned to the paper feed start position (60 mm before the cutter unit).
SM 7-3 B435/B436

Roll Feed Unit B435/B436

MECHANICAL OPERATION

[B] [A]

B436D502.WMF

After the leading edge of the paper reaches the exit rollers [A], the paper is directed to the copier registration roller [B]. The registration roller stops rotating once the registration sensor detects the leading edge of the copy paper. The copy paper stops and waits for the original. Shortly after the original registration sensor is activated by the original, the registration roller and roll paper feed motor start to rotate. The copy paper starts to feed again. Just before the cut length of copy paper is fed, the speed of the roll paper feed motor is doubled. A paper buckle forms at the trailing edge of the copy paper. When the paper reaches the proper length, paper feed motor stops and the cutter unit cuts the paper. During the time that paper feed motor has stopped, the registration roller continues to feed the copy paper forward. The paper is cut during the time it takes for the paper buckle to be pulled taut. This allows for a neat cut. When the selected cut length is between 245 mm and 340 mm, the paper reaches the selected length before the registration roller starts to rotate again. In this case, after the registration roller stops, the roll paper feed motor continues to rotate and a paper buckle forms at the trailing edge of the paper. The registration roller brake ensures that the very stiff types of paper will not rotate the registration rollers as the excess paper is fed forwards. The paper is then cut. When the selected cut length is between 340 mm and 410 mm, the roll cutter unit cuts the paper after the second rotation of the roll paper feed roller. [RW1] The paper buckle forms after the first rotation of the roll paper feed motor, because the paper feed roller is still rotating after the registration roller has stopped. The registration roller brake ensures that the very stiff types of paper will not rotate the registration rollers when the paper buckles while it is stopped at these rollers.
B435/B436 7-4 SM

MECHANICAL OPERATION

2.1.2 ROLL EDITION DETECTION

[A]

B436D503.WMF

The roll paper end sensor [A] is located above each roll. When the roll paper runs out and the roll paper end sensor detects the black core of the roll, roll end is indicated on the operation panel. If the paper is not caught by the feed rollers, paper feed fails. In this case, roll end is indicated instead of a paper misfeed indication.

2.1.3 DRIVE MECHANISM

[D] [C] [F] [E]

[G] [B] [H]

B436D102.WMF

The roll feed exit roller [B] is driven by the roll feed motor [C] through timing belts [D] and gears [E]. The feed roller [F] of each roll feed unit is driven by the roll feed motor through the belt and each gear and each roll feed clutch [G]. Each feed roller can be driven manually by each knob [H].
SM 7-5 B435/B436

Roll Feed Unit B435/B436

MECHANICAL OPERATION

2.1.4 CUTTER OPERATION

[B] [A]

[C]

B436D104.WMF

The cutter unit uses a sliding rotary cutting blade [A] which is pulled past a fixed blade by a drive wire. The rotary cutting blade allows the cutter unit to cut paper in both directions. There are home position switches [B] at both ends of the cutter. The cutter motor turns off, stopping the cutting action, when the rotary cutting blade knob plate [C] turns off one of these switches.

B435/B436

7-6

SM

CUTTER UNIT REPLACEMENT

3. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

3.1 CUTTER UNIT REPLACEMENT
[C] [B]

[D]

[F] [A]
B436R102.WMF

[F]

[G]

[E]

B436R103.WMF

1. Remove the roll feed units front cover [A] (2 screws and 4 hooks) and left inner cover [B] (2 screws).
Roll Feed Unit B435/B436

2. Remove the left tray lock lever [C] (1 screw and 1 spring) and tray stopper [D] (2 shoulder screws and 1 spring). 3. Remove the two screws [E] and disconnect the three connectors [F]. NOTE: When removing and/or reinstalling the connectors, take care not to damage the harnesses. Make sure that you do not pinch the harnesses when reinserting the cutter unit. 4. Slide the cutter unit [G] out as shown.

SM

7-7

B435/B436

ROLL FEED LEADING EDGE SENSOR REPLACEMENT

3.2 ROLL FEED LEADING EDGE SENSOR REPLACEMENT

[B]

[C]

[A] [D]

B436R107.WMF

1. Pull out the roll feed unit. 2. Remove the sensor casing [A] (2 screws). 3. Replace the leading edge sensor [B] (1 screw and 1 connector). NOTE: When reinstalling the sensor casing, be sure to align the sensor casings pins [C] with the holes [D] in the sensor bracket.

B435/B436

7-8

SM

ROLL FEED UNIT REMOVAL

3.3 ROLL FEED UNIT REMOVAL

[B]

[B] [A]
B436R101.WMF

1. Pull out the roll feed unit [A]. 2. Remove the 4 screws [B] (right side 2 screws and left side 2 screws). 3. Lift the roll feed unit and place it gently onto the floor or other flat surface.

SM

7-9

B435/B436

Roll Feed Unit B435/B436

ROLL FEED CLUTCH REPLACEMENT

3.4 ROLL FEED CLUTCH REPLACEMENT

[A]

[D] [C] [E] [E]

[D]

[B] [K] [J] [F]

[I]

B436R104.WMF

[H] [G]
B436R105.WMF

1. Remove the roll feed unit. 2. Remove the left inner cover. 3. Remove the roll feed paper guide plate [A] (4 screws). 4. Remove the roller knob bracket [B] (1 screw). 5. Remove the snap ring [C] and two retaining rings [D] and two bushings [E]. 6. Disconnect the connector for the roll feed clutch harness [F] (2 clamps). 7. Remove the roll feed roller [G] and clutch [H] (1 retaining ring and 1 timing belt [I]). NOTE: 1) When reinstalling the clutch, make sure that the clutch pin [J] is set in the cutout [K] of the stopper. 2) After putting all the parts back, turn the roller knob and verify that the timing belt drives the roll feed roller.

B435/B436

7-10

SM

ROLL FEED MOTOR REPLACEMENT

3.5 ROLL FEED MOTOR REPLACEMENT

[A] [B]

1. Pull out the roll feed unit. 2. Remove the left inner cover. 3. Remove the four screws [A] securing the roll feed motor, then remove the roll feed motor [B] (1 connector).

SM

7-11

B435/B436

Roll Feed Unit B435/B436

ROLL END SENSOR REPLACEMENT

3.6 ROLL END SENSOR REPLACEMENT

[B] [A]

[D]

[C] 1. Remove the 2 screws [A] holding the clamps for the power supply cord. 2. Remove the roll feed rear cover [B] (6 screws). 3. Remove the roll end sensor bracket [C] (1 screw and 1 hook). 4. Replace the roll end sensor [D] (1 screw and 1 connector).

B435/B436

7-12

SM

CUT LENGTH ADJUSTMENT

3.7 CUT LENGTH ADJUSTMENT

The cut length adjustment should be done when the roll feeder is installed to correct cutting errors. The cut error correction data is determined in the factory without the copier installed. The cut length varies depending on the copier on which it is installed and/or paper type used. If required, adjust the cut length as follows: NOTE: The cut length should be measured 10 minutes or later after copying because the fusing unit dries the paper and reduces its length temporarily.

Preset Cut : Adjustment standards: 3 mm (for Length Shorter than 420 mm) 5 mm (for 420 to 1,189 mm) 11 mm (3,000 mm)
NOTE: 1) There are three settings of the cut length depending on the temperature mode. They are set in the factory to match a standard paper type. [Normal (SP#42, 45, 87), High (SP#43, 46, 88), Low (SP#44, 47, 89)]. 2) There are two settings of SP#42 to 47 when the 2 rolls feeder is installed. Adjust the 2nd roll cut length by the same manner of the 1st roll cut length adjustment. Repeat the same steps after 1st roll cut length adjustment. 1. Make 5 copy samples of A0 lengthwise (1189) and A3 sideways (297) in the preset cut mode. 2. Measure the difference of the length between the each copy sample and preset cut length (1189 and 297). Then, calculate the average difference. 3. Input the average value using SP modes #42 to 47 so that the cut length is within the adjustment standards. Example: 1) Current SP data #42....0 Copy sample length = 297 + 4 Set SP mode #42...4.0 2) Current SP data #42....0 Copy sample length = 297 4 Set SP mode #42...+4.0
Roll Feed Unit B435/B436

4. Make A0 lengthwise and A3 sideways copies using preset cut mode and check their length. 5. Repeat steps 2 to 4 if necessary. 6. Make 5 copy samples of 3,000 mm length. Make sure the average cut length is within the adjustment standards. 7. If it is not within the adjustment standards, change the values using SP modes #87 to 89.

SM

7-13

B435/B436

SIDE REGISTRATION ADJUSTMENT

3.8 SIDE REGISTRATION ADJUSTMENT

[A] [B] 1. Raise the lever [A] in the left roll holder [B]. 2. Adjust the roll paper side position. Lower the lever to fix the position.

B435/B436

7-14

SM

TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETINS

BULLETIN NUMBER: 740-001 APPLICABLE MODEL: FW740

05/12/95

SUBJECT: PARTS CATALOG UPDATES GENERAL:

The following Parts Updates are being issued for all FW740 Parts Catalogs. This information shoulde b incorporated into all existing FW740 Parts Catalog documentation.

UPDATE NO. 1 - SPRING HOOK - The old style Spring Hook (54199653) is no longer produced.
However, the two new style Spring Hooks (shown below) have been made available as replacement options.
Spring Hook - SS-22

Spring Hook - SS-21 OLD NEW

REFERENCE OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. 54199653 A1639504 A1639505 * DENOTES NEW ITEM DESCRIPTION Spring Hook Spring Hook - SS-22 Spring Hook - SS-21 QTY 1 1 1 PAGE 45 45 45 ITEM 6 6 10*

Operating Sheet

UPDATE NO. 2 - OPERATING SHEET - Please add the

Operating Sheet to your Parts Catalog as indicated below.

REFERENCE PART NUMBER A1631385 * DENOTES NEW ITEM DESCRIPTION Operating Sheet QTY 1 PAGE 7 ITEM 27*

TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN

CUSTOMER SERVICE GROUP

BULLETIN NUMBER:

FW740 - 002

10/11/95

APPLICABLE MODEL: FW740

COPY QUALITY

Note: This copy intended as master of original for reproduction of additional bulletins.

SUBJECT: GENERAL:

GROUNDING PLATE SPRING AND BUSHINGS

To ensure grounding of the Lower Entrance Guide, the Grounding Plate Spring has been replaced by the Grounding Wire as shown below. Also, the material of the Exit Unit Bushing has been changed. This information should be incorporated into all existing FW740 Parts Catalog documentation. 12. PAPER EXIT SECTION 1 13. PAPER EXIT SECTION 2 (A163)
The material of this bushing has been changed.

MECHANICAL ELECTRICAL

The material of this bushing has been changed.

PAPER PATH

Grounding Plate Spring

Grounding Wire

REFERENCE OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. A1634464 A1635640 08053385 50530447 DESCRIPTION Grounding Plate Spring Grounding Wire Bushing - 6mm Bushing - 6mm 2 2 1 31 103
PARTS

QTY

INT

PAGE

ITEM
FSM

29

UNITS AFFECTED:
All FW740 copiers manufactured after Serial Number A3844120069 will have the new style Grounding Wire and Exit Unit Bushings installed during production.

INTERCHANGEABILITY CHART:
0 1 3/S
OLD and NEW parts can be used in both OLD and NEW parts CAN NOT be used in OLD machines. 2 NEW machines. OLD parts can be used in OLD and NEW machines. NEW parts can be used in OLD and NEW machines. OLD parts CAN NOT be used in NEW machines. 3 OLD parts CAN NOT be used in NEW machines. NEW parts CAN NOT be used in OLD machines. Must be installed as a set on units manufactured prior to the S/N cut-in. On units manufactured after the S/N cut-in or previously modified, use the new part numbers individually. OTHER

TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN

CUSTOMER SERVICE GROUP

BULLETIN NUMBER:

FW740 - 003

12/22/95

APPLICABLE MODEL: FW740

COPY QUALITY

Note: This copy intended as master of original for reproduction of additional bulletins.

SUBJECT: FIELD SERVICE MANUAL - INSERT GENERAL:

The Field Service Manual page(s) listed below must be replaced with the page(s) supplied. Each bull etin package contains 2 sets of replacement pages.

MECHANICAL

PAGES:
The revised areas have been highlighted by an arrow 1-1 4-11 Additional Information Additional Information Developer Type Addition of SP Mode 15

ELECTRICAL PAPER PATH FSM PARTS OTHER

TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN

CUSTOMER SERVICE GROUP

BULLETIN NUMBER:

FW740 - 004

1/26/96
t

APPLICABLE MODEL: FW740

COPY QUALITY

SUBJECT: ENERGY STAR MODIFICATION (DETAILS) GENERAL:

To conserve energy, the copier automatically turns "OFF" 30 minutes after the last copy job has been completed. The details of the machine operation are as follows:

MECHANICAL

AUTO OFF MODE

To automatically turn "OFF" the copier, a new type of Main Switch with an incorporated coil is used. The connector layout is shown below.
Main Switch

ELECTRICAL

AC Harness Relay

PAPER PATH

Upper DC Harness

t
FSM

Lower DC Harness

SP MODE

New software (ROM A1635208) provides an additional SP Mode to adjust the Auto Off Timer. Replace page 4-11 of the Field Service Manual with the updated page provided with this package.

t
PARTS

Mode No. 15

Function Auto off time can be selected

Settings 1~ 120 minutes (1 minute per step) Default : 30 minutes

OTHER

The Auto Off time can also be selected by the customer. Refer to page 3 of this bulletin for the pr ocedure.

Continued...

Tech Service Bulletin No. FW740-004 Page 2 of 4

The Auto Off mode is prohibited during the following conditions:

* * * *

The roll feeder is operating A sheet of paper is set on the feed table A Jam or SC indicator is "ON" The Toner End indicator is "ON" or the Used Toner Bottle is full

NOTE: When you use a new style Main Board (modified for Energy Star) in a non-Energy Star machine, remove the ROM (A1635208) from the new Main Board and install ROM (A1639506) in its place. Also, when you replace the RAM Board, please clear all memory (SP1-21) and input the factory data referring to the Field Service Manual.

NOTE: For part numbers, refer to Tech Service Bulletin No. FW740-005

INSTRUCTION SHEET

An additional explanation sheet has been added to the operating instructions. Please make copies of the following two pages and add them to the operating instructions that were shipped with the copier.

Continued...

Tech Service Bulletin No. FW740-004 Page 3 of 4

Continued...

Tech Service Bulletin No. FW740-004 Page 4 of 4

TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN

CUSTOMER SERVICE GROUP

BULLETIN NUMBER:

FW740 - 005

1/26/96
t

APPLICABLE MODEL: FW740

COPY QUALITY

SUBJECT: PARTS CATALOG UPDATES GENERAL:

To meet Energy Star requirements, the following parts have been changed.
Main Switch Relay AC Harness Relay (new part)

MECHANICAL ELECTRICAL

Lower DC Harness Upper DC Harness

PAPER PATH

NOTE: For more information regarding Energy Star Office Equipment, refer to Publications Bulletin #PUB-066. REFERENCE OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. A1631095 12041545 A1631257 A1635600 A1635605 A1635608 A1635206 A1635200 A1631100 12042421 A1631256 A1635702 A1635704 A1635706 A1635208 A1635230 12081392 A1638637 * DENOTES NEW ITEM DESCRIPTION Right Latch Bracket Main SW Lower Right Front Cover - 115V AC Harness Lower DC Harness Upper DC Harness ROM (IC - AM27C010-120DC) Main Board Relay Operating Instructions - Energy Star QTY 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 01 01 INT 3/S 3/S 3/S 3/S 3/S 3/S 3/S 3/S PAGE 35 35 7 35 35 35 39 35 35 43 ITEM 23 118 15 3 5 4 1 7 119* 6*

t
FSM

s
PARTS OTHER

UNITS AFFECTED:
All FW740 copiers manufactured after Serial Number A3845070122 will have the parts listed above inst alled during production.

TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN

CUSTOMER SERVICE GROUP

BULLETIN NUMBER:

FW740 - 005 REISSUE 5

03/20/96
t

APPLICABLE MODEL: FW740

COPY QUALITY

SUBJECT: PARTS CATALOG UPDATES GENERAL:

To meet Energy Star requirements, the following parts have been changed.
Main Switch Relay AC Harness Relay (new part)

MECHANICAL ELECTRICAL

Lower DC Harness Upper DC Harness

PAPER PATH

NOTE: For more information regarding Energy Star Office Equipment, refer to Publications Bulletin #PUB-066. REFERENCE OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. A1631095 12041545 A1631257 A1635600 A1635605 A1635608 A1635206 A1635200 A1631100 12042421 A1631256 A1635702 A1635704 A1635706 A1635208 A1635230 12081392 A1638637 * DENOTES NEW ITEM DESCRIPTION Right Latch Bracket Main SW Lower Right Front Cover - 115V AC Harness Lower DC Harness Upper DC Harness ROM (IC - AM27C010-120DC) Main Board Relay Operating Instructions - Energy Star QTY 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 01 01 INT 3/S 3/S 3/S 3/S 3/S 3/S 3/S 3/S PAGE 35 35 7 35 35 35 39 35 35 43 ITEM 23 118 15 3 5 4 1 7 119* 6*

t
FSM

s
PARTS OTHER

5 UNITS AFFECTED:
All FW740 copiers manufactured after Serial NumberA3845070122 will have the parts listed above installed during production.

TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN

CUSTOMER SERVICE GROUP

BULLETIN NUMBER:

FW740 - 006

2/7/96

APPLICABLE MODEL: FW740

COPY QUALITY

Note: This copy intended as master of original for reproduction of additional bulletins.

SUBJECT: FIELD SERVICE MANUAL - INSERT GENERAL:

The Field Service Manual page(s) listed below must be replaced with the page(s) supplied. Each bull etin package contains 2 sets of replacement pages.

MECHANICAL

PAGES:
The revised areas have been highlighted by an arrow

ELECTRICAL

5-19

Updated Information

PAPER PATH FSM PARTS OTHER

TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN

CUSTOMER SERVICE GROUP

BULLETIN NUMBER:

FW740 - 007

02/21/96

APPLICABLE MODEL: FW740

COPY QUALITY

Note: This copy intended as master of original for reproduction of additional bulletins.

SUBJECT: PARTS CATALOG UPDATES GENERAL:

The following Parts Updates are being issued for all FW740 Parts Catalogs. This information should be incorporated into all existing Parts Catalog documentation.

MECHANICAL

UPDATE NO. 1 -

T & S CORONA CASING - To meet CE Mark Standards, the following parts have been changed.
ELECTRICAL

REFERENCE OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. AD023113 A1635450 A1632254 A1635440 A1633867 A1634120 A1635636 A1635200 A1633130 A1635455 A1632257 A1635439 A1633869 A1634121 A1635637 A1635230 DESCRIPTION T & S Corona Casing Quenching Lamp Grounding Spring Plate Pre - Transfer Lamp - 24V 7.2W T & S Corona Guide Plate Fusing Lower Stay Separation Power Pack Harness Main Control Board QTY 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 INT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PAGE 25 23 37 15 17 27 35 35 40 ITEM 9 38

PAPER PATH

26 1 9 28 14

FSM

7 *

UNITS AFFECTED:
All FW740 copiers manufactured after Serial Number A3845070122 will have the new style T & S Corona Casing, etc... installed during production.
PARTS

INTERCHANGEABILITY CHART:
0 1 3/S
OLD and NEW parts can be used in both OLD and NEW parts CAN NOT be used in OLD machines. 2 NEW machines. OLD parts can be used in OLD and NEW machines. NEW parts can be used in OLD and NEW machines. OLD parts CAN NOT be used in NEW machines. 3 OLD parts CAN NOT be used in NEW machines. NEW parts CAN NOT be used in OLD machines. Must be installed as a set on units manufactured prior to the S/N cut-in. On units manufactured aft er the S/N cut-in or previously modified, use the new part numbers individually. OTHER

Continued...

Tech Service Bulletin No. FW740 - 007 Page 2 of 2

UPDATE NO. 2 -

PARTS CATALOG CORRECTION - Add Spacer (A1634355) to your Parts Catalog as indicated below.

Fusing Entrance Guide Plate

20 mm

25 mm

Spacer - Fusing Entrance

REFERENCE PART NUMBER A163 4355 DESCRIPTION Spacer - Fusing Entrance QTY 01 PAGE 27 ITEM 39

TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN

CUSTOMER SERVICE GROUP

BULLETIN NUMBER:

FW740 - 008

03/20/96

APPLICABLE MODEL: FW740

COPY QUALITY

Note: This copy intended as master of original for reproduction of additional bulletins.

SUBJECT: ORIGINAL STOPPERS GENERAL:

Rubber tubes have been added on the both right and left original stoppers to ensure that the origina l stoppers are being held in position. This information should be incorporated into all existing FW74Parts 0 Catalog documentation.

MECHANICAL

Left Original Stopper

ELECTRICAL

Rubber Tubes

Right Original Stopper PAPER PATH FSM

REFERENCE PART NUMBER AA161118 * DENOTES NEW ITEM DESCRIPTION Tube - 3 x 4.5 x 3 QTY 02 PAGE 7 ITEM 28*

PARTS

UNITS AFFECTED:
Not available at time of publication.

OTHER

TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN

CUSTOMER SERVICE GROUP

BULLETIN NUMBER:

FW740 - 009

09/27/96

APPLICABLE MODEL: FW740

COPY QUALITY

Note: This copy intended as master of original for reproduction of additional bulletins.

SUBJECT: GENERAL:

PARTS CATALOG ADDITIONS

The following Parts Catalog additions are being issued for all FW740 Parts Catalogs. This informatioshould n be incorporated into all existing Parts Catalog documentation.
MECHANICAL

Page 14
Philips Pan Head Screw

Photointeruptor

ELECTRICAL PAPER PATH FSM PARTS

REFERENCE NEW PART NO. AW020012 DESCRIPTION Photointeruptor QTY 1 1 PAGE 15 15 ITEM 13* 130*

03130100B Philips Pan Head Screw - M3 X 10 * DENOTES NEW ITEM

OTHER

TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN

CUSTOMER SERVICE GROUP

BULLETIN NUMBER:

FW740 - 010

09/27/96

APPLICABLE MODEL: FW740

COPY QUALITY

Note: This copy intended as master of original for reproduction of additional bulletins.

SUBJECT: GENERAL:

FUSING TEMPERATURE ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE

To achieve optimal copy quality, it may be necessary to adjust the fusing temperature based on the t of ype copy paper used and the specific environmental conditions in which the machine is located. The tabl es below demonstrate how to adjust the fusing temperature to compensate for these factors.

MECHANICAL

Environmental conditions:

L/L ------ 15C, 20%RH M/M ---- 23C, 65%RH H/H ----- 30C, 80%RH

ELECTRICAL

1. Plain Paper Paper T6200/T6000 Azon Bond Azon Recycled Regma 61gr Regma 75-80gr Bond M/M H/H L/L M/M H/H L/L M/M H/H L/L M/M H/H

Environ L/L Mode 8 Mode 7 Mode 6 Mode 5 Mode 4 Mode 3 O Mode 2 Mode 1

M/M H/H L/L

PAPER PATH

O O O

O O O O O

O O O

O O O
FSM

Paper Regma 90gr Regma 110gr Ozalid EF-Weiss Environ L/L M/M H/H L/L M/M H/H L/L M/M H/H Mode 8 Mode 7 O O O Mode 6 O O Mode 5 O Mode 4 Mode 3 O Mode 2 O Mode 1 O

PARTS OTHER

Continued...

Tech Service Bulletin No. FW740 - 010 Page 2 of 2

2. Vellum Paper TA-70 Azon Vellum Erazable Vellum Regma 91gr Environ L/L M/M H/H L/L M/M H/H L/L M/M H/H L/L M/M H/H Mode 8 O O O Mode 7 O Mode 6 O O O O O O Mode 5 O O Mode 4 Mode 3 Mode 2 Mode 1

3. Film Paper Azon Film 3mil Azon Film 4mil Regma Film 3mil Regma Film 4mil Hoechst Film 4mil M/M H/H L/L M/M H/H L/L M/M H/H L/L M/M H/H

Environ L/L Mode 8 Mode 7 Mode 6 Mode 5 Mode 4 Mode 3 O Mode 2 Mode 1

M/M H/H L/L

O O O

O O O O

FOR NON-LISTED PAPERS :

The following is the procedure to determine the best Fusing Temperature Setting for each type of pap er. The best setting is said to be the highest position before creasing begins to appear. 1. Set the Fusing Temperature Setting to the maximum mode for the type of paper, such as Plain Paper, Vellum, or Film using SP #1, SP #2 or SP #3. Plain Paper: Vellum: Film: Mode 7 (SP #1) Mode 8 (SP #2) Mode 5 (SP #3)

2. Make 3 white copies with the largest size of the paper available in the vertical grain direction. W hite copy is the worst case for creasing. 3. Check whether creasing appears on any of the copies. 4. If creasing appears, lower the Fusing Temperature Setting by 1 and repeat Steps # 2~4.

TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN

CUSTOMER SERVICE GROUP

BULLETIN NUMBER:

FW740 - 011

09/27/96

APPLICABLE MODEL: FW740

COPY QUALITY

Note: This copy intended as master of original for reproduction of additional bulletins.

SUBJECT: GENERAL:

PRESSURE ROLLER EVALUATION PROCEDURE

The following procedure is a method to determine whether the pressure roller should be replaced.
MECHANICAL

1. Access SP mode with the steps below. In order, press Clear Modes (C) key, Plus (+) key, Minus (-) key, Clear/Stop key, press and hold the Clear/Stop key again for longer than 3 seconds. 2. Select Lamp Off Mode with the steps below. a) Confirm that "Lead Margin" indicator lights. If "Lead Margin" indicator does not light, pressFunction Select key until it lights. b) Select "-51" by pressing Minus key. ("-51" is the number to select Lamp Off Mode.) c) Press Function Select key until "Paper Length" indicator lights. d) Select "1" by pressing Plus key. ("1" is the number to set Lamp Off Mode.) e) Press RF Select key to set Lamp Off Mode. 3. To prevent a paper misfeed, create a lead edge margin with the steps below. a) Press Function Select key until "Lead Margin" indicator lights. b) Continue to press Plus key until "99 mm" or "4.0 inches" (max. value) is indicated. 4. Make a copy using a less fusible kind of paper like film, translucent paper or thicker plain paper iw th vertical grain direction. Note: Before making a copy, set the fusing temperature setting to the mode which is one step lower than the proper setting for the particular kind of paper. For example, if the proper setting is Mode 3, select Mode 2 for this test. Refer to TSB No. FW740-010 for more information regarding the proper settings for particular types of paper and the adjustment procedure for non-listed papers.

ELECTRICAL PAPER PATH FSM

5. Scrape some black areas on the copy using a cotton cloth approximately 5 times. 6. Check whether the toner is peeled off on the areas that correspond with the scraped parts of the pressure roller. If white lines and/or bands appear, the pressure roller should be replaced with a new one. 7. Before turning the main switch "OFF" to reset the SP mode, reset "Lamp Off Mode", "Lead Margin" and "Fusing Temperature Setting" back to the original settings.

PARTS

FIELD SERVICE MANUAL - INSERT

The Field Service Manual page(s) listed below must be replaced with the page(s) supplied. Each bull etin package contains 1 set of replacement pages.

PAGES:
The revised areas have been highlighted by an arrow 4-38

OTHER

Additional Information

Pressure Roller Evaluation Procedure

TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN

CUSTOMER SERVICE GROUP

BULLETIN NUMBER:

FW740 - 012

10/15/96

APPLICABLE MODEL: FW740

COPY QUALITY

Note: This copy intended as master of original for reproduction of additional bulletins.

SUBJECT: GENERAL:

PHOTOINTERUPTOR

The Photointeruptor shown below is missing from the Parts Catalog. This information should be added all to existing FW740 Parts Catalog documentation.

MECHANICAL ELECTRICAL PAPER PATH

14 9

FSM

REFERENCE PART NUMBER AW020024 DESCRIPTION Photointeruptor QTY 1 PAGE 15 ITEM 14

PARTS OTHER

TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN

CUSTOMER SERVICE GROUP

BULLETIN NUMBER:

FW740 - 013

01/16/97

APPLICABLE MODEL: FW740

COPY QUALITY

Note: This copy intended as master of original for reproduction of additional bulletins.

SUBJECT: GENERAL:

PARTS CATALOG UPDATES

The following Parts Updates are being issued for all FW740 Parts Catalogs. The following informatio n should be incorporated into all existing Parts Catalog documentation.

MECHANICAL

UPDATE NO. 1 -

PRESSURE ROLLER STRIPPER - To prevent the Pressure Roller from being damaged, the following modifications have been made.

1. The material of the Strippers has been changed from metal to a Teflon-coated resin to decrease the friction level on the Pressure Roller.
ELECTRICAL

2. Springs have been added to press the Strippers against the Pressure Roller. 3. A Stopper Guide Plate has been added to prevent the Pressure Roller from contacting the Paper Exit Cover when it is bent. NOTE: The proper fusing temperature setting for each type of throughput material is very important to keep the Fusing and Pressure Rollers in good condition for as long as possible. Please refer to Tech Service Bulletin No. 010. Please also refer to Tech Service Bulletin No. 011 regarding how to judge whether the Pressure Roller is still usable or not. 40
31 43 42 41

FSM PARTS

INTERCHANGEABILITY CHART:
0 1 3/S
OLD and NEW parts can be used in both OLD and NEW parts CAN NOT be used in OLD machines. 2 NEW machines. OLD parts can be used in OLD and NEW machines. NEW parts can be used in OLD and NEW machines. OLD parts CAN NOT be used in NEW machines. 3 OLD parts CAN NOT be used in NEW machines. NEW parts CAN NOT be used in OLD machines. Must be installed as a set on units manufactured prior to the S/N cut-in. On units manufactured aft er the S/N cut-in or previously modified, use the new part numbers individually.

OTHER

Continued...

Tech Service Bulletin No. FW740 - 013 Page 2 of 2

REFERENCE OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. A1634171 A1634175 A1744155 AE044020 AA066285 A1634176 * DENOTES NEW ITEM DESCRIPTION Pressure Roller Stripper Pressure Roller Stripper Assy Stopper Guide - Paper Exit Pressure Roller Stripper Stripper Spring Stripper Stay Bracket QTY 10 01 01 0 16 0 16 01 INT 1 1 1 PAGE 27 27 27 27 27 27 ITEM 31 31 40* 41* 42* 43*

UNITS AFFECTED:
All FW740 copiers manufactured after Serial Number A3846060120 will have the new Pressure Roller Strippers installed during production.

UPDATE NO. 2 -

ORIGINAL FEED TABLE ASSEMBLY - As per field request, the Original Feed Table Assembly has been registered as a service part.

29

REFERENCE PART NUMBER A1636111 A1636113 * DENOTES NEW ITEM DESCRIPTION Original Feed Table - LT Original Feed Table - A4 QTY 1 1 PAGE 9 9 ITEM 29* 29*

'97831)6#7)6:-')#+6394

8)',2-'%0#7)6:-')#&900)8-2
NLfFMfMK

&900)8-2#291&)6U####*;KHN#g#NEH %440-'%&0)#13()0U# *;KHN

COPY QUALITY

Note: This copy intended as master of original for reproduction of additional bulletins.

SUBJECT: GENERAL:

T/S CORONA UNIT

A part number has been assigned to the T/S Corona Unit. This information should be incorporated into all existing FW740 Parts Catalog documentation.

MECHANICAL

REFERENCE NEW PART NO. A1633849 A1633850 DESCRIPTION T/S Corona Unit (EU) T/S Corona Unit (NA) QTY 1 1 PAGE 25 25 ITEM * *

ELECTRICAL

PAPER PATH

FSM

PARTS

OTHER

     

       

   U

KHNhNEINEfFKfNL    U
KHN SUBJECT: BLANK COPIES
Note: This copy intended as master of original for reproduction of additional bulletins.

COPY QUALITY

SYMPTOM:
Intermittent blank copies, partially blank copies or blank copies.

POSSIBLE CAUSES:
1. 2. 3. 4. Arcing from Charge Corona. Arcing from the High Voltage Leads / Receptacles. No voltage output from the C, G, B Power Pack. Fuse 3 Open.

MECHANICAL

SOLUTION:
Inspect the following parts for proper operation and/or signs of arching. Replace the parts as necessary. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Relay Receptacle - Charge Corona (AD021113). Charge Corona Receptacle (AD021114). Charge Corona Assembly (A1632050). Power Pack - C, G, B (AZ320079). Power Supply (AZ230056). Fuse 3 on Power Supply.

ELECTRICAL

NOTE: Inspect Grid Wire routing (see illustration below). Ensure that wire junctions are positioned as shown and staggered. If the wires cross or touch each other, arcing or copy quality problems may occur.

PAPER PATH

SM

PARTS

OTHER

8)',2-'%0#7)6:-')#&900)8-2
&900)8-2#291&)6U %440-'%&0)#13()0U ####+)78)82)6#h#2f% ####6-'3,#g#*;KHN ####7%:-2#h#2f% %EJG#g#gNNE NHfFMfML
The chart listed below shows the Last Bulletin Number issued for the A163 series. Bulletin Cross Reference Ricoh Group Companies Last Bulletin No. Gestetner N/A Ricoh 015 Savin N/A

SUBJECT: SYMPTOM:

SPRING REPLACEMENT CHARGE CORONA UNIT

PARTS

Note: This copy is intended as a master original for reproduction of additional bulletins.

Difficulty when replacing Charge Corona Wires.

CAUSE:
The angle of the opening on the Spring is only 45, and this makes it difficult to attach the spring. Also the notch in the Right End Block made it difficult to attach the Spring from above.

SOLUTION:
The angle on the opening of the Spring has been changed from 45 to 90 so the Spring can be replaced with less pulling. Also the length of the notch in the Right End Block has been changed from 4 mm to 2.9 mm so the spring end with a diameter of 3 mm can be hooked from above. See the Before and After figures below.
B e fo r e A fte r

45

90

B e fo r e
4 .0 m m

A fte r
2 .9 m m

GENERAL:
The following parts corrections are being issued for all A163 Parts Catalogs. OLD PART NO. AA060124 AD022336 NEW PART NO. AA060749 AD022348 DESCRIPTION Spring Right End Block- Charge QTY 5 1 INT 0 0 REFERENCE PAGE ITEM 23 9 23 14

Continued
RICOH GROUP COMPANIES

Tech Service Bulletin No. A163 001 Page 2 of 2

UNITS AFFECTED:
All copiers manufactured after the Serial Number listed below will have new style parts installed during production. MODEL NAME Gestetner N/A Ricoh FW740 Savin N/A SERIAL NUMBER N/A A3847050073 N/A

INTERCHANGEABILITY CHART:
0 1 3/S
OLD and NEW parts can be used in both OLD and NEW parts CAN NOT be used in OLD machines. 2 NEW machines. OLD parts can be used in OLD and NEW machines. NEW parts can be used in OLD and NEW machines. OLD parts CAN NOT be used in NEW machines. 3 OLD parts CAN NOT be used in NEW machines. NEW parts CAN NOT be used in OLD machines. Must be installed as a set on units manufactured prior to the S/N cut-in. On units manufactured after the S/N cut-in or units previously modified, use the new individual part numbers.

8)',2-'%0#7)6:-')#&900)8-2
&900)8-2#291&)6U %440-'%&0)#13()0U ####+)78)82)6#h#2f% ####6-'3,#h#*;KHN ####7%:-2#h#2f% SUBJECT: GENERAL:
The following parts updates are being issued for all A163 Parts Catalog.

%EJGg#NNF

NIfEIfML

UPDATED ENERGY STAR REQUIREMENTS

FIRMWARE

Note: This copy is intended as a master original for reproduction of additional bulletins.

UPDATE 1:

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS The Operating Instructions have been changed to announce changes concerning Energy Star (115V). REFERENCE PAGE ITEM 43 6

OLD PART NO. A1638637

NEW PART NO. A1638647

DESCRIPTION Operating Instructions Energy Star (115V)

QTY 1

INT 3

UPDATE 2:

AUTO SHUT-OFF TIME Auto Shut-Off Time has been changed from 1 to 120 minutes to 1 to 240 minutes. The change has been made to SP Mode 15. See Table below. Old Data 1 to 120 Minutes (1 Minute per step) Default: 30 Minutes New Data 1 to 240 Minutes (1 Minute per step) Default: 30 Minutes REFERENCE PAGE ITEM 39 1 35 7

15

Mode No. Auto Shut-Off Time Setting (115 V)

PART NO. A1635208 A1635230

DESCRIPTION ROM Main Board

OLD SUFFIX No Suffix A

NEW SUFFIX A B

QTY 1 1

The Main Board ROM revision A (file name 740A1A.EXE) can be downloaded through the Ricoh Technical Services BBS. NOTE: For more information about the Ricoh Technical Services BBS, order the Guide to Operation (P/N BBS00001) through normal NSPC channels.

INTERCHANGEABILITY CHART:
0 1 3/S
OLD and NEW parts can be used in both OLD and NEW parts CAN NOT be used in OLD machines. 2 NEW machines. OLD parts can be used in OLD and NEW machines. NEW parts can be used in OLD and NEW machines. OLD parts CAN NOT be used in NEW machines. 3 OLD parts CAN NOT be used in NEW machines. NEW parts CAN NOT be used in OLD machines. Must be installed as a set on units manufactured prior to the S/N cut-in. On units manufactured after the S/N cut-in or units previously modified, use the new individual part numbers.

RICOH GROUP COMPANIES

#'328630#23T#FLI

8)',2-'%0#7)6:-')#&900)8-2
&900)8-2#291&)6U %440-'%&0)#13()0U ####+)78)82)6#h#2f% ####6-'3,#h#*;KHN ####7%:-2#h#2f% SUBJECT: SMALL CAP
PARTS

%EJG#g#NNG

NKfFFfML

Note: This copy is intended as a master original for reproduction of additional bulletins.

GENERAL:
The part number for the Small Cap (A163 RIC/NRG)/(A251/A252) was incorrect. The following part correction is being issued for all A571 Parts Catalog Sections.

OLD PART NO. A5717479

NEW PART NO. A5717497

DESCRIPTION Small Cap (A163 RIC/NRG)/(A251/A252)

QTY 1

REFERENCE PAGE ITEM 3 19

RICOH GROUP COMPANIES

CONTROL NO. 296


    U    U     h f   h
KHNfKINfKJN    h f SUBJECT:

  

  
EEfEMfML

EJGf FIEf FIF g NNH

INSTALLATION CHECK GROUNDING WIRES n

PAPER PATH

Note: This copy is intended as a master original for reproduction of additional bulletins.

SYMPTOM:
Paper jams at the Registration Roller.

CAUSE:
The ground wire is positioned behind the Main Board on the Roll Feeder. NOTE: This can result in an electrical short.

n
ELECTRICAL

SOLUTION:
Ensure that both Ground Wires are attached. (See Illustration Below)

NOTE-1: To ensure grounding, tighten the screws for the ground wires until the spring washers [A] are flattened NOTE-2: Ensure that both wires are connected before powering up the copier. Attach the Long Wire [C] to the copier.

Attach the Short Wire [B] to the stand.

RICOH GROUP COMPANIES

CONTROL NO. 316

TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN

BULLETIN NUMBER: A163/A251/A252 - 005 02/14/2000 APPLICABLE MODEL: GESTETNER N/A RICOH FW740/750/760 SAVIN N/A SUBJECT: SYMPTOMS:
1. Background may appear on the copy. 2. The Used Toner Tank may fill up before the Toner Overflow Indicator begins to light.

OVERTONING !

Note: This copy is intended as a master original for reproduction of additional bulletins.

PARTS

CAUSE:
As developer deteriorates, the charge on the toner will gradually drop. This may cause excess toner to be supplied to the Development Unit and cause the toner density to become too high.

!
COPY QUALITY

SOLUTION:
The software controlling the toner supply ratio has been changed. In the new software, the TS Level (Toner Supply Ratio) has been changed as follows: TS Level Old New 0 No supply No supply 1 7.5% 7.5% 2 15% 7.5% 3 30% 7.5% 4 50% 15% 5 100% 100%

!
FIRMWARE

NOTE: The suffix of the ROM has been changed from A1635208A to A1635208B (FW740), A2515228C to A2515228D (FW750), & A2525238C to A2525238D (FW760). The Main PCB ROM revision D file name A251MA1D.EXE (FW750), file name A252MA1D.EXE (FW760) and ROM Revision B file name A163ma1B.exe (FW740) can be downloaded through the Ricoh Technical Services FTP Site http://tsc.ricohcorp.com. NOTE: Refer to Facts Line Bulletin # FL002 for more information about the FTP Internet Web Site.

UNITS AFFECTED:
All A251 and A252 machines manufactured after the Serial Numbers listed below will have the new firmware installed during production. MODEL NAME Ricoh FW740 Ricoh FW750 Ricoh FW760 SERIAL NUMBER N/A A7829020131 A7839020084

RICOH GROUP COMPANIES

CONTROL NO. 018WID

TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN

BULLETIN NUMBER: APPLICABLE MODEL: GESTETNER N/A RICOH FW760 SAVIN N/A SUBJECT: SYMPTOM:
When feeding thick paper, the Original Feed Motor may lock up.

A163/A251/A252 - 006

02/14/2000

!
PARTS

ORIGINAL JAM

Note: This copy is intended as a master original for reproduction of additional bulletins.

!
MECHANICAL

CAUSE:
There is not enough torque for the Original Feed Motor when thick originals are being used.

SOLUTIONS:
To improve the machine performance, the follow countermeasure has been implemented.

!
ELECTRICAL

1. The software has been modified to increase the torque of the Original Feed Motor. NOTE: The part number A2525238 of the ROM is the same only the suffix has changed from C to D. 2. The spring tension for the timing belt has been decreased. NOTE: The part number of the spring has been changed from AA060541 to AA060824. 3. The bushing on the right side only, for both original drive roller (AF020451) are lubricated with Mobil Temp 78 to decrease the friction load.

The PCB ROM revision D (file name A252MA1D.EXE) can be downloaded through the Ricoh Technical Services FTP Site http://tsc.ricohcorp.com. NOTE: Refer to Facts Line Bulletin # FL002 for more information about the FTP Internet Web Site.

UNITS AFFECTED:
All A252 machines manufactured after the Serial Number listed below will have the new firmware installed during production. All A252 machines manufactured after the Serial number listed will have the bushings lubricated during production. MODEL NAME Ricoh FW760 SERIAL NUMBER A7839020084

RICOH GROUP COMPANIES

CONTROL NO. 018WID

TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN

BULLETIN NUMBER: A163/A251/A252 - 007 11/20/2000 MODEL: APPLICABLE MODEL: GESTETNER - NA RICOH FW740/750/760 SAVIN - NA SUBJECT: GENERAL: SERVICE MANUAL - INSERT

Note: This copy is intended as a master original for reproduction of additional bulletins.

!
SERVICE MANUAL

The Service Manual pages listed below must be replaced with the pages supplied. Each bulletin package contains 1 set of replacement pages. PAGES: The revised areas have been highlighted by an arrow .

1-1 1-1

Updated Information (Specifications Page STM) Updated Information (Specifications Page FSM)

2000 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONTROL NO. 006WID

1. SPECIFICATIONS
Configuration: Copy Process: Original Feed: Table top Electrostatic transfer system Sheet feed 2 mm/400mm

Rev. 11/2000

Original Skew Tolerance: Original Size: Copy Size: Copying Speed: First Copy: Warm-up Time: Multi-Copy: Automatic Reset: Photoconductor: Drum Charge: Reproduction Ratio: Exposure System: Exposure Lamp: Development: Toner Replenishment: Toner Consumption: Development Bias: Toner Density Control: Image Density Adjustment: Paper Separation: Cleaning:

Maximum: 914 x 2,000 (36" x 80")mm Minimum: A4 (81/2" x 11") lengthwise Same as "Original Size" 3 cpm (A1/D sideways) 24 seconds (A1/D sideways) Within 5 minutes (Room temperature 23oC) 1 to 1 only 2 minutes after copying is finished (can be set to 1, 3, 4, or 5 minutes or to no auto reset) Organic photoconductor drum Single-wire with grid wires (Negative Charge) 1 : 1 (0.5%) Slit exposure via fiber optic array Fluorescent lamp (26 W) Dual-component dry toner system (Type 410, 2 bags) Cartridge system (750g toner/cartridge) 1,860 A1 or D copies per cartridge (6% original) Negative Direct toner density detection by induction sensor Development bias control + exposure control Dual wire ac corona and pick-off pawls Cleaning blade

A163

1-1

STM

Overall Machine Information

Rev. 11/2000

1. SPECIFICATIONS
Copy Process: Electrostatic transfer system Sheet feed 2 mm/400mm Maximum: 914 x 2,000 (36" x 80")mm Minimum: A4 (81/2" x 11") lengthwise Same as "Original Size" 3 cpm (A1/D sideways) 24 seconds (A1/D sideways) Within 5 minutes (Room temperature 23oC) 1 to 1 only 2 minutes after copying is finished (can be set to 1, 3, 4, or 5 minutes or to no auto reset) Organic photoconductor drum Single-wire with grid plate (Negative Charge) 1 : 1 (0.5%) Slit exposure via fiber optic array Fluorescent lamp (26 W) Dual-component dry toner system (Type 410, 2 bags) Cartridge system (750g toner/cartridge) 1,860 A1 or D copies per cartridge (6% original) Negative Direct toner density detection by induction sensor Development bias control + exposure control Dual wire ac corona and pick-off pawls Cleaning blade
Overall Machine Information
A163

Configuration:

Table top

Original Skew
Tolerance: Original Size: Copy Size:

Original Feed:

Copying Speed: First Copy: Warm-up Time: Multi-Copy: Automatic Reset: Photoconductor: Drum Charge: Reproduction Ratio: Exposure System: Exposure Lamp: Development: Toner Replenishment: Toner Consumption: Development Bias: Toner Density Control: Image Density Adjustment: Paper Separation: Cleaning:

FSM

1-1

TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN

BULLETIN NUMBER: 008 A163/A251/A252 - 008 03/19/2002 03/19/2002 MODEL: APPLICABLE MODEL: GESTETNER - NA RICOH FW740/FW750/FW760 SAVIN - NA
Note: This copy is intended as a master original for reproduction of additional bulletins.

SUBJECT:

POWER PACK (C.G.B.) !

PARTS

GENERAL:
The Power Pack (C.G.B.) part number has been changed as shown below. In addition, the shape of the Power Pack has been modified to facilitate factory assembly. The following part correction is being issued for all A163/A251/A252 Parts Catalogs.

!
ELECTRICAL

OLD PART NO. AZ320079

NEW PART NO. AZ320099

DESCRIPTION Power Pack C.G.B

QTY 1

INT 1

REFERENCE PAGE ITEM 55 14

UNITS AFFECTED:
All A163/A251/A252 copiers manufactured after the Serial Numbers listed below will have the new style Power Pack C.G.B installed during production.

MODEL NAME Gestetner Ricoh FW740 Ricoh FW750 Ricoh FW760 Savin

SERIAL NUMBER NA Service parts only A7820010001 A7830010032 NA

INTERCHANGEABILITY CHART:
0 1 3/S
OLD and NEW parts can be used in both OLD and NEW parts CAN NOT be used in OLD machines. 2 NEW machines. OLD parts can be used in OLD and NEW machines. NEW parts can be used in OLD and NEW machines. OLD parts CAN NOT be used in NEW machines. 3 OLD parts CAN NOT be used in NEW machines. NEW parts CAN NOT be used in OLD machines. Must be installed as a set on units manufactured prior to the S/N cut-in. On units manufactured after the S/N cut-in or previously modified, use the new part numbers individually.

Copyright 2002 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONTROL NO 011WID

TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN

BULLETIN NUMBER: A163/A251/A252 009 03/19/2002 03/19/2002 MODEL: APPLICABLE MODEL: GESTETNER - NA RICOH FW740/FW750/FW760 SAVIN - NA
Note: This copy is intended as a master original for reproduction of additional bulletins.

SUBJECT:

SPACER !
PARTS

GENERAL:
Please add the following component, which was omitted from the Parts Catalog: The following part addition is being issued for all A163/A251/A252 Parts Catalogs.

Item 44 Spacer AA132097

NEW PART NO. AA132097 *DENOTES NEW ITEM NUMBER

OLD PART NO.

DESCRIPTION Spacer

QTY 1

REFERENCE PAGE ITEM 19 44*

Copyright 2002 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONTROL NO 011WID

TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN

BULLETIN NUMBER: A163/A251/A252 011 11/05/2003 APPLICABLE MODEL: GESTETNER N/A LANIER N/A RICOH FW740/750/760 SAVIN N/A SUBJECT: LEFT AND RIGHT PAPER GUIDE

GENERAL:
PARTS

Two additional paper guides (pawls) have been added to the Transfer/Separation Corona Unit to further ensure that the copy paper does not come into contact with the corona wire if a jam occurs in this area. This addition effectively decreases the space between each pawl. NOTE: When replacing with the modified parts for the first time, they must be installed together as a set. The following part update is being issued for all A163/A251/A252 Parts Catalogs.

Copyright 2003 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved.

Page 1 of 2

Tech Service Bulletin No. A163/A251/A252 011

OLD PART NO. A1633858 A1633857

NEW PART NO. B0473858 B0473857

DESCRIPTION Left Paper Guide Guide: Paper: T&S Corona: Left Right Paper Guide Guide: Paper: T&S Corona: Right

QTY 2-0 0-2 2-0 0-2

INT 1 1

REFERENCE PAGE ITEM 25 25 1 2

UNITS AFFECTED:
All A163/A251/A252 copiers manufactured after the serial numbers listed below will have the new style Guides installed during production.

MODEL NAME Ricoh FW740 Ricoh FW750 Ricoh FW760

SERIAL NUMBER Service Parts Only Service Parts Only Service Parts Only

INTERCHANGEABILITY CHART:
0 1 3/S
OLD and NEW parts can be used in both OLD and NEW parts CAN NOT be used in OLD machines. 2 NEW machines. OLD parts can be used in OLD and NEW machines. NEW parts can be used in OLD and NEW machines. OLD parts CAN NOT be used in NEW machines. 3 OLD parts CAN NOT be used in NEW machines. NEW parts CAN NOT be used in OLD machines. Must be installed as a set on units manufactured prior to the S/N cut-in. On units manufactured after the S/N cut-in or previously modified, use the new part numbers individually.

Page 2 of 2

8)',2-'%0#7)6:-')#&900)8-2
&900)8-2#291&)6U %IKE#g#NNE NMfEEfML
The chart listed below shows the Last Bulletin Number issued for the A571 series. Bulletin Cross Reference Ricoh Group Companies Last Bulletin No. Gestetner NA Ricoh 5000 Savin NA

%440-'%&0)#13()0U ####+)78)82)6#h#2f% ####6-'3,#h#6300#*))()6#(14#*;KHN ####7%:-2#h#2f% SUBJECT: GENERAL: SMALL CAP

Note: This copy is intended as a master original for reproduction of additional bulletins.

PARTS

The following part correction is being issued for the A571 Parts Section.

OLD PART NO. A5717479

NEW PART NO. A5717497

DESCRIPTION Small Cap (A163 RIC/NRG)(A251/A252)

QTY 1

REFERENCE PAGE ITEM 3 19

RICOH GROUP COMPANIES

CONTROL NO. 304


    U

  

  
EEfNJfML

LGJ g NNE

   U     h f   h    (14

KJN    h f SUBJECT: GENERAL:
The following parts updates are being issued for all A836 Parts Catalog Section.

REAR COPY TRAY n

Note: This copy is intended as a master original for reproduction of additional bulletins.

PARTS

OLD PART NO. A8364465 A8364468 A1744493

NEW PART NO. A86364469

DESCRIPTION Rear Copy Tray Small (760S) Rear Copy Tray Sheet Center Copy Tray Sheet

QTY 6 10 20

REFERENCE PAGE ITEM 3 16 3 19 3 20

RICOH GROUP COMPANIES

CONTROL NO. 314

TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN

BULLETIN NUMBER: B047/B048 001 02/07/2002 MODEL: APPLICABLE MODEL: GESTETNER NA RICOH FW770/FW780 SAVIN NA SUBJECT: ORIGINAL FEED RIGHT PLATE AND FIBER OPTICS
Note: This copy is intended as a master original for reproduction of additional bulletins.

GENERAL:
The following parts corrections are being issued for all B047/B048 Parts Catalogs.

PARTS

INCORRECT PART NO. A1636061

CORRECT PART NO. B0476061

DESCRIPTION Original Feed Right Plate

QTY 1

REFERENCE PAGE ITEM 9 23

Incorrect: Illustration and Part number

Index 12 25 25 Part number A2521611 B0471630 B0481630 Description Fiber Optics (B048) Fiber Optics (B047) Fiber Optics (B048)

Correct: Illustration and Part number

Index 12 12 Part number Description B0471640 Fiber Optics (B047) B0481640 Fiber Optics (B048)

25

Copyright 2002 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONTROL NO 010WID

TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN

BULLETIN NUMBER: B047/B048 - 002 07/15/2002 MODEL: APPLICABLE MODEL: GESTETNER - NA RICOH FW770/FW780 SAVIN - NA SUBJECT: GENERAL: SERVICE MANUAL - INSERT

Note: This copy is intended as a master original for reproduction of additional bulletins.

!
SERVICE MANUAL

The Service Manual pages listed below must be replaced with the pages supplied. Each bulletin package contains 1 set of replacement pages.

An arrow has highlighted the revised areas .

PAGES:

4-25

Jam Code Table (Updated Information).

Copyright

2002 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved.

TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN

BULLETIN NUMBER: B047/B048 - 003 06/23/2003 APPLICABLE MODEL: GESTETNER A040/A041 LANIER LW110/LW111 RICOH FW770/FW780 SAVIN 7700W/7800W SUBJECT: TONER HOPPER JOINT SHAFT

GENERAL:
To ensure that the gear (AB017378) does not break when the toner cartridge is installed without being shaken, the Toner Hopper Joint Shaft has been changed as shown below. The following parts updates are being issued for all B047/B048 Parts Catalogs. NOTE: Make sure developer does not get into the joint shaft unit assembly when the developer is replaced. If developer gets into the joint part, disassemble the unit and clean it immediately. If the developer were to remain in the assembly, it would cause joint operation problems due to excessive mechanical load and parts wear.

Toner Supply Unit Plate E - Ring Seal 22x52x0.5 Shaft Holder Toner Supply Clutch Spring 10N

Left Side Plate

Joint Shaft Unit Toner Hopper Joint Shaft Toner Hopper

Copyright 2003 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved.

Page 1 of 2

Tech Service Bulletin No. B047/B048 003

OLD PART NO. AD001036 A1633147

NEW PART NO. AD001047 B0473100 B0103211 B0103212

DESCRIPTION Development Unit Joint Shaft Toner Hopper Joint Shaft Unit Toner Hopper Seal 22x52x0.5 Spring 10N

QTY 1-1 1-0 0-1 0-1 0-1

INT 3/S X/X 3/S 3/S 3/S

REFERENCE PAGE ITEM 23 * 23 23 23 23 23 37* 23 38*

* DENOTES NEW ITEM NUMBER

NOTE: The new parts cannot be installed in the old Development Unit (#AD001036), as the left side plate has been changed (which is not available as a service part).

UNITS AFFECTED:
All B047/B048 copiers manufactured after the serial numbers listed below will have the new style parts installed during production. MODEL NAME RICOH FW770 Gestetner A040 SAVIN 7700W Lanier LW110 RICOH FW780 Gestetner A040 SAVIN 7800W Lanier LW111 SERIAL NUMBER H8630400001

H8730400001

INTERCHANGEABILITY CHART:
0 1 3/S
OLD and NEW parts can be used in both OLD and NEW parts CAN NOT be used in OLD machines. 2 NEW machines. OLD parts can be used in OLD and NEW machines. NEW parts can be used in OLD and NEW machines. OLD parts CAN NOT be used in NEW machines. 3 OLD parts CAN NOT be used in NEW machines. NEW parts CAN NOT be used in OLD machines. Must be installed as a set on units manufactured prior to the S/N cut-in. On units manufactured after the S/N cut-in or previously modified, use the new part numbers individually.

Page 2 of 2

TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN

BULLETIN NUMBER: B047/B048 004 07/15/2003 APPLICABLE MODEL: GESTETNER A040/A041 LANIER LW110/LW111 RICOH FW770/FW780 SAVIN 7700W/7800W SUBJECT: RECEIVING TRAY COVER GENERAL:
The Receiving Tray Cover item 14 was incorrectly listed in the B047/B048 Parts Catalog. Please delete Items 14 and 104 from the parts list and the illustration as shown below. The following parts corrections are being issued for all B047/B048 Parts Catalogs. Deleted: Item 14 & Item 104 Deleted: Items 104
PARTS

OLD PART NO. B0471331 04340082B

NEW PART NO. -

DESCRIPTION Receiving Tray Cover Tapping Screw M4x8

QTY 10 n-3

INT -

REFERENCE PAGE ITEM 7 12 7 104

Copyright 2003 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved.

Page 1 of 1